Home

R&S FSW-K72/-K73 3GPP FDD User Manual

1. 114 5 3 1 Channel Power ACLR Measurements Channel Power ACLR measurements are performed as in the Spectrum application with the following predefined settings according to 3GPP specifications adjacent chan nel leakage ratio Table 5 3 Predefined settings for 3GPP FDD ACLR Channel Power measurements Standard BTS measurements only Normal base station Number of adjacent channels 2 For further details about the ACLR measurements refer to Measuring Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power in the R amp S FSW User Manual RF Measurements To restore adapted measurement parameters the following parameters are saved on exiting and are restored on re entering this measurement e Reference level and reference level offset e RBW VBW e Sweep time e Span e Number of adjacent channels e Fast ACLR mode The main measurement menus for the RF measurements are identical to the Spectrum application However for SEM and ACLR measurements in BTS measurements an additional softkey is available to select the required standard BTS Standard Switches between Normal mode and Home BS Home Base Station mode Switching this parameter changes the limits according to the specifications Remote command CONFigure WCDPower BTS STD on page 227 5 3 2 Occupied Bandwidth The Occupied Bandwidth measurement determines the bandwidth that the signal occu pies The oc
2. 40 Result SUMMI teretes tte S 41 Marker Teale Lm 41 Mrlbisg ch4lh iP 41 Diagram Displays a basic level vs frequency or level vs time diagram of the measured data to evaluate the results graphically This is the default evaluation method Which data is displayed in the diagram depends on the Trace settings Scaling for the y axis can be configured um EP EIN ee User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 40 R amp S FSW K72 K73 Measurements and Result Display CF 1 95 GHz 1001 pts 2 57 MHz Span 25 7 MHz Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH DIAG see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 230 Result Summary Result summaries provide the results of specific measurement functions in a table for numerical evaluation The contents of the result summary vary depending on the selected measurement function See the description of the individual measurement functions for details 2 Result Summary Channel Bandwidth Power TXI 1 iz 0 86 dBm 0 86 dBm ower Upper 79 59 dB 80 34 dB 85 04 dB 83 85 dB Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH RSUM See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 230 Marker Table Displays a table with the current marker values for the active markers This table may be displayed automatically if configured accordingly see Marker Table Display on page 126 Stimulus _ Response Function Function Result 13 197 GH 5 En 1 3705 unt Remote command LAY A
3. esses 287 e Measurement 2 Determining the Spectrum Emission Mask 287 e Measurement 3 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power 289 e Measurement 4 Triggered Measurement of Relative Code Domain Power 290 e Measurement 5 Measuring the Composite EVM seeee 291 e Measurement 6 Determining the Peak Code Domain Error 292 Programming Examples R amp S FSW K73 11 15 14 Measurement 1 Measuring the Signal Channel Power RST Reset the instrument INST CRE NEW MWCD UEMeasurement Activate a 3GPP FDD UE measurement channel named UEMeasurement DISP TRAC Y SCAL RLEV 0 Set the reference level to 0 dBm FREQ CENT 2 1175 GHz Set the center frequency to 2 1175 GHz CONF WCDP MS MEAS POW Select the power measurement DISP TRAC Y SCAL AUTO ONCE Optimize the scaling of the y axis for the current measurement INIT CONT OFF Stops continuous sweep SWE COUN 100 Sets the number of sweeps to be performed to 100 INIT WAI Start a new measurement with 100 sweeps and wait for the end CALC MARK FUNC POW RES CPOW Retrieves the calculated total power value of the signal channel Result 1 02 dB TRAC DATA TRACE1 Retrieve the trace data of the power measurement Result 1 201362252 1 173495054 1 187217355 1 186594367 1 171583891 1 188250422 1 204138160 1 181404829 1 1
4. seeseessse 44 SSGH Pf r EE EE E Eaa AEE PE 47 Standard BTS ACLR iiiter t rire er e PO ene 112 Status Ghannels 2 o rr corte era ree 103 105 Display 5 c rtr rte xr renes 21 Status registers 3GBPPFDD irte eren rore i ar odas 280 Contents 280 Quetying zs 280 STAT QUES POW 167 STATus QUEStionable DIQ sess 175 Suffixes COMMON 2 5 ideo ua crate ior oo i e ee a rene Riv 155 Remote commlirds 5 creed p bestiesr 152 Sweep ADOTING p Configuration remote Configuration softkey COUNT i i ette Symbol Constellation Val ALON REC Trace results Symbol EVM 5 ern nre eene Evaluation Trace results Symbol Magnitude Error Eval altiOm tete ere eo cepere rdc end 32 Trace Tesults rrr htt er res 253 Symbol Phase Error Eval atiOrnt asics iced proven cipere err acte cedar eras 32 Trace results rettet rr eene nas 253 Symbol rate 21 43 Displayed er encr tnr rrr rer niens 13 Relationship to code class siisii 44 Relationship to spreading factor 44 Synchronization CHECK TAE tanion ierit id cet tiende em oh 34 CONTIGUO eet tre a 95 Remote control 203 Softkey 2395 MY mm 95 T Eu T Er 21 TAE Configuration remote sssssee 162 CONMMOUNING eem 58 Determining 135 MU
5. ar Configuration softkey 2 nett 78 SOUINGS P 78 Analog Baseband Amplitude settings rne 82 Input uU Input settings ror neret nene 72 Analog Baseband B71 F l scale level trm ertt 84 VO MOJE urea Ht e eee te 73 Input type remote control see 180 Analog Baseband Interface B71 Amplitude settings Input settings err te rrt eter Analysis BTS Code Domain Settings 119 121 MOdO 1d ac el idl antares 94 Remote control 267 RF remote 228 RF measurements aa 116 Euer 116 Analysis interval MSRA nicer decens 93 95 201 Analysis liie etie nennen kenn 56 Antenna Bn Ely 64 Mel ugo E 64 Synchronization iere ed eat 96 Attentato tenet erret rennen been det 80 PUTO c o ecc cen dorso ul e a c ac te eiat 81 Configuration remote 191 Displayed wits ottenere anai riens 13 eigo TL 81 MANU AR 81 Option B25 ss ise sie nee ee eee reete Protective remote Auto all SOflKGy arviossaan ii ieaie 108 Auto level HySteresls ee etre cere iani 109 Reference level 80 84 108 Softkey 80 84 108 AUTO SCALING e 85 Auto scrambling code SOflkey 1 m peer hee t aeia Auto settings rre tre tees Meastime Auto softkey ssssssss Meastime Manual s
6. Max power Recommended ext attenuation 255 to 60 dBm 35 to 40 dB 250 to 55 dBm 30 to 35 dB 245 to 50 dBm 25 to 30 dB 240 to 45 dBm 20 to 25 dB 235 to 40 dBm 15 to 20 dB 3GPP FDD UE Test Models Max power Recommended ext attenuation 230 to 35 dBm 10 to 15 dB 225 to 30 dBm 5 to 10 dB 220 to 25 dBm 0 to 5 dB 20 dBm 0 dB e For signal measurements at the output of two port networks connect the reference frequency of the signal source to the rear reference input of the analyzer EXT REF IN OUT e To ensure that the error limits specified by the 3GPP standard are met the ana lyzer should use an external reference frequency for frequency measurements on base stations For instance a rubidium frequency standard may be used as a ref erence source e Ifthe base station is provided with a trigger output connect this output to the trig ger input of the analyzer Presetting Configure the R amp S FSW as follows e Set the external attenuation Reference level offset e Set the reference level e Set the center frequency e Set the trigger e Select the BTS standard and measurement 4 6 3GPP FDD UE Test Models The possible channel configurations for the mobile station signal are limited by 3GPP Only two different configurations for data channels DPDCH are permissible according to the specification In addition to these two channel configurations the HS DPCCH channel can be tr
7. In some cases numeric values may be returned as text e INF NINF Infinity or negative infinity Represents the numeric values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 e NAN Not a number Represents the numeric value 9 91E37 NAN is returned in case of errors Boolean Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state logically true is represen ted by ON or a numeric value 1 The OFF state logically untrue is represented by OFF or the numeric value 0 Querying boolean parameters When you query boolean parameters the system returns either the value 1 ON or the value 0 OFF Example Setting DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe ON Query DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe would return 1 Common Suffixes 11 1 6 3 Character Data Character data follows the syntactic rules of keywords You can enter text using a short or a long form For more information see chapter 11 1 2 Long and Short Form on page 152 Querying text parameters When you query text parameters the system returns its short form Example Setting SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE NORMal Query SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE would return NORM 11 1 6 4 Character Strings Strings are alphanumeric characters They have to be in straight quotation marks You can use a single quotation mark or a double quotation mark Example INSTRument DELete Spectrum 11 1 6 5 Block Data Block data is a format which is su
8. cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeaeaaaeaeaeenenenenes 204 SENSe CDPower STYBe reos coz esa sc iod Eau re EE VER Pe HE E E ER Ra RE tects 205 SENSe CDPower UCPich ANT antenna CODE lt CodeNumber gt This command sets the code number of the user defined CPICH used for signal analy sis Note this command is equivalent to the command SENSe CDPower UCPich CODE on page 284 for antenna 1 Suffix antenna 1 2 Antenna to be configured Parameters lt CodeNumber gt Range 0 to 225 RST 0 Example SENS CDP UCP ANT2 CODE 10 Mode BTS application only Manual operation See S CPICH Code Nr on page 96 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements SENSe CDPower UCPich ANT lt antenna gt PATTern Pattern This command defines which pattern is used for signal analysis for the user defined CPICH see SENSe CDPower UCPich ANT antenna STATe on page 204 Note this command is equivalent to the command SENSe CDPower UCPich PATTern on page 285 for antenna 1 Suffix antenna 112 Antenna to be configured Parameters Pattern 112 1 fixed usage of Pattern 1 according to standard 2 fixed usage of Pattern 2 according to standard RST 2 Example SENS CDP UCP ANT2 PATT 1 Mode BTS application only Manual operation See S CPICH Antenna Pattern on page 96 SENSe CDPower UCPich ANT lt antenna gt STATe State Defines whether the co
9. M 127 Peaks Marker positioning ront etes 129 DID m tceceties 128 Rec 129 Performing 3G FDD meas remient siisii 133 Phase Discontinuity vs Slot EvaluatiOr 5 tremere 27 Tirace resulls torre rennen rns 252 Phase Error vs Chip Evaluation cn trn rr t erre rra 28 Tirace resulls trie rennen 253 PICH allo P Y 45 46 Channel table rte ceret 103 105 NUMBER OF M ina 17 ul e HI 21 PK GCDB e 16 Power Channel Meas example Channels Gorittol 4 inciter Difference to previous slot seessesssse 120 Displayed rre anana Inactive channels IReference annaa ani aas Power vs Slot Eval atiOn 2 2 erret aa AEE ENEE 29 Trace Tesulls 5 etr ner en e res 249 Power vs Symbol EvalljatiOr 5 rrr m rr ntes 30 Traceesults ctr hoe 250 Preamplifier Setting i SOftKEY M Naaa Predefined tables Channel detection e re metre s 46 Presetting Ghannels 5 eo ree cap tra eviter ree 62 284 PHOUIQQED E 91 Probes MUT roo V uro o psp 74 DOINGS iosair mer b ro ce rh P FEX oa 74 Programming examples SGPP EDD x s erii enc et n de Composite EVM Incorrect scrambling code criais 289 PODE eosdem ofi ete trates 292 Reference frequency 289 Relative code
10. The channels are sorted by code number 11 9 2 4 Power vs Slot When the trace data for this evaluation is queried 16 pairs of slots slot number of CPICH and level values are transferred lt slot number gt lt level value in dB gt for 16 slots 11 9 2 5 Result Summary When the trace data for this evaluation is queried the results of the result summary are output in the following order composite EVM gt peak CDE dB gt lt carr freq error Hz gt lt chip rate error ppm gt lt total power dB gt lt trg to frame us lt EVM peak channel gt lt EVM mean channel gt lt code class gt lt channel number gt lt power abs channel dB gt lt power rel channel dB referenced to CPICH or total power gt lt timing offset chips gt lt I Q offset gt Q imbalance gt 11 9 2 6 Composite EVM RMS When the trace data for this evaluation is queried 15 pairs of slots slot number of CPICH and level values are transferred 11 9 2 7 11 9 2 8 11 9 2 9 11 9 2 10 Retrieving Results slot number gt level value in gt for 15 slots Peak Code Domain Error When the trace data for this evaluation is queried 15 pairs of slots slot number of CPICH and level values are transferred slot number gt level value in dB for 15 slots Composite Constellation When the trace data for this evaluation is queried the real and the imaginary bra
11. ree eco petite 43 Code Power Display 120 122 GOGCS ontatge ar e opo get eL Ez Cup u 43 Number per chantiel erroe 44 Complementary cumulative distribution function See CODE iacit icc ne redegi Iia 39 Composite Constellation MIC C 22 Trace results 250 Composite EVM xus 16 Evaluation oes wale Measurement example ssesessesesss 146 Programming example enhn 291 Trace Tesulls cce eee edet ra 249 Compressed Mode nep rrt trn 64 Conflict Channel table te rrr Ei rte eet aca 104 Constellation Parameter Bonaire iaire ere i ec in cs 121 Constellation points Mapping in MIMO channels eeseees 49 Continue single sweep SOflK6y iter eer rere encres 106 Continuous sweep SOftK6y ni cb em etre encres 106 Conventions SCPICOmtalds scc tetro rte cnr Eee exerce dees 151 Copying Measurement channel remote 156 Coupling Input remote D Data acquisition IMSRA C 93 95 201 see Signal capturing eror Rer o nee tien 93 Data format Isis Die NN Em 254 DC offset Analog Baseband B71 remote control 181 see IQ offset sssssssssssee 120 122 Delta markers rige CAE 125 Diagram footer information sssseeee 14 Diagrams Evaluation method sess 40 Footer
12. sess 175 ep 79 83 Evaluation methods hcl 230 Evaluation range BRANCH ee 118 119 hcl 117 Remote control 4 tnr ies 222 SENGS 116 Res S 117 SOflK6y icem reet e mr enitn 116 Evaluations BitStre p ararnir aaa 121 GDA oe M 18 RP sss 40 Selecting wie 19 jr il 34 EVM Symbol rer een nh res 17 EVM vs Chip Evaluatiori rre 24 Trace results ttr erret n 252 Exporting VO data ines 59 130 131 298 VQ data remote iaceo re Fo eene its 276 Scrambling codes 506 Rec 131 Trace results remote ees 261 External trigger Level remote rrr terere ena 196 SoftkGy cierre meer ht e rin 89 F File format lo Xe i e e E E 294 Files VQ data binary XML senes 298 Q parameter XML esee 294 Filters High pass remote sss High pass RF input YIG remote H Format Data remote enirn ntt traten 254 Scrambling codes BTS ssesses 65 Scrambling codes UE m ramesc cc a E A estu EA E IE E MES Capture Mode zo oranti merae re ores ETTE Evaluation range Number to capture Selected Free Run Trigger SoftKey eer nre trente ttes 89 Frequency Configuration remote sss 186 Co
13. 5 2 10 3 Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Creating a New Table Creates a new channel table See chapter 5 2 10 4 Channel Details BTS Measure ments on page 101 For step by step instructions on creating a new channel table see To define or edit a channel table on page 134 Editing a Table You can edit existing channel table definitions The details of the selected channel are displayed in the Channel Table dialog box See chapter 5 2 10 4 Channel Details BTS Measurements on page 101 Copying a Table Copies an existing channel table definition The details of the selected channel are dis played in the Channel Table dialog box See chapter 5 2 10 4 Channel Details BTS Measurements on page 101 Remote command BTS measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle COPY on page 210 UE measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle COPY on page 211 Deleting a Table Deletes the currently selected channel table after a message is confirmed Remote command BTS measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle DELete on page 210 UE measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DELete on page 212 Restoring Default Tables Restores the predefined channel tables delivered with the instrument Channel Table Settings and Functions Some general settings and functions are available when configuring a predefined channel table Channel tables are configured in the Channel Tabl
14. Optimize the scaling of the y axis for the Composite EVM measurement INIT CONT OFF Stops continuous sweep SWE COUN 100 Set the number of sweeps to be performed to 100 INIT WAI Start a new measurement with 100 sweeps and wait for the end TRAC2 DATA TRACE1 Retrieve the trace data of the Peak Code Domain Error measurement Result 0 000000000 6 730751038E 001 1 000000000 6 687619019E 001 2 000000000 6 728615570E 001 JA Massed Programming Examples R amp S FSW K73 Table 11 16 Trace results for Peak Code Domain Error measurement Slot number Peak Error 0 6 730751038E 001 1 6 687619019E 001 2 6 728615570E 001 Q Parameter XML File Specification 12 I Q Data File Format ig tar l Q data is packed in a file with the extension iq tar An ig tar file contains I Q data in binary format together with meta information that describes the nature and the source of data e g the sample rate The objective of the iq tar file format is to separate l Q data from the meta information while still having both inside one file In addition the file format allows you to preview the I Q data in a web browser and allows you to include user specific data The iq tar container packs several files into a single tar archive file Files in tar format can be unpacked using standard archive tools see http en wikipedia org wiki Comparison of file archivers available for most operating sy
15. Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier for analog baseband input the full scale level are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression clipping and overload conditions are minimized In order to do so a level measurement is performed to determine the optimal reference level This function is only available for the MSRA MSRT Master not for the applications You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 109 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 222 Autosearch for Scrambling Code Starts a search on the measured signal for all scrambling codes The scrambling code that leads to the highest signal power is chosen as the new scrambling code Searching requires that the correct center frequency and level are set The scrambling code search can automatically determine the primary scrambling code number The secondary scrambling code number is expected as 0 Alternative scrambling codes can not be detected Therefore the range for detection is 0x0000 Ox1FFOh where the last digit is always O Remote command SENSe CDPower LCODe SEARch IMMediate on page 163 Auto Scale Window Automatically determines the optimal ra
16. sence ey INPut DIQ GDEVIGS cree rere deter e pte ne ent ee pa E e e E VERE MERE INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling INPut DIG RANGE UPB 6r 2 rte cene uere ses eoe ete cena ese eet ter ce ah ves eer eye ere rne eh E dne pene INPut DIG RANGSEUPBer E AUTO tto rrt eet acai E ad Ci epa eet Ie eve ve E ive a 172 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT i oerte nra re EE ri cea ene XN Ye n Ee eee Ybe FE E aE e DR eet eR EXER dua 173 INPUEDIQ SRAT re aeee TEE 174 INPUt DIO SRATG AU TO casse ether tepore e o ee ta E EY EE EAE Ye E SE TET EE e eR d 174 lilsszin e S INPut EATT AUTO s INPUEEATT STATS victore ree ERR EE Ne e hr V iio ERG MU NI Cdp v ve AV Ed ee ANE INPut FILTer HPASSESTATe ciini cio adea eger kh Xo en rns kc erben EX e RE CE ure x a Sek Pr een 168 INPULFIL TEnYIGESTA TG c INPUt GAINISTAT 6 P INPUEGAIIN VALUe ation eee Episco Ron ret lise Poet a eee EET ei ci Ee ro efe lenc sua D Hox MER ER FEL HE Pr M e RSEN dev es dll E INPut 1Q BALanced STATe INPutiQ FULLEscale AUTO itte eoe tete to ice Deep Dota EE a E rn odd x eS ER eed INPut IQ FULLEscale E EVel r oorr ette rn eer nore ere rro he eterne ly siue amic I EE lli cji d aE INSTr ment GREate DU
17. 5 3 4 Spectrum Emission Mask The Spectrum Emission Mask measurement determines the power of the 3GPP FDD signal in defined offsets from the carrier and compares the power values with a spec tral mask specified by 3GPP For further details about the Spectrum Emission Mask measurements refer to Spec trum Emission Mask Measurement in the R amp S FSW User Manual The 3GPP FDD applications perform the SEM measurement as in the Spectrum appli cation with the following settings Table 5 6 Predefined settings for 3GPP FDD SEM measurements Standard W CDMA 3GPP REV BTS W CDMA 3GPP FWD UE By default the Normal base station standard is used How ever you can switch to the Home base station standard using the BTS Standard softkey Span 8 MHz Number of ranges 11 Fast SEM ON Number of power classes 4 Power reference type Channel power D Changing the RBW and the VBW is restricted due to the definition of the limits by the standard To restore adapted measurement parameters the following parameters are saved on exiting and are restored on re entering this measurement e Reference level and reference level offset e Sweep time e Span RF Measurements 5 3 5 RF Combi This measurement combines the following measurements e chapter 5 3 1 Channel Power ACLR Measurements on page 111 e chapter 5 3 2 Occupied Bandwidth on page 112 e chapter 5 3 4 Spectrum Emission Mask o
18. Channel slot number determined by combining the value of the selected CPICH and the channel s timing offset Channel Mapping UE measurements only Branch onto which the channel is mapped I or Q specified by the standard Chan Power Abs Channel power absolute Chan Power Rel Channel power relative referenced to CPICH or total signal power Timing Offset Offset between the start of the first slot in the channel and the start of the analyzed 3GPP FDD BTS frame RCDE Relative Code Domain Error for the complete frame of the selected channel Symbol EVM Peak and average of the results of the error vector magnitude evaluation User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 17 Code Domain Analysis No of Pilot Bits Number of pilot bits of the selected channel Modulation Type BTS measurements Modulation type of an HSDPA channel High speed physical data channels can be modulated with QPSK 16 QAM or 64 QAM modulation UE measurements the modulation type of the selected channel Valid entries are e BPSK Ifor channels on I branch e BPSK Q for channels on Q branch e NONE for inactive channels 3 1 2 Evaluation Methods for Code Domain Analysis The captured I Q data can be evaluated using various different methods without having to start a new measurement All evaluation methods available for the selected 3GPP FDD measurement are displayed in the evaluation bar in SmartGrid mode The
19. H 168 VIPS OP M 168 INPutFIETeCHPASSDSTATS retire Asiaccee papbececeeshesaedeossguacddastgpnenctesahecasdeateacedededean 168 INPutFIE Ter YIGDS ATQ cda oii c tt ete rne cade eode eene 169 sammelt m 169 INPUESELGGL o creer rtr tr e e o Eye NERk hers SOY vU ERR IRISH NR XENKE OUR NES RN IUEUINRERKERG E ENIM R KNEE 169 INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet This command resets the attenuator and reconnects the RF input with the input mixer after an overload condition occured and the protection mechanism intervened The error status bit bit 3 in the STAT QUES POW status register and the INPUT OVLD message in the status bar are cleared For details on the status register see the R amp S FSW User Manual The command works only if the overload condition has been eliminated first Usage Event Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements INPut CONNector lt ConnType gt Determines whether the RF input data is taken from the RF input connector or the optional Analog Baseband connector This command is only available if the Analog Baseband interface R amp S FSW B71 is installed and active for input For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and l Q Input User Manual Parameters lt ConnType gt RF RF input connector AIQI Analog Baseband connector RST RF Example INP CONN
20. If enabled the reference level for digital input is adjusted to the full scale level automat ically if the full scale level changes This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is installed Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level on page 71 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer lt Level gt Defines or queries the Full Scale Level i e the level that corresponds to an I Q sam ple with the magnitude 1 This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is installed Parameters lt Level gt lt numeric value gt Range 1 uv to 7 071 V RST 1V Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 71 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT Unit Defines the unit of the full scale level see Full Scale Level on page 71 The availa bility of units depends on the measurement application you are using This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is installed Parameters Level VOLT DBM DBPW WATT DBMV DBUV DBUA AMPere RST Volt Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 71 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements INPut DIQ SRATe lt SampleRate gt This command specifies or queries the sample rate of the input signal from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17
21. Parameters Type LONG SHORt RST LONG Example CDP LCOD TYPE SHOR Mode UE application only Manual operation See Type on page 67 SENSe CDPower QPSK State If enabled it is assumed that the signal uses QPSK modulation only Thus no syn chronization is required and the measurement can be performed with optimized set tings and speed 11 5 2 11 5 2 1 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Mode BTS application only Manual operation See QPSK Modulation Only on page 67 SENSe CDPower SFACtor lt SpreadingFactor gt This command defines the spreading factor The spreading factor is only significant for Peak Code Domain Error evaluation Parameters SpreadingFactor 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 RST 512 Example SENS CDP SFACtor 16 Configuring the Data Input and Output NEL ol I 167 e Remote Commands for the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17Y 170 e Configuring Input via the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 178 Sotting Up PROD SS iso ses cae cece dea neges eee dpegse eect ceeesies Nanan ANNAN EEEN NNNNA ENNE 183 e Contiguring the Guu co ccn E e ee ce cates 185 RF Input INPUEATTenuation P ROTeDUOIS RES e dence rex ee Ios ge raa rere eaae yeh eere tau 167 das seeto ssr tec mE
22. Value RF Aenal ereo naran a EE eerie EE E AEE EEE 80 L Attenuation Mode VAE cmi E 81 Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 sssssssssssssseeeeeennnene 81 jeter up m rand 81 L Preamplifier option B34 sss scis centra bd deben tir ata sain nao b hn 82 Reference Level Defines the expected maximum reference level Signal levels above this value may not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display OVLD for analog baseband or digitial baseband input The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Since the R amp S FSW hardware is adapted according to this value it is recommended that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good signal to noise ratio Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Note that the Reference Level value ignores the Shifting the Display Offset It is important to know the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel on page 189 Shifting the Display Offset Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespec tive of the selected unit The scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly Defi
23. Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements STATus QUEStionable DIQ NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the Negative TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Setting parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 STATus QUEStionable DIQ PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the Positive TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Setting parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 STATus QUEStionable DIQ EVENt lt ChannelName gt This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the STATus QUEStionable DIQ register for IQ measurements Readout deletes the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters
24. State This command switches the channel table on or off When switched on the measured channel table is stored under the name RECENT and is selected for use After the RECENT channel table is switched on another channel table can be selected with the command CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle SELect on page 212 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CONF WCDP CTAB ON Mode UE application only Manual operation See Using Predefined Channel Tables on page 98 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle CATalog This command reads out the names of all channel tables stored on the instrument The first two result values are global values for all channel tables the subsequent values are listed for each individual table Return values lt TotalSize gt Sum of file sizes of all channel table files in bytes lt FreeMem gt Available memory left on hard disk in bytes lt FileName gt File name of individual channel table file lt FileSize gt File size of individual channel table file in bytes Usage Query only Mode UE application only Manual operation See Predefined Tables on page 99 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle COPY lt FileName gt This command copies one channel table onto another one The channel table to be copied is selected with command CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle NAME on page 213 The name of the channel table may contain a maximum of 8 characters Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Erro
25. T Offs Chips BTS measurements only Timing offset Code Domain Power 1 Code Domain Power Fig 3 3 Code Domain Power Display for 3GPP FDD BTS measurements The Code Domain Power evaluation shows the power of all possible code channels in the selected channel slot The x axis shows the possible code channels from 0 to the highest spreading factor Due to the circumstance that the power is regulated from slot to slot the result power may differ between different slots Detected channels are displayed yellow The selected code channel is highlighted red The codes where no channel could be detected are displayed green Note Effects of missing or incomplete pilot symbols In Autosearch channel detec tion mode the application expects specific pilot symbols for DPCH channels If these symbols are missing or incomplete the channel power in the Code Domain Power evaluation is displayed green at the points of the diagram the channel should appear due to its spreading code and a message INCORRECT PILOT is displayed in the User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 21 R amp S9FSW K72 K73 Measurements and Result Display status bar In this case check the pilot symbols for those channels using the Power vs Slot or the Bitstream evaluations Optionally all QPSK modulated channels can also be recognized without pilot symbols see HSDPA UPA on page 63 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CDPower See LAYout ADD W
26. This example demonstrates how to store complex cartesian data in float32 format using MATLAB Q Save vector of complex cartesian I Q data i e iqiqiq N 100 iq randn 1 N 1j randn 1 N fid fopen xyz complex float32 w for k 1 length iq fwrite fid single real iq k float32 fwrite fid single imag iq k float32 end fclose fid List of Remote Commands 3GPP FDD SENSe JADJUUSEADBL crates eot rr ree Pp I E ED eH er ob Get E wineries 220 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DU alioi encor rot reu en n rac ra peer FO E Ur EEEO EN 220 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MOBDPE ternera entrent n tnr pete rh naa 220 SENSe JAD Just CONFigure HYS T eresis EOW r irren rro ther tertii o eins 221 SENSe J ADJust CONFigure H YS L eresis U PBOr siuco siege onto ne ea err EHE PIRE Spe EEO Dee EPSA 221 SENSeJADIJUSEWEV Elsi C C 222 SENSE TAVER3gG COUN iirrainn aE tc iere pace b D rec rae px bordel e T PE TREE 218 J Ed 81D gros ess METTI 162 SENSe GDPOWOE BASE curte tec euet tcr d et eta c Pep ce e ve Y Eg aia 201 SENS6 GCDPOWEF CODE i 222 SENSE CDPOWEr 8l uz S 224 SENSe amp CBDPower ETGHIDS 2trrtn entr teer epe rere nere ntn eve e e e n E TREE REESE 226 SENSe CDPower FIETer S TAT6L cuo to ott tenent etr rrr rh dn 202 SENSe CDPower FIRAMeL VALUue sie siu erre tenerse
27. lt TriggerLevel gt Range 0 5V to 3 5 V RST 1 4 V Example TRIG LEV 2V Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 90 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level at the third intermediate frequency that must be exceeded to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered For compatibility reasons this command is also available for the baseband power trigger source when using the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 10 dBm Example TRIG LEV IFP 30DBM TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the magnitude the I Q data must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 130 dBm to 30 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV IQP 30DBM Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level the RF input must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed I
28. Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce State This command turns the 28 V supply of the BNC connector labeled NOISE SOURCE CONTROL on the front panel on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example DIAG SERV NSO ON Manual operation See Noise Source on page 75 OUTPut IF IFFRequency Frequency This command defines the frequency for the IF output The IF frequency of the signal is converted accordingly This command is available in the time domain and if the IF VIDEO DEMOD output is configured for IF Parameters Frequency RST 50 0 MHz Frontend Configuration The following commands configure frequency amplitude and y axis scaling settings which represent the frontend of the measurement setup ELIGE yt qe rk e oett ERU HI D xe RE ae MR Meus raa ve ue nda d 186 e Amplituda Sailings texere ERI tat ER ena ERREUR ERR FP nee trari DA ERR i PIU E ERRR dU QURE 188 e Configuring the Attenuation esssssssssssseseeeneennne eene 191 Frequency SENSe JFREQuency CENE rope reden cue dade er aiian aa aaan Aaaa ERR ER e Porta 186 SENSE FRE QUN GENTSESTEP icit ed gu ee ett tero otra dee tuere 187 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO ccscscscesssssscssesescscscesssscessessesesevevevscseseenenenes 187 SENSE PREQUBHCY OPES gl oreet Erat Ret tags EEA cede 188 SE
29. If Analog Baseband input is used measurements in the frequency and time domain are not available Analog Baseband Input State sssssssssssssssssssseeeee nennen 73 VQ ols T H U HH S 73 JO UT eine giu TEE 73 Conter FregUeNOy sorena D 73 Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Analog Baseband Input State Enables or disable the use of the Analog Baseband input source for measurements Analog Baseband is only available if the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 is installed Remote command INPut SELect on page 169 I Q Mode Defines the format of the input signal For more information on I Q data processing modes see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and I Q Input User Manual jQ The input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application Two inputs are required for a complex signal one for the in phase component and one for the quadrature component Only Low IF I The input signal at the BASEBAND INPUT I connector is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center frequency is set to 0 Hz the real baseband signal is dis played without down conversion Real Baseband 1 If a center frequency greater than O Hz is set the input signal is down converted with the center frequency Low IF 1 Q Only Low IF Q The input signal at the BASEBAND INPUT Q connector is fi
30. Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Reference Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier for analog baseband input the full scale level are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression clipping and overload conditions are minimized In order to do so a level measurement is performed to determine the optimal reference level This function is only available for the MSRA MSRT Master not for the applications You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 109 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 222 Full Scale Level Mode Value The full scale level defines the maximum power you can input at the Baseband Input connector without clipping the signal The full scale level can be defined automatically according to the reference level or manually For manual input the following values can be selected e 025V e 05V e 1V e 2V If probes are connected the possible full scale values are adapted according to the probe s attenuation and maximum allowed power For details on probes see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and I Q Input User Manual Remote command INPut IQ FULLscale AUTO on page 179 INPut IQ FULLscale LEVel on page 180 5 2 5 3 Y Axis Scaling
31. Stores I Q data and the comment to the specified file Manual operation See Q Export on page 131 MMEMory STORe IQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command writes the captured 1 Q data to a file The file extension is iq tar By default the contents of the file are in 32 bit floating point format Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters 1 lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores the captured I Q data to the specified file Manual operation See Q Export on page 131 Configuring the Application Data Range MSRA mode only 11 12 Configuring the Application Data Range MSRA mode only In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master actually captures data the MSRA applications define an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the application data For the 3GPP FDD BTS application the application data range is defined by the same command
32. The Bitstream evaluation displays the demodulated bits of a selected channel for a given slot Depending on the symbol rate the number of symbols within a slot can vary from 12 min to 384 max For QPSK modulation a symbol consists of 2 Bits I and Q For BPSK modulation a symbol consists of 1 Bit only used R amp S FSW K72 K73 Measurements and Result Display 4 Bitstream Table TZM MTAA NTO ks isal 44 66 88 7110 132 154 176 198 220 CPICH 20xDI N Fig 3 1 Bitstream display for 3GPP FDD BTS measurements TIP Select a specific symbol using the MKR key while the display is focused If you enter a number the marker jumps to the selected symbol which is highlighted by a blue circle The diagram footer indicates e Channel format type and modulation type HS PDSCH only Number of data bits D1 D2 Number of TPC bits TPC Number of TFCI bits TFCI Number of pilot bits Pil Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH BITS see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 230 TRACe lt n gt DATA ABITstream Channel Table The Channel Table evaluation displays the detected channels and the results of the code domain power measurement The channel table can contain a maximum of 512 entries In BTS measurements this corresponds to the 512 codes that can be assigned within the class of spreading factor 512 In UE measurements this corresponds to the 256 codes that can be assigned within the class of spreadin
33. The vertical axis scaling is configurable In Code Domain Analysis the y axis usually displays the measured power levels Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Amplitude Scale VA recite 0 0 dB Aims 70 0 dB Auto Scale Once Restore Scale Siaeiiiepinm 1 Code Domain Power Y Maximum Y MIDIDUET aes croce rte ecy ee rate S AE See aser ies 85 Auto Scale OB n deett ede aceti ace ve tide aco rg a ea ded ea e e e D d 85 Restore Scale WITIdDW iuc oie reet eder adei vy r Ead uod 85 Y Maximum Y Minimum Defines the amplitude range to be displayed on the y axis of the evaluation diagrams Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe MAXimum on page 189 DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe MINimum on page 189 Auto Scale Once Automatically determines the optimal range and reference level position to be dis played for the current measurement settings The display is only set once it is not adapted further if the measurement settings are changed again Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 188 Restore Scale Window Restores the default scale settings in the currently selected window 5 2 5 4 Frequency Settings Frequency settings for the input signal can be configured via the Frequency dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Select the FREQ key and then the Frequency Config softkey e Select the Frequency tab in t
34. lt Channels gt ch lt Type gt lt xyz gt a valid Windows file name e Format complex polar or real see Format element e Channels Number of channels see NumberOfChannels element e Type float32 float64 int8 int16 int32 or int64 see DataType element Examples e xyz complex 1ch float32 e xyz polar 1ch floato4 e xyzreal 1ch int16 e xyz complex 16ch int8 UserData Optional contains user application or device specific XML data which is not part of the iq tar specification This element can be used to store additional information e g the hardware configuration User data must be valid XML content PreviewData Optional contains further XML elements that provide a preview of the I Q data The preview data is determined by the routine that saves an iq tar file e g R amp S FSW For the definition of this element refer to the RsIqTar xsd schema Note that the preview can be only displayed by current web browsers that have JavaScript enabled and if the XSLT stylesheet open IgTar xml file in web browser xslt is available Q Parameter XML File Specification Example ScalingFactor Data stored as int16 and a desired full scale voltage of 1 V ScalingFactor 1 V maximum int16 value 1 V 215 3 0517578125e 5 V Scaling Factor Numerical value Numerical value x ScalingFac tor Minimum negative int16 value 215 32768 1V Maximum positive int16 value 215
35. lt TimingOffset gt lt PilotLtength gt lt ChannelType gt Status lt CDP gt This command defines or queries the values of the selected channel table Each line of the table consists of 8 values Channels PICH CPICH and PCCPCH may only be defined once If channel CPICH or PCCPCH is missing in the command it is automatically added at the end of the table Prior to this command the name of the channel table has to be defined with the com mand CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABl1e NAME on page 213 Parameters lt CodeClass gt Range 2 to 9 lt CodeNumber gt Range 0 to 511 11 5 7 5 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements lt UseTFCI gt 0 1 0 not used 1 used lt TimingOffset gt Step width 256 for code class 9 512 Range 0 to 38400 lt PilotLength gt code class 9 4 code class 8 2 4 8 code class 7 4 8 code class 5 6 8 code class 2 3 4 16 lt ChannelType gt For the assignment of channel types to parameters see table 11 3 lt Status gt 0 not active 1 active lt CDP gt for queries CDP relative to total signal power for settings CDP absolute or relative Example CONF WCDP CTAB NAME NEW TAB Defines the channel table name CONF WCDP CTAB DATA 8 0 0 0 0 0 T 0 200 989 L 0 070 0 1 0 0905 17 170 256 8 0 1 0 00 Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Channel Type on page 102 See Channel Number Ch SF on page 103 S
36. lt TraceNo gt Always 1 lt Frequency gt Frequency of the peak in Hz lt Level gt Absolute level of the peak in dBm lt DeltaLevel gt Distance to the limit line in dB Example MMEM STOR FIN C test Saves the current marker peak list in the file test dat MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe lt Trace gt lt FileName gt This command exports trace data from the specified window to an ASCII file Trace export is only available for RF measurements For details on the file format see Reference ASCII File Export Format in the R amp S FSW User Manual Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters lt Trace gt Number of the trace to be stored lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR1 TRAC 3 C TEST ASC Stores trace 3 from window 1 in the file TEST ASC Usage SCPI confirmed 11 9 5 Retrieving Results FORMat DEXPort DSEParator lt Separator gt This command selects the decimal separator for data exported in ASCII forma
37. 0 Sweep starts earlier pre trigger Remote command TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 194 Hysteresis Trigger Source Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs Settting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level This setting is only available for IF Power trigger sources The range of the value is between 3 dB and 50 dB with a step width of 1 dB Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis on page 195 Trigger Holdoff Trigger Source Defines the minimum time in seconds that must pass between two trigger events Trigger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 195 Slope Trigger Source For all trigger sources except time and frequency mask Realtime only you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe on page 197 Capture Offset Trigger Source This setting is only available for applications in MSRA operating mode It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements it defines the time offset between the capture buffer start and the start of the extracted application data In MSRA mode the offset must be a positive value as the capture buffer starts at the trigger
38. 10 3 Measurement Example 3 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power 10 3 1 Synchronizing the Reference Frequencies The synchronization of the reference oscillators both of the DUT and R amp S FSW strongly reduces the measured frequency error ESS SS a eT User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 141 Measurement 3 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power Test setup gt Connect the reference input REF INPUT 1 20 MHZ on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW to the reference output REF on the rear panel of R amp S SMU coaxial cable with BNC connectors Settings on the R amp S SMU The settings on the R amp S SMU remain the same Settings on the R amp S FSW In addition to the settings of the basic test activate the use of an external reference gt SETUP gt Reference gt Reference Frequency Input External Reference 10 MHz The displayed carrier frequency error should be 10 Hz 10 3 2 Behaviour with Deviating Center Frequency In the following the behaviour of the DUT and the R amp S FSW with an incorrect center frequency setting is shown 1 Tune the center frequency of the signal generator in 0 5 kHz steps 2 Watch the measurement results on the R amp S FSW screen e Upto 1 kHz a frequency error causes no apparent difference in measurement accuracy of the code domain power measurement e Above a frequency error of 1 kHz the probability of an impaired synchroniza tion increases With continuous measurements
39. 169 RF measurements 6161 A m D D E A 35 Analysis 116 Arialysis remote netiis t nie 228 Configuration riot hte perra t once 111 Configuration remote 2227 uk M H 35 Performing s 135 ac M A 35 Results remote 263 pigs 114 Selecting 5 aranaren ninii 111 TYPOS rt 35 RF Power Trigger level remote sees 197 RF signal power 96 113 Dio ed T 16 ISIRG FIIIGE once eee m Recte 94 202 RUN CONT Mp 106 RUN SINGLE M 106 S S CPICH Antenna patter enerne ananin Far qute 96 Code number Synchronization mode erret rennen 96 Sample rate cessano erna ehe Fo P eee EEr 93 Configuring in channel table 102 104 Digitall O M AMPLE 71 Digital I Q remote sseeeneeee 174 Scaling Amplitude range automatically 85 Corifiguration SORKEY ese erret tns 84 PMOOIImMP 85 SGCPGH nios 47 SCAMDIING COGS te 43 PAULOSC AICI iue caricesccusstonunevsenneaicionestdaverssemcobneoad BUS eee Screen layout Select meas led 57 SEM 3GPP PDB TeSUllS ert e terme entrent Configuration SGPP FDD aaa Measurement example enne Programming exambple
40. 3 11 Phase Discontinuity vs Slot display for 3GPP FDD BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PDSLot see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 230 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE 1 4 Phase Error vs Chip Phase Error vs Chip activates the phase error versus chip display The phase error is displayed for all chips of the slected slot Note In UE measurements if the measurement interval Halfslot is selected for eval uation 30 slots are displayed instead of the usual 15 see Measurement Interval on page 122 The phase error is calculated by the difference of the phase of received signal and phase of reference signal The reference signal is estimated from the channel configu ration of all active channels The phase error is given in degrees in a range of 180 to 180 L CHIP MAGNH UDE mus CHIP EVM as i Recdivea M7 Reference Chip P 7 d j j Ta Y j i CHIPPHASE RROR i I i I n j i i i I i I T j T Fig 3 12 Calculating the magnitude phase and vector error per chip PHI as ax N 2560 ke 0 N 1 where User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 28 R amp S FSW K72 K73 Measurements and Result Display EEE OEE EE eee a PHI phase error of chip number k Sk complex chip value of received signal Xk complex chip value of reference signal k index number of the evaluated chip N number of chips at each CPICH slo
41. 5 TRIG gt External Trigger 1 6 MEAS CONFIG gt Display Config gt Composite EVM Window 2 7 AMPT Scale Config Auto Scale Once Results The following is displayed e Window 1 Code domain power of signal branch Q e Window 2 Composite EVM EVM for total signal MultiView Spectrum 3G FDD UE 00 dBm Freq 2 1175 GHz Channel 0 256 Q Power P O Capture cho 1 Composite EVM Fig 10 7 Measurement Example 5 Measuring the Composite EVM 10 6 Measurement 6 Determining the Peak Code Domain Error The peak code domain error measurement is defined in the 3GPP specification for FDD signals User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 147 Measurement 6 Determining the Peak Code Domain Error An ideal reference signal is generated from the demodulated data The test signal and the reference signal are compared with each other The difference of the two signals is projected onto the classes of the different spreading factors The peak code domain error measurement is obtained by summing up the symbols of each difference signal slot and searching for the maximum error code Test setup 1 2 Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMU to the input of the R amp S FSW Connect the reference input REF INPUT on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW to the reference input REF on the rear panel of the R amp S SMU coaxial cable with BNC connectors Connect the external trigger input on the front panel of the R amp S FSW TR
42. BTS application only Manual operation See Comment on page 101 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle NAME lt FileName gt This command creates a new channel table file or selects an existing channel table in order to copy or delete it 11 5 7 4 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Parameters lt FileName gt lt file name gt RST RECENT Example CONF WCDP CTAB NAME NEW TAB Mode UE application only Manual operation See Name on page 101 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle COMMent Comment This command defines a comment for the selected channel table Prior to this command the name of the channel table has to be defined with command CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle NAME on page 213 The values of the table are defined with command CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA on page 216 Parameters Comment Example CONF WCDP MS CTAB NAME NEW TAB Defines the channel table name CONF WCDP MS CTAB COMM Comment for table 1 Defines a comment for the table Mode UE application only Manual operation See Comment on page 101 Configuring Channel Details BTS Measurements The following commands are used to configure individual channels in a predefined channel table in BTS measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle DATA eeeeeeee eee seen annii aaa 214 CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle DATA lt CodeClass gt lt CodeNumber gt lt UseTFCI gt
43. DELT2 Y Outputs measurement value of delta marker 2 Usage Query only 11 10 2 2 11 10 2 3 Analysis General Marker Settings DISPIay MTBBIG iter Eee A poene x eto Ge epe EH E xS gode dee va nudus 272 DISPlay MTABle lt DisplayMode gt This command turns the marker table on and off Parameters lt DisplayMode gt ON Turns the marker table on OFF Turns the marker table off AUTO Turns the marker table on if 3 or more markers are active RST AUTO Example DISP MTAB ON Activates the marker table Manual operation See Marker Table Display on page 126 Marker Search and Positioning Settings CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtION CPICH cccccccccccccsecsceceeeeeecueeeeeeeeeeauueaeuenseuenseenes 272 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion PCCPzch eeeeeeeee nennen nnne nnn nnn 273 CAL CulatesnMARKersm MANXImUImJllEF T ence rauco timed ean v tes deba rente carente 273 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum NEXT eeeseeeeseeeeennnnn nennen nna ia eread anna na 273 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum RIGHt eese nennen nnne nnn nnns 273 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK 2 ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaeaaaaaeeeeneteneneees 273 CAL Culatesm MARKersm MIBImUmdbEF T 4 22 at tana dala uet aa centi add cha aeuo 274 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum NEXT eese nennen nennen nnn nnns 274 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum RIGH
44. DI MEET E m c one vada aie eetma ease 67 d m MM 67 PSD PAUP M 67 QPSK Modulation Only 2 2 naran Ea A vider edible vie 67 Scrambling Code Defines the scrambling code used to transmit the signal in the specified format The scrambling code identifies the user equipment transmitting the signal If an incor rect scrambling code is defined a CDP measurement of the signal is not possible Remote command SENSe CDPower LCODe VALue on page 166 5 2 4 5 2 4 1 Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Format Switches the display format of the scrambling codes between hexadecimal and deci mal Remote command SENS CDP LCOD DVAL numeric value see SENSe CDPower LCODe DVALue on page 165 Type Defines whether the entered scrambling code is to be handled as a long or short scrambling code Remote command SENSe CDPower LCODe TYPE on page 166 HSDPA UPA If enabled the application detects all QPSK modulated channels without pilot symbols HSDPA channels and displays them in the channel table If the type of a channel can be fully recognized as for example with a HS PDSCH based on modulation type the type is indicated in the table All other channels without pilot symbols are of type CHAN Remote command SENSe CDPower HSDPamode on page 163 QPSK Modulation Only If enabled it is assumed that the signal uses QPSK modula
45. Digital Baseband Output Enables or disables a digital output stream to the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 if available Note If digital baseband output is active the sample rate is restricted to 200 MHz max 160 MHz bandwidth The only data source that can be used for digital baseband output is RF input User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 77 5 2 5 5 2 5 1 Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements For details on digital I Q output see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer User Manual Remote command OUTPut DIO on page 174 Output Settings Information Displays information on the settings for output via the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 The following information is displayed e Maximum sample rate that can be used to transfer data via the Digital Baseband Interface i e the maximum input sample rate that can be processed by the con nected instrument e Sample rate currently used to transfer data via the Digital Baseband Interface e Level and unit that corresponds to an I Q sample with the magnitude 1 Full Scale Level Remote command OUTPut DIQ CDEVice on page 174 Connected Instrument Displays information on the instrument connected to the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 if available If an instrument is connected the following information is displayed e Name and serial number of the instrument connected to the Digital Baseband Inter face e
46. Eliminate Tail Chips on page 122 Configuring RF Measurements SENSe CDPower HSLot State This command switches between the analysis of half slots and full slots Parameters State ON OFF ON 30 half slots are evaluated OFF 15 full slots are evaluated RST OFF Example SENS CDP HSL ON Mode UE application only Manual operation See Measurement Interval on page 122 11 6 Configuring RF Measurements RF measurements are performed in the Spectrum application with some predefined settings as described in chapter 3 3 RF Measurements on page 35 For details on configuring these RF measurements in a remote environment see the Remote Commands chapter of the R amp S FSW User Manual The 3GPP FDD RF measurements must be activated for a 3GPP FDD application see chapter 11 3 Activating 3GPP FDD Measurements on page 156 The individiual measurements are activated using the CONFigure WCDPower BTS MEASurement on page 160 command see chapter 11 4 Selecting a Measure ment on page 160 e Special RF Configuration Commands sss seem 227 AVA SIG M 228 11 6 1 Special RF Configuration Commands In addition to the common RF measurement configuration commands described for the base unit the following special commands are available in 3GPP FDD applications GONFigure WOCBDPoWsIEBTSDESTDus edel bei obe ER REe tunt ure hee nd asade 227 CONFigure WCDPower BTS STD lt Type
47. Free RUN n 9 Frequency CONTIG 1 errorae rre 85 l issia na aa 90 Import oo 131 Input Source Config m OF IQ EXDOFL iei rne enero t 131 IQ IE OTt ce tr cn rr ener 131 Lower Level Hysteresis nee 109 Marker Gohnflg rot rentes 124 Meastime Auto rrr retinet 109 Meastime Manual teres 109 Mii sesanan hte ernie ou ied cere RE 129 Sd P M M 129 Next Peak eere eerte 128 Norm DEIA croci oro br contr eb t eed 125 Outputs Config coerente es 75 PGOPGH io riri rera e eec 129 Peak 129 iiri fp 82 Ref EGV6l b aeo e ea cca gehe faves 79 83 Ref Levl Offset mto 80 83 cuc E 107 FRAG AUTO iresi 81 RE Atten Manual torret res 81 Scale Config fase Seramblinig Code retten 64 Select Mas smt net ia 57 Signal Capture 09 Signal Description 62 Single Sweep 106 SWEEP COHTIg 2 nete ro imer rcr n 105 Sweep COUNT D 107 SYNCHRONIZATION ciere tete ttc ret eet terea 95 Trace Config sag 129 Trigger CORflg rt rn rtr 87 Trigger Offset nseries mmm eins 91 Upper Level Hysteresis sirrini riiin 109 Span VISTO RE 58 Specifics for Configuration coeno herren nra 62 Spectrum Emission Mask See SEM aiunt ta rre ret EO eet ee re ERE Spreading factor i Relationship to code class sssesess 44 Relationship to symbol rate
48. PI calte ciect trei cene ee etc rote co ict optar eere ciet e Xara ci EE ES 156 INS Trument GREate REPLACO i eene pene eet ees ederet iue geb ed cce epe do boa tuu 157 INSTr ment GREate NEW eei o eic aeo ree rcd et oe ctor m ee perc Picea bre bo Mina Pepe ae 156 INSTr mentDEL6le ueniet cen iur rer sour coco Pres e rope Ee VE va ERE svo Foi ditta EVER c 157 INSTrument SELect EAYout ADD EWINDow nct nre nr ete eret nne ne ern re E ne RE EI De 230 LAY ouuGA Talog WINDOWI Ts ists fu poeta cte Dre etie e teet rase bes cu ente ded i a Poe A RR SELON enn 232 LAYout IDENtTy WINDOW cioce s rin erret etae ehe nera rece e th er eoe nn er aeri eg 232 EAYout REMove WINBOYg ntt rh eh rad t n ttn rrr n eere deniers 232 EAYouttREPEace E WINDOW ueniet rrt o te iE entre hte th Exo ret lotta Peek ea eodd e oed 233 LAY OUTS PUM E reese 233 LAY out WINDowsn gt AD DD fscssietveseer fees etre ep mer botte ba e cU eeepc clin 235 LEAYout WINDowsn IDEN j9 ciii ooi eee reae eee e etre dioc dc gere D dide A 235 I doi i WINDOWS MA REMOV G T E 235 LAYout WINDOwsns REPLAGCO ti reci reo rtp veut ep Rb ge erdt appe gta er apvd Du tace ue Ote ERR 236 MMEMoOry EOAD IQ STATO ia tci tee erronee a Severe cra nae ec EROS EA 276 MMEM ory STORE FINA liii niusi 262 MMEMory S TORGIO COMME it itia
49. Remote command SENSe CDPower MIMO on page 164 Antenna Diversity This option switches the antenna diversity mode on and off Remote command SENSe CDPower ANTenna on page 162 Antenna Number This option switches between diversity antennas 1 and 2 Depending on the selected setting the 3GPP FDD application synchronizes to the CPICH of antenna 1 or antenna 2 Remote command SENSe CDPower ANTenna on page 162 5 2 3 2 BTS Scrambling Code The scrambling code identifies the base station transmitting the signal You can either define the used scrambling code manually or perform a search on the input signal to detect a list of possible scrambling codes automatically Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Signal Description Scrambling Code Format Scrambling Code cnet 65 Fommnat HENDE Giada a ees EEE TEE a ay S Sealine 65 Scrambling CodeS TURIN 65 Autosearch for Scrambling GOOG sei icis cen veneedadavs suchagcuanienadeansuagecadsenteenagevanieencdervere 65 EERO p RE 66 Scrambling Code Defines the scrambling code The scrambling codes are used to distinguish between different base stations Each base station has its own scrambling code Remote command SENSe CDPower LCODe DVALue on page 165 Format Hex Dec Switch the display format of the scrambling codes between hexadecimal and decimal Remote command SENSe CDPower LCODe DVALu
50. Remote command SENSe CDPower BASE on page 201 Capture Length Frames Defines the capture length amount of frames to record Note if this setting is not available Capture Mode is set to Slot i e only one slot is captured Remote command SENSe CDPower IQLength on page 202 Capture Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRA operating mode It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements it defines the time offset between the capture buffer start and the start of the extracted application data In MSRA mode the offset must be a positive value as the capture buffer starts at the trigger time 0 Remote command SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet on page 279 Frame To Analyze Defines the frame to be analyzed and displayed Note if this setting is not available in UE tests Capture Mode is set to Slot i e only one slot is captured Remote command SENSe CDPower FRAMe VALue on page 222 Capture Time This setting is read only 5 2 8 5 2 9 Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements It indicates the capture time determined by the capture length and sample rate Application Data MSRA For the 3GPP FDD BTS application in MSRA operating mode the application data range is defined by the same settings used to define the signal capturing in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode see chapter 5 2 7 Signal Capture Data Acquisition on pa
51. SF 2 to increase the symbol rate of the active slots by two CPR SF 2 TPC DPCH in compressed mode using half spreading factor SF 2 to increase the symbol rate of the active slots by two where TPC symbols are sent in the first slot of the transmitting gap HS PDSCH HSDPA High Speed Physical Downlink Shared Channel The High Speed Physical Downlink Shared Channel HSDPA does not contain any pilot symbols It is a channel type that is expected in code classes lower than 7 The modulation type of these channels can vary depending on the selected slot HSPDSCH QPSK QPSK modulated slot of an HS PDSCH channel HSPDSCH 16QAM 16QAM modulated slot of an HS PDSCH channel HSPDSCH NONE slot without power of an HS PDSCH channel HS SCCH HSDPA High Speed Shared Control Channel The High Speed Shared Control Channel HSDPA does not contain any pilot sym bols It is a channel type that is expected in code classes equal to or higher than 7 The modulation type should always be QPSK The channel does not contain any pilot symbols If the application is configured to recognize all QPSK modulated channels without pilot symbols see HSDPA UPA on page 63 the channels of HSDPA will be found among the data channels If the type of a channel can be fully recognized as for example with a DPCH based on pilot sequences or HS PDSCH based on modulation type the type is entered in the field TYPE All other channels without pilot symbols are o
52. The trigger band width at the third IF depends on the RBW and sweep type For measurements on a fixed frequency e g zero span or I Q measurements the third IF represents the center frequency The available trigger levels depend on the RF attenuation and preamplification A refer ence level offset if defined is also considered For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet Remote command TRIG SOUR IFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 197 Trigger Level Trigger Source Defines the trigger level for the specified trigger source For details on supported trigger levels see the data sheet Remote command TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port on page 196 For analog baseband B71 or digital baseband B17 input only Drop Out Time Trigger Source Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Note For input from the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 using the base band power trigger BBP the default drop out time is set to 100 ns to avoid uninten tional trigger events as no hysteresis can be configured in this case Remote command TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe on page 194 Trigger Offset Trigger Source Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the sweep offset gt 0 Start of the sweep is delayed offset
53. c aa eaa anne nana natns ana trit satin nina 269 CAL Culate lt n gt MARKEr lt M gt X ccccccccccessccecescceceececssseeceaeeeessgecesseeeseaaecesseseeeeaeeeseneesaes 269 GALCGulatesmMARKersmoNDEE aate onec ttt e reus dec e tuta espace uv edd EEEa 270 CALCulate n DELTamarker m STATe sesssssssssisssssseseeeee nennen nnn nnne inan 270 GALGulate n DELTatmarket AOFF 2e neu tnn nia hee NIA ne RR RATE RR REN NER DR AY 270 CAL CGulatesmsDELTamoarkersp 9X incautus eee oa gerere xo ose ud qan eet xe aec teda irre tide 270 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELAtive ccccccssscceessceceescceeeeeeeesssceeeaceeseeeeeeeaees 271 GALGulat lt n gt DEL Tamarker lt m gt yY ic c cccccsesssesieecnessecencaadacseatcaesacaneciessavecsdeaaaaceceanases 271 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe State This command turns markers on and off If the corresponding marker number is cur rently active as a deltamarker it is turned into a normal marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK3 ON Switches on marker 3 Manual operation See Marker State on page 125 See Marker Type on page 125 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X Position This command moves a marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the marker If the marker has been used as a delta marker the command turns it into a normal marker Parameters
54. contains text that further describes the contents of the file DateTime Contains the date and time of the creation of the file Its type is xs dateTime see RsIqTar xsd Samples Contains the number of samples of the I Q data For multi channel signals all chan nels have the same number of samples One sample can be e A complex number represented as a pair of and Q values e A complex number represented as a pair of magnitude and phase values e Areal number represented as a single real value See also Format element Clock Contains the clock frequency in Hz i e the sample rate of the I Q data A signal gen erator typically outputs the I Q data at a rate that equals the clock frequency If the I Q data was captured with a signal analyzer the signal analyzer used the clock fre quency as the sample rate The attribute unit must be set to Hz Format Specifies how the binary data is saved in the I Q data binary file see DataFilename element Every sample must be in the same format The format can be one of the following e complex Complex number in cartesian format i e and Q values interleaved and Q are unitless e real Real number unitless e polar Complex number in polar format i e magnitude unitless and phase rad values interleaved Requires DataType float32 or f1oat64 Q Parameter XML File Specification Element DataType Description Specifies the binary format used for s
55. lt PRBSTestState gt lt NotUsed gt lt Placeholder gt Example Manual operation Defines whether a device is connected or not 0 No device is connected 1 A device is connected Device ID of the connected device Serial number of the connected device Port name used by the connected device to be ignored Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz State of the connection protocol which is used to identify the connected device Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done State of the PRBS test Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done to be ignored for future use currently 0 OUTP DIQ CDEV Result 1 SMU200A 103634 0ut A 70000000 100000000 Passed Not Started 0 0 See Output Settings Information on page 78 See Connected Instrument on page 78 STATus QUEStionable DIQ Register This register contains information about the state of the digital I Q input and output This register is available with option Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements The status of the STATus QUESTionable DIO register is indicated in bit 14 of the STATus QUI ESTionable register You can read out the state of the register with STATus QUEStionable DIO CONDition on page 178 on page 177 and STATus QUEStionable
56. lt Position gt Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis The unit is either Hz frequency domain or s time domain or dB statistics Range The range depends on the current x axis range Analysis Example CALC MARK2 X 1 7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 1 7 MHz Manual operation See Marker Table on page 26 See Marker Peak List on page 41 See X value on page 125 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF This command turns all markers off Example CALC MARK AOFF Switches off all markers Usage Event Manual operation See All Markers Off on page 125 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe lt State gt This command turns delta markers on and off If necessary the command activates the delta marker first No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT2 ON Turns on delta marker 2 Manual operation See Marker State on page 125 See Marker Type on page 125 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker AOFF This command turns all delta markers off Example CALC DELT AOFF Turns all delta markers off Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X Position This command moves a delta marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker and positions a reference marker to the peak power Analysis Parameters Position Numeric value
57. orte treten te prr ee Evaluation method Markers Configuration remote sess 269 272 Corifigurllg cere rettet etre 124 Configuring SOMKGY 2 ca tenete cte 124 Deactivalihg rte endi tnr 125 Delta markets rnt tete ts 125 Min IMUM e 129 Next minim cue eoe ett en tern 129 Next peak tr te treten neta 128 lic 129 POSITIONING cette e te ren eni rete 128 Positioning remote 2 nce et 272 Querying position remote ssssssss Search settings Setting to CPICH Setting to PCCPCH Settings remote z 2 creciente Riu q Table Table evaluation method D 1 Maximizing Windows remote cr riri nete tetas 229 Maximum cO M 85 Measurement channel Creating remote 5 ce rccte tcs Deleting remote eret Duplicating remote Querying remote Renaming remote Replacing remote 2 recte ts Measurement examples SGBP EDD ire ine e dee anaes Composite EVM Incorrect center frequeri cy oret 142 Incorrect scrambling code sseessess 143 PCDE m Reference frequency oreet 141 Relative code domain power sssss 140 SEM Signal channel pOWer rrr eere 137 Triggere
58. see Input Sample Rate on page 71 Parameters lt SampleRate gt Range 1 Hz to 10 GHz RST 32 MHz Example INP DIQ SRAT 200 MHz Manual operation See Input Sample Rate on page 71 INPut DIQ SRATe AUTO lt State gt If enabled the sample rate of the digital I Q input signal is set automatically by the con nected device This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is installed Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Input Sample Rate on page 71 OUTPut DIQ State This command turns continuous output of I Q data to the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 on and off Using the digital input and digital output simultaneously is not possible If digital baseband output is active the sample rate is restricted to 100 MHz 200 MHz if enhanced mode is possible max 160 MHz bandwidth Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example OUTP DIQ ON Manual operation See Digital Baseband Output on page 77 OUTPut DIQ CDEVice This command queries the current configuration and the status of the digital I Q data output to the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Return values lt ConnState gt lt DeviceName gt lt SerialNumber gt lt PortName gt lt NotUsed gt lt MaxTransferRate gt lt ConnProtState gt
59. seeessssssssssesssee eene eint tnn nnne nsn nnne nnn 106 GIC 107 5weeop Average COUM sasine 2 rc HEEL e ERREUR eH HE LEE o NST N R CERE aaia 107 R amp S9FSW K72 K73 Configuration Continuous Sweep RUN CONT After triggering starts the sweep and repeats it continuously until stopped This is the default setting While the measurement is running the Continuous Sweep softkey and the RUN CONT key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Continuous Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a channel defined sequence In this case a channel in continuous sweep mode is swept repeatedly Furthermore the RUN CONT key controls the Sequencer not individual sweeps RUN CONT starts the Sequencer in continuous mode For details on the Sequencer see the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command INITiate CONTinuous on page 239 Single Sweep RUN SINGLE After triggering starts the number of sweeps set in Sweep Count The measurement stops after the defined number of sweeps has been performed While the measurement is running the Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be
60. 006 1 000000000E 006 2 109000064E 009 8 158547211E 001 7 984169006E 001 3 084169006E 001 0 000000000 0 000000000 0 00000000 3 000000000 7 500000000E 006 3 500000000E 006 1 000000000E 006 2 113987200E 009 4 202708435E 001 4 028330231E 001 5 270565033 0 000000000 0 000000000 0 000000000 ise Table 11 12 Trace results for SEM measurement R_ Start Stop RBW Freq Abs Rel Delta to Limit an freq freq Hz peak peak peak margin check ge Hz Hz power power power dB result N Hz dBm o 1 1 00000 1 27500 8 50000 1 00000 2 10878 8 05717 7 88279 2 982 0 0000 0000E 0000E 0000E 2336E 7734E 9530E 79953 0 0 007 006 006 009 001 001 0E 00 00 00 001 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 O JO JO 2 2 00000 8 50000 7 50000 1 00000 2 10900 8 15854 7 98416 3 084 0 0000 0000E 0000E 0000E 0064E 7211E 9006E 16900 0 0 006 006 006 009 001 001 6E 00 00 00 001 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 O 0 JO 11 15 3 Programming Examples R amp S FSW K73 R Start Stop RBW Freq Abs Rel Deltato Limit an freq freq Hz peak peak peak margin check ge Hz Hz power power power dB result N Hz dBm o 3 3 00000 7 50000 3 50000 1 00000 2 11398 4 20270 4 02833 5 27
61. 11 10 Analysis 11 10 1 The following commands define general result analysis settings concerning the traces and markers e Maes uoce hIece ROMS EIU op Ite tele doe E Tode ee be beso EE Debe xe ee etude 267 CE RR ei a ee ea eee 269 Traces The trace settings determine how the measured data is analyzed and displayed on the screen In 3GPP FDD applications only one trace per window can be configured for Code Domain Analysis DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE ccccceeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeees 267 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t STATe cessere rehenes 268 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE Mode This command selects the trace mode In case of max hold min hold or average trace mode you can set the number of single measurements with SENSe SWEep COUNt Note that synchronization to the end of the measurement is possible only in single sweep mode Analysis Parameters Mode WRITe Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting AVERage The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Aver age Count determines the number of averaging procedures MAXHold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace mem ory only if the new value is greater than the previous one MINHold The minimum value is determined from
62. 128 Noise SOURCE iis ERLE 75 Oo OBW 3JGPP FDD results tet 36 Configuration SGPP FDD tes 112 RE Combi aoc eerte e rere tte pm 37 Occupied bandwidth See OBW iecit eet rena prae 36 Offset Analysis interval ssiri inasnan FREQUENCY een nee rir eren rn rec nde os Reference level TIMING Ice ctione i eoa eripere to rts Options Electronic attenuation B25 ssssss 81 High pass filter B19 oes 69 168 Preamplifier B24 bete t 82 Output Configuration remote eese Configuration softkey sess Digital Baseband Interface B17 settings Digital Baseband Interface B17 status Digital VQ nemote tte ete IF frequency remote NOISE SOUFCB siririna aea Power measurement Configuration Settings Trigger Overload REiipUb remole iore ce tiet 167 Overview Configuration 3GPP FDD 2 rrr 61 P P CPICH Synchronization MOE surteran 96 oie 0 MR 47 SOflkGy arrosoir iarrann eet reae 129 PCDE EvaluatiOti 2 in rte rera 27 Measurement example sse 147 Programming example Trace results o rennen Peak Code Domain Error see PODE ierindas n en decr re d eves 27 Peak list Evaluation method ren 41 Peak search KG eene ier atre reete Me ib as 129 je
63. 3GPP FDD application Code Domain Analysis of the input signal is started automatically However the 3GPP FDD applications also provide various RF measurement types Selecting the measurement type gt To select an RF measurement type do one of the following e Select the Overview softkey In the Overview select the Select Measure ment button Select the required measurement e Press the MEAS key on the front panel In the Select Measurement dialog box select the required measurement Some parameters are set automatically according to the 3GPP standard the first time a measurement is selected since the last PRESET operation A list of these parameters is given with each measurement type The parameters can be changed but are not reset automatically the next time you re enter the measurement The main measurement configuration menus for the RF measurements are identical to the Spectrum application For details refer to General Measurement Configuration in the R amp S FSW User Man ual The measurement specific settings for the following measurements are available in the Analysis dialog box via the Overview e Channel Power ACLR Measurements eese enne nnne ntn nn 111 e OCCUPIEd BandWidth sarrendi c Fen rte Rae ree Reged erre Anida 112 e Output Power Measurements ert vesci e e te Ed 113 e Spectrum Emission Mask reete acid esed re eee ED end 113 E doo E n 114 LEES
64. 4 4 3GPP FDD BTS Test Models 2 cc cceececececeeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeseeesaeeesaeeeaeeseeeeeeeeseeeeees 51 4 5 Setup for Base Station Tests c s ccceeceeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeneeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeesneeeeeeee 52 46 3GPPFDD UE Test Models nicer iier re rien n Ri De ra e aaa 53 4 7 Setup for User Equipment Tests c eseecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeseeaeeeeeeeeeeeees 54 4 8 CDA Measurements in MSRA Operating Mode eene 55 NEEDS 57 541 Result DISplay ete Ett trt D Ure Halte teret 57 5 2 Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements 58 5 3 RF Measuremenis m rere Ee reet aep te KEKEREKE Een eh 111 EP np e 116 61 Evaluation Rango nire ie aka naa eau Ron t8 ANETA NAAA PRX RR AERE X RR RR ARR neR 116 6 2 Code Domain Analysis Settings BTS Measurements 119 6 3 Code Domain Analysis Settings UE Measurements 121 TM 123 MBM L Cc Ie E 124 User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 3 R amp S FSW K72 K73 Contents 10 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 11 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 11 6 11 7 11 8 11 9 11 10 11 11 11 12 11 13 11 14 11 15 12 12 1 12 2 I Q Data Import and EXD OM ais vssesessccntec
65. 8 characters Parameters lt FileName gt name of the new channel table Example CONF WCDP CTAB NAME NEW_TAB Defines the channel table name to be copied CONF WCDP CTAB COPY CTAB 2 Copies channel table NEW TAB to CTAB 2 Usage Event Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Copying a Table on page 100 CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle DELete This command deletes the selected channel table The channel table to be deleted is selected with the command CoNFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle NAME on page 213 Example CONF WCDP CTAB NAME NEW TAB Defines the channel table name to be deleted CONF WCDP CTAB DEL Deletes the table Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Deleting a Table on page 100 CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle SELect lt FileName gt This command selects a predefined channel table file for comparison during channel detection Before using this command the RECENT channel table must be switched on first with the command CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle STATe on page 208 Parameters lt FileName gt RST RECENT Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Example CONF WCDP CTAB ON Switches the channel table on CONF WCDP CTAB SEL CTAB 1 Selects the predefined channel table CTAB 1 Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Selecting a Table on page 99 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle STATe
66. B Measurement Interval iere rti Ir vri Ier E eret vet e vere revo 122 Conmpernsate IG OMET encon rer uc P ee petto cte exe cec eee 122 Eliminate Tall GIS RE 122 ocyus abire 122 Code Domain Analysis Settings UE Measurements Measurement Interval Switches between the analysis of a half slot or a full slot Both measurement intervals are influenced by the settings of Eliminate Tail Chips If Eliminate Tail Chips is set to On 96 chips at both ends of the measurement interval are not taken into account for analysis Slot The length of each analysis interval is 2560 chips corresponding to one time slot of the 3GPP signal The time reference for the start of slot 0 is the start of a 3GPP radio frame Halfslot The length of each analysis interval is reduced to 1280 chips corre sponding to half of one time slot of the 3GPP signal Remote command SENSe CDPower HSLot on page 227 Compensate IQ Offset If enabled the I Q offset is eliminated from the measured signal This is useful to deduct a DC offset to the baseband caused by the DUT thus improving the EVM Note however that for EVM measurements according to standard compensation must be disabled Remote command SENSe CDPower NORMalize on page 224 Eliminate Tail Chips Selects the length of the measurement interval for calculation of error vector magnitude EVM in accordance with 3GPP specific
67. DIQ EVENt Bit No Meaning 0 Digital I Q Input Device connected This bit is set if a device is recognized and connected to the Digital Baseband Interface of the analyzer Digital I Q Input Connection Protocol in progress This bit is set while the connection between analyzer and digital baseband data signal source e g R amp S SMU R amp S Ex I Q Box is established Digital I Q Input Connection Protocol error This bit is set if an error occurred during establishing of the connect between analyzer and digital I Q data signal source e g R amp S SMU R amp S Ex I Q Box is established Digital 1 Q Input PLL unlocked This bit is set if the PLL of the Digital I Q input is out of lock due to missing or unstable clock provided by the connected Digital I Q TX device To solve the problem the Digital I Q connection has to be newly initialized after the clock has been restored Digital I Q Input DATA Error This bit is set if the data from the Digital I Q input module is erroneous Possible reasons e Biterrors in the data transmission The bit will only be set if an error occurred at the current measurement e Protocol or data header errors May occurred at data synchronization problems or vast transmission errors The bit will be set constantly and all data will be erroneous To solve the problem the Digital I Q connection has to be newly initialized NOTE If this error is indicated repeatedly either the
68. ER ER 243 ANANSI coc to SE a a E BUR ER EE RE ERI D EEEKA eR EAM AKA 267 e Importing and Exporting I Q Data and Results sess 276 e Configuring the Application Data Range MSRA mode only 278 e Querying the Status Registers essessssseseeeneeeennenen enne 280 e Commands for Compatibility cessere 282 e Programming Examples R amp S FSW K73 eene 285 11 1 Introduction Commands are program messages that a controller e g a PC sends to the instru ment or software They operate its functions setting commands or events and request information query commands Some commands can only be used in one way others work in two ways setting and query If not indicated otherwise the com mands can be used for settings and queries R amp S9FSW K72 K73 Remote Commands for 3GPP FDD Measurements The syntax of a SCPI command consists of a header and in most cases one or more parameters To use a command as a query you have to append a question mark after the last header element even if the command contains a parameter A header contains one or more keywords separated by a colon Header and parame ters are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank If there is more than one parameter for a command these are separated by a comma from one another Only the most important characteris
69. HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Manual operation See Trigger Holdoff on page 91 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis lt Hysteresis gt This command defines the trigger hysteresis which is only available for IF Power trig ger sources Parameters lt Hysteresis gt Range 3 dB to 50 dB RST 3 dB Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value Manual operation See Hysteresis on page 91 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPower Level This command sets the level of the baseband power trigger This command is available for the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 and the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 Parameters Level Range 50 dBm to 20 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV BB 30DBM Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal lt port gt lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the level the external signal must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that the variable INPUT OUTPUT connectors ports 2 3 must be set for use as input using the OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection command Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port 1 trigger port 1 TRIGGER INPUT connector on front panel 2 trigger port 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on front panel 3 trigger port 3 TRIGGER3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on rear panel Parameters
70. I Q Analyzer or optional applications Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command MMEMory STORe IQ STATe on page 277 MMEMory STORe IQ COMMent on page 277 Error Messages 8 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Mea surement If the results do not meet your expectations try the following methods to optimize the measurement Synchronization fails e Check the frequency e Check the reference level e Check the scrambling code e When using an external trigger check whether an external trigger is being sent to the R amp S FSW 8 1 Error Messages Error messages are entered in the error event queue of the status reporting system in the remote control mode and can be queried with the command SYSTem ERRor A short explanation of the device specific error messages for the 3GPP FDD applica tions is given below Status bar message Description Sync not found This message is displayed if synchronization is not possible Possible causes are that frequency level scr
71. Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quota tion marks Conventions Used in the Documentation 1 3 2 Conventions for Procedure Descriptions When describing how to operate the instrument several alternative methods may be available to perform the same task In this case the procedure using the touchscreen is described Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using an additionally connected mouse The alternative procedure using the keys on the instrument or the on screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard operating procedures The term select may refer to any of the described methods i e using a finger on the touchscreen a mouse pointer in the display or a key on the instrument or on a key board Starting the 3GPP FDD Application 2 Welcome to the 3GPP FDD Applications The 3GPP FDD applications add functionality to the R amp S FSW to perform code domain analysis or power measurements according to the 3GPP standard FDD mode The application firmware is in line with the 3GPP standard Third Generation Partnership Project with Release 5 Signals that meet the conditions for channel configuration of test models 1 to 4 according to the 3GPP standard e g W CDMA signals using FDD can be measured with the 3GPP FDD BTS application In addition to the code domain measurements specified
72. MODE rne erre rr eorr rr irr err enr es DISPlayEWINDowsn TRAG e t S TAT6 ertt n rr te ret nen reto terre DISPlay WINBowsnP2 ZOOM AREA citer ient ives cios Pe epe eer E seb eire ce o REA Peng DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom AREA esseeseeeeeeeeeneenneneeenren nene ene nernnnrsnnnein DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe DISPlay WINDowsnF ZOOMIS l ATe6 schiiiit s rettet hr E ete sa eu rip her Rx naa eee kx E edu buc ROMA IRE OA FORMat DEXPont DSEParatol erret t rere a ea rd re i en rie P RE Eon FORMat DATA D ae Ie INIuReehl crce EE INiTiatt CONTINUGUS c H H INMTiate RE FRESIM m athe tone INITiate SEQuencer ABORt INITiate SEQuetricet IMMeadiate 12 erint ion ct casas ea nae ete uo n ptt eset Dey cua 240 INI Tiate SEQuencer MODE imet iem ten doi e ctio iiic aia texans tede esie needs 241 INI Tiate SEQuencer REFResh ALL sssii cicero veo terres eae e vtto rk ree aeree ebore wowace 242 INI Tiate IMMedlate ttr tte pee kr e teret etre rbi ete rn ttr err ener re pn 240 lel i i ESTIS 191 INPUCATTenuati Mm AUTO oe ERNE 192 INPut ATTen ation PROTection RESOL rore tree erede etl raa na rp Res 167 hlzimeeien eive Em INPUR GOW PII e
73. Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 129 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 127 Importing and Exporting I Q Data and Results For details on importing and exporting I Q data see chapter 7 I Q Data Import and Export on page 130 MMEMory E OADIHGESTATe niii cie ecoute sse eye devo ait eda uaa endeared 276 MMEMoRE STORSHOPOAOONIMGEL ierra ehe err or E EEEa Fe FRE EE 277 MMEMory STORG IQ STATEC aneii iniiai orania aaan iaaiaee annida daa 277 MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command restores Q data from a file The file extension is iq tar Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the source file Example MMEM LOAD IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Loads IQ data from the specified file Importing and Exporting I Q Data and Results Usage Setting only Manual operation See I Q Import on page 131 MMEMory STORe IQ COMMent Comment This command adds a comment to a file that contains I Q data Parameters Comment String containing the comment Example MMEM STOR IQ COMM Device test 1b Creates a description for the export file MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar
74. NAME Y cocti aiia aaen a tosta i roa n Rex Dd ca dp esu rue anra Mr Rd 184 SENS6e JPROBeSps SE Lup S TAU eiectus tica einen natin een 185 SENSe PROBesp s SETup TYPE rre pr ee epe eet eH rede erbe Ue eec P 185 SENSe SWEep GOUN baste iine ertt inten cid tdbeee Lp aa dace a ia eue t da d esa ra uut he IE ue denn 218 ABORU sirier 238 CAL Culate EIMit k FATE etri c ttt ettet gei ie cct pp etaed dne dp cz dee ET edd 263 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESult CALCulate MARKersm gt FUNCUOM ZOOM css uoa e eterne titre bcr aera dee ete xta eH E CEU aD CAL Culate MSRAAAEING SEIOW rrat tpi eire itr ica Com ect rper eio eee etta ict e nde e Puntos CAE Culate MSRA ALING VALue iioi ot eet n etn toi eaten cane Feet cbe tea a srl dab d CALCulate MSRA WINDowsn gt IVAL Piss roa eoce conecta ree cetero re ee eee tie eic ee rae co etae bue deen 279 CAL Culate STATisticsdRESUult E citt retenue igen Son eei De p e c eds 266 CALbGulatesn s CDPowerMBpplbg enatis Pt Det eere Peak n etatem n DR re scd e tke ac URS A CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker AOFF CAL Culate n DEETa markeresm FUNCton CPIGh uicti rrt tip aee gae 274 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PCCPCh essesesssssessseseseee nennen nenne rennen nnne 274 CALCulatesn gt DEL Tamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT riter nee ten ENN E AES 275 CALCulate n DELTamarker
75. R amp S FSW K72 and R amp S FSW K73 are abbreviated as R amp S FSW K72 K73 R amp S FSW K72 K73 Contents Contents UMS oc 7 1 4 About this Manual iecore ere certe cnn AnNa NEEN iiec x ananas NEFES SR Eins 7 1 2 Documentation OvervlQew 2 aerarii nuni in tnus iesu Ru uus icc R n mua sebo cR Iun RR RR Irc Ia Redi 8 1 3 Conventions Used in the Documentation eene nnn 9 2 Welcome to the 3GPP FDD Applications 11 2 4 Starting the 3GPP FDD Application eeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeene enne nnne 11 2 2 Understanding the Display Information eeeeeeeereeennnn nnnm 12 3 Measurements and Result Display eeeeeeeee 15 3 1 Code Domain Analysis recreo titu aint uasa ne euni casecceticasscetteeseaes 15 3 2 Time Alignment Error Measurements eeeeeeeeeeeeenenneennen nnne nennen 33 3 3 RF Meas remerntts ciini uai ne eua snas cust tae uasa cescecneeceaesctted cascceuticasscatteesesee 35 4 Measurement Basics eeeeeeeeeee eene nnne nnn nnn nnn nnn annua 43 Al Channel Detection ceonner encuentren trie iere nike a ne siii sas eR RP ip anna 46 42 BTS Channel Types iieri entier iden due eos nee k iE asarana 46 4 3 UE Channel Types eoctrneeotn utente nette eee EEANN NANE 50
76. Retrieving Calculated Measurement Results eee 243 e Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE n sss 247 Rettieving Trace ROSUES citi de nites ad del dadas cer d etre i bee tec dud 253 e Exponting Trace ROSUI S creer Rc ene pneter icr und ead 261 e Retrieving RF Results enean nte e kan etes a Enn er xen enean diee 263 Retrieving Calculated Measurement Results The following commands describe how to retrieve the calculated results from the CDA and Time Alignment Error measurements CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion TAERror RESUIt 0ccccccssecseesesceceeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeass 243 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion WCDPower BTS RESuIt ccceceececeeeeeeeeeeetneeees 243 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion WCDPower MS RESUIt eee 245 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion TAERror RESult lt ResultType gt This command queries the result of a time alignment measurement see chapter 3 2 Time Alignment Error Measurements on page 33 Query parameters lt ResultType gt TAERror Returns the time offset between the two antenna signals in chips Example CALC MARK FUNC TAER RES TAER Usage Query only Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Result List on page 34 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion WCDPower BTS RESult lt Measurement gt This command queries the
77. SLOT 3 Manual operation See Slot on page 117 SENSe CDPower MAPPing lt SignalBranch gt This command switches between and Q branches of the signal for all evaluations if not specified otherwise using CALCulate lt n gt CDPower Mapping on page 223 Parameters lt SignalBranch gt 1 Q RST Q Example CDP MAPP Q Mode UE application only CALCulate lt n gt CDPower Mapping lt SignalBranch gt This command adjusts the mapping for the evaluations Code Domain Power and Code Domain Error Power in a specific window Parameters lt SignalBranch gt Q AUTO l The l branch of the signal will be used for evaluation Q The Q branch of the signal will be used for evaluation AUTO The branch selected by the SENSe CDPower MAPPing command will be used for evaluation RST AUTO Example CALC CDP MAPPING AUTO Mode UE application only Manual operation See Branch UE measurements only on page 118 See Selecting a Different Branch for a Window on page 119 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements 11 5 11 Code Domain Analysis Settings BTS Measurements Some evaluations provide further settings for the results The commands for BTS measurements are described here CALCulate MARKer m FUNCtion ZOOM cesses nnne nene ne rer rn nnne 224 BENSE TC DPaowWer GPB 5i rcc tette ce es te avara Fez Ex Ebo coa edd 224 SENSe CDPowerNORMAalize 2 2 2 2 2
78. Statistical Measurements in the R amp S FSW User Manual To restore adapted measurement parameters the following parameters are saved on exiting and are restored on re entering this measurement e Reference level and reference level offset e Analysis bandwidth e Number of samples Evaluation Range 6 Analysis General result analysis settings concerning the evaluation range trace markers etc can be configured via the Analysis button in the Overview Analysis of RF Measurements General result analysis settings concerning the trace markers lines etc for RF meas urements are identical to the analysis functions in the Spectrum application except for some special marker functions and spectrograms which are not available in the 3GPP FDD applications For details see the Common Analysis and Display Functions chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chapter 11 10 Analysis on page 267 e Eyaliauoi RAI e rs tud eddie ee eae 116 e Code Domain Analysis Settings BTS Measurements ssssssss 119 e Code Domain Analysis Settings UE Measurements ssssessssss 121 NEU pee Em 123 MaBIKBeIS ie Ree ERI exeunt p e aa AR RNSERUKEURAERA MRNA RRROREE STRE REA EM EREUNI AREE 124 6 1 Evaluation Range The evaluation range defines which channel slot or frame is evaluated in the result display For UE measure
79. Table 11 10 Evaluation parameter values for 3GPP FDD applications String Parameter Enum Parameter Evaluation XTIM CDP BSTReam BITStream Bitstream XTIM CDP COMP CONStel CCONst Composite Constellation lation XPOW CDEPower CDEPower Code Domain Error Power XPOW CDP CDPower Code Domain Power absolute scaling XPOW CDP ABSolute XPOW CDP RATio CDPower Code Domain Power relative scaling XTIM CDP MACCuracy CEVM Composite EVM XTIM CDP ERR CTABle CTABle Channel Table XTIMe CDP CHIP EVM EVMChip EVM vs Chip XTIM CDP FVSLot FESLot Frequency Error vs Slot XTIMe CDP CHIP MAGNI MECHip Magnitude Error vs Chip tude XTIM CDP ERR PCDomain PCDerror Peak Code Domain Error XTIM CDPower PSVSlot PDSLot Phase Discontinuity vs Slot XTIMe CDPower CHIP PHA PECHip Phase Error vs Chip Se XTIM CDP PVSLot PSLot Power vs Slot absolute scaling XTIM CDP PVSLot ABSolute XTIM CDP PVSLot RATio PSLot Power vs Slot relative scaling Use SENS CDP PDIS ABS REL subsequently to change the scaling Commands for Compatibility String Parameter Enum Parameter Evaluation XTIM CDP PVSYmbo PSYMbol Power vs Symbol XTIM CDP ERR SUMMary RSUMmary Result Summary XPOW CDP RATio SCONst Symbol Constellation XTIM CDP SYMB EVM SEVM Symbol EVM XTIMe CDPower SYM SMERror Symbol Magnitude Error Bol EVM MAGNItude XTIMe CD
80. UE AMPT gt Reference level 0 dBm 2 3 4 FREQ gt Center frequency 2 1175 GHz 5 MEAS gt POWER 6 AMPT gt Scale Config gt Auto Scale Once Result MultiView Spectrum 3G FDD UE Ref Level 0 00 dBm Att 10d8 SWT 100 ms 1 2 1175 GHz 1001 pts 10 0 ms 2 Channel Power W CDMA SGPP REV Channel Bandwidth Offset Reference TX1 Ref 3 840 MHz 0 00 dBm Tx Tota Fig 10 1 Measurement Example 1 Measuring the Signal Channel Power 10 2 Measurement 2 Determining the Spectrum Emission Mask The 3GPP specification defines a measurement which monitors the compliance with a spectral mask in a range of at least 12 5 MHz around the 3GPP FDD UE carrier To assess the power emissions in the specified range the signal power is measured in the range near the carrier using a 30kHz filter in the ranges far away from the carrier User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 138 Measurement 2 Determining the Spectrum Emission Mask using a 1MHz filter The resulting trace is compared to a limit line defined in the 3GPP specification Test setup gt Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMU to the RF input of the R amp S FSW coaxial cable with N connectors Settings on the R amp S SMU 1 PRESET FREQ 2 2 1175 GHz LEVEL 0 dBm DIGITAL STD WCDMA 3GPP DIGITAL STD gt Set Default DIGITAL STD gt LINK DIRECTION gt UP REVERSE DIGITAL STD TEST MODELS DPCCH DPDCH960ksps DIGITAL STD gt Select Use
81. Y SCALe MINimum sessi 189 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe PDlVision sseeeeeeeeeeenenene nne 189 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel eeeeeeseeeeeee emen eene 189 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet eseessssseee 190 deze cpu c SEa 190 INP ice ed 8728 77 RE 191 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe AUTO ONCE Automatic scaling of the y axis is performed once then switched off again Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Auto Scale Once on page 85 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe MAXimum Value This command defines the maximum value of the y axis for the selected result display Parameters Value numeric value RST depends on the result display The unit and range depend on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y MIN 60 DISP TRAC Y MAX 0 Defines the y axis with a minimum value of 60 and maximum value of 0 Manual operation See Y Maximum Y Minimum on page 85 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe MINimum Value This command defines the minimum value of the y axis for the selected result display Parameters Value numeric value RST depends on the result display The unit and range depend on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y MIN 60 DISP TRAC
82. Y MAX 0 Defines the y axis with a minimum value of 60 and maximum value of 0 Manual operation See Y Maximum Y Minimum on page 85 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision Value This remote command determines the grid spacing on the Y axis for all diagrams where possible Parameters Value numeric value WITHOUT UNIT unit according to the result dis play Defines the range per division total range 10 lt Value gt RST depends on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y PDIV 10 Sets the grid spacing to 10 units e g dB per division For example 10 dB in the Code Domain Power result display DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel lt ReferenceLevel gt This command defines the reference level Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements With a reference level offset 0 the value range of the reference level is modified by the offset Parameters lt ReferenceLevel gt The unit is variable Range see datasheet RST 0 dBm Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Reference Level on page 79 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet Offset This command defines a reference level offset Parameters Offset Range 200 dB to 200 dB RST OdB Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB Manual operation See Shifting the Display Offset on page 80 INPut GAIN STATe State This comma
83. aa d n dx 130 Import Export Functions The following import and export functions are available via softkeys in the Save Recall menu which is displayed when you select the Save or Open icon in the tool bar Some functions for particular data types are also available via softkeys or dialog boxes in the corresponding menus e g trace data or marker peak lists For a description of the other functions in the Save Recall menu see the R amp S FSW User Manual los M 131 Ein ARN Kt 131 310 P H O M 131 LWG EXPO a a iod abus dub EM NN wann Cua nud qu MIR EE 131 Import Export Functions Import Provides functions to import data I Q Import Import Opens a file selection dialog box to select an import file that contains IQ data This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process I Q data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applications Note that the I Q data must have a specific format as described in the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and 1 Q Input User Manual Remote command MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe on page 276 Export Opens a submenu to configure data export I Q Export Export Opens a file selection dialog box to select an export file to which the IQ data will be stored This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process I Q data such as the
84. aborted by selecting the high lighted softkey or key again Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Single Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a chan nel defined sequence In this case a channel in single sweep mode is swept only once by the Sequencer Furthermore the RUN SINGLE key controls the Sequencer not individual sweeps RUN SINGLE starts the Sequencer in single mode If the Sequencer is off only the evaluation for the currently displayed measurement channel is updated Remote command INITiate IMMediate on page 240 Continue Single Sweep After triggering repeats the number of sweeps set in Sweep Count without deleting the trace of the last measurement While the measurement is running the Continue Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again Remote command INITiate CONMeas on page 239 User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 106 Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Refresh This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated and only for MSRA applications The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by the currently active application only The results for any other applications remain unchanged This is useful f
85. and Time Alignment Error Measurements SCH The 3GPP FDD application synchronizes to the signal without assum ing the presence of a CPICH This setting is required for measure ments on test model 4 without CPICH While this setting can also be used with other channel configurations it should be noted that the probability of synchronization failure increases with the number of data channels Remote command SENSe CDPower STYPe on page 205 Antenna1 Antenna2 Synchronization is configured for each diversity antenna individually on separate tabs The 3GPP FDD standard defines two different CPICH patterns for diversity antenna 1 and antenna 2 The CPICH pattern used for synchronization can be defined depending on the antenna standard configuration or fixed to either pattern independantly of the antenna user defined configuration Remote command SENSe CDPower ANTenna on page 162 CPICH Mode Antenna Antenna2 Defines whether the common pilot channel CPICH is defined by its default position or a user defined position P CPICH Standard configuration CPICH is always on channel 0 S CPICH User defined configuration Enter the CPICH code number in the S CPICH Code Nr field Remote command SENSe CDPower UCPich ANT lt antenna gt STATe on page 204 S CPICH Code Nr Antenna1 Antenna2 If a user defined CPICH definition is to be used enter the code of the CPICH based on the spreading factor 256 P
86. bit stream of one slot is transfer red Each symbol contains two consecutive bits in the case of a QPSK modulated slot and 4 consecutive bits in the case of a 16QAM modulated slot One value is transfer red per bit range 0 1 The number of symbols is not constant and may vary for each sweep Individual symbols in the bit stream may be invalid depending on the channel type and the bit rate symbols without power The assigned invalid bits are marked by one of the digits 6 7 or 9 The values and number of the bits are as follows without HS DPCCH channels see SENSe CDPower HSDPamode on page 163 Table 11 7 Bit values and numbers without HS DPCCH channels Unit D Value range 0 1 6 9 0 Low state of a transmitted bit 1 High state of a transmitted bit 6 Bit of a symbol of a suppressed slot of a DPCH in Compressed Mode DPCH CPRSD 9 Bit of a suppressed symbol of a DPCH e g TFCI off Bits per slot Naipersymp 2 Number of symbols Ngymp 10 2 Code Class Number of bits Nai Nsymb Naipersymb Format Bityo Bits Bitio Bit Bityo Bity Bitysymb o Bitysymb 1 Retrieving Results The values and number of the bits including HS DPCCH channels see SENSe CDPower HSDPamode on page 163 are as follows Table 11 8 Bit values and numbers including HS DPCCH channels Unit Value range 0 1 6 7 8 9 0 Low state of a transmitted bit 1 H
87. certet tbt moe teret entr tr dct e e ds eed io vi d Fuse aes De APPARE 277 MMEMory STORe IQ STATe MMEMory STOResns TRAGS it ettet treten a ea P x SER a ERE RE EXER EE RC ER ndei 262 OUT PUEDIO D einen 174 OUTPut DIQ C DEV ICG C o 174 QUT PUEIFAFE REQUCN CY 2 cn rrt ttti ite net n nre erp vans died en Er Ce pn 186 OUTPHETRIGGEr lt pOrt DIRSCLIO Rc t tee edet eiat mecrie tr trato tl vei rod ese Peck ERR nates 199 OUTPut TRIGgersports EEWVOL recettes EA E EEEE ASETE e de Cer ERA ERE EE EE ER TUR 200 OUTPut TRIGgersport OT Yen ee teret dae dias genet eee D oe ea oes 200 OUTPut TRIGgersport PUESe IMMediate oret tmd repeti crees eme ces etd back eda e enn 200 OQUTPutTRIGg er lt port gt PULSe LENG hits certain ecrire e iore eee cine ai 201 STATus QUEStionable DIQ CONDILTOf orte rette eicere ere ep eue emet d Et uber exea deg 177 STATus QUEStionable DIQ ENABle STATus QUEStionable DIQ NTRansition STATus QUEStionable DIQ PTRansition STATUus QUEStionable DIQ EVENI niaaa ertt a tdb d aae suse ee ede due ER aa 178 STATUs QUEStionable SYNC CONDILIOF ii tuuc ear ee e cei Ee tdeo a dV ra gea EET HERES en 281 STATUs QUEStionable SYNO ENABIO t coca eret ette eet eed tpe de athe ee 281 STATus QUEStionable SYNG NTRALFISIOnD iiid ao nri beet rto Peel tbe Ern aAA EE 282 STATus QUEStionable SYNC PTRansition STA
88. codes is projected onto the various spreading factors The result consists of the peak code domain error value per slot The measurement interval is the slot spacing of the CPICH timing offset of O chips ref erenced to the beginning of the frame Only the channels recognized as active are used to generate the ideal reference signal for the peak code domain error If an assigned channel is not recognized as active since pilot symbols are missing or incom plete the difference between the measurement and reference signal is very high This display is a bar diagram over slots The unit is dB The Peak Code Domain Error evalu ation covers the entire signal and the entire observation time 3 Peak Code Domain Error Slot 0 Fig 3 10 Peak Code Domain Error display for 3GPP FDD BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PCDerror see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 230 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE 1 4 Phase Discontinuity vs Slot The Phase Discontinuity vs Slot is calculated according to 3GPP specifications The phase calculated for each slot is interpolated to both ends of the slot using the fre quency shift of that slot The difference between the phase interpolated for the begin ning of one slot and the end of the preceding slot is displayed as the phase discontinu ity of that slot User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 27 R amp S FSW K72 K73 Measurements and Result Display 1 Phase Discontinuity vs Slot Slot 0 Fig
89. displayed in the channel bar in 3GPP FDD applications for Code Domain Analysis Ref Level Reference level Att Mechanical and electronic RF attenuation Freq Center frequency for the RF signal Channel Channel number code number and spreading factor CPICH Slot Slot of the CPICH channel Slot UE User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 13 Understanding the Display Information Power Power result mode e Absolute e Relative to CPICH BTS application K72 only e Relative to total power SymbRate Symbol rate of the current channel Capture UE application K73 only basis for analysis slot or frame Window title bar information For each diagram the header provides the following information 1 Code Domain Power Fig 2 1 Window title bar information in 3GPP applications 1 Window number 2 Window type 3 Trace color 4 Trace number 5 Detector Diagram footer information For most graphical evaluations the diagram footer beneath the diagram contains scal ing information for the x axis where applicable e Start channel chip frame slot e Channel chip frame slot per division e Stop channel chip frame slot For the Bitstream evaluation the diagram footer indicates e Channel format type and modulation type HS PDSCH only e Number of data bits e Number of TPC bits e Number of TFCI bits e Number of pilot bits The bit numbers are indicated in the order
90. domain power 289 SEM e na 287 Signal channel power 287 Ariggered GDP inr rrr 290 Protection RF INPUT remote icti tetas 167 PSCH Pwr Abs Pwr Rel R IS amp SDiglIGODnf a ccena ok oreste were ba nE Ea 71 R amp S EX IQ BOX DIGI COMM p TR 71 Range feno M U O 85 oer m 17 jr IM M EE 16 Reference frequency Measurement example Programming example Reference level Auto level tenente rentes Digital lO eE cae E eb oes E TA e denne sass Displayed OIffSet esee Offset softkey Ixefererice DOWOE etai orb eene ebore Eni r e ai Refreshing MSRAapplicatioris 1 0 narrat poen rper MSRA applications remote MSRT applications remote sssss 279 SOflK6y aite eret rr pereat 107 Remote commands Basics on syntax Boolean values Capitalization Character dala x2 Vivien cert eei re ec Ee ERR D taiblOCKS tiet eet EY eem reete N meric Valles enim tr 153 OBSOlelo tenete entras rte erc ee Er 282 Optional Keywotds 3 rectore erret iss 152 Parameters eoe aote Dd nr Fa iue 153 Rug d OQ 155 SUPIXES taion tetto cid rette treten dete tars 152 Resetting FRE input protectlom er enn 167 Restoring Channel Settings coa correre Vv ineat 62 284 Result display Config ratiOn rne rh rere r
91. e Analog Baseband Input Settings eese nennen 72 e Probe SSWINGS nuance ere rrr re dee eee aea eee 74 Radio Frequency Input The default input source for the R amp S FSW is Radio Frequency i e the signal at the RF INPUT connector on the front panel of the R amp S FSW If no additional options are installed this is the only available input source lt E B p b enW ea 8 Gnarhriim ES Input Source Power Sensor Probes Radio On Frequency External Input Coupling Mixer Impedance Digital I 9 Q High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz Analog YIG Presclector Baseband Input Connector Radio Frequency State in aci ern Ren d iP ed i Pc bu dd 68 MEU ses Uie EE 68 lustris me ERE 69 FliglisPass FIller 1 3 GI icon teo cena dc e et ne xcd dua 69 WG APIS SIS GO ics es ca casts Sees terrre ipe tete epe rece e tetuer xu Andre re umet cue amu dre ceu d 69 Input COMON uoc ceder deceret degener rte atrae zd den cans HER EH LT ERR e e ERERE e e dames 70 Radio Frequency State Activates input from the RF INPUT connector Remote command INPut SELect on page 169 Input Coupling The RF input of the R amp S FSW can be coupled by alternating current AC or direct cur rent DC This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or from the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal This is
92. eecnui pen neat een IRSE Combi ertet Sequencet eere ones Aborting remote Activating remote Mode remote PROMOS ME Settings IG NI MR CET 61 Show inactive channels ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 20 Signal capturing Remote control aeree rnnt 201 fe M 93 Signal description BIS POMOC citet on pr ehe temps 162 BIS GonfiguratilOrii ice tortor pee err eren 63 GonfigutetlOD se iucsers a kenan enin eT tapete nage 62 Remote control irren einen enema 162 SOflK6y tiit hi e E Rn UE remote UE Configuration Signal source lig aa A 169 Single sweep SOMKCY aN 106 Single ZOOM onion rrt n br Eres 110 Slope Trigger iere better 91 197 IOUS aceti eodd ete asc rr b de wean 45 Capture mode Softkeys Amplitude Config 1 rente 78 AUTOA siete rte t m v et re ses 108 Auto Level rtc tei dues 80 84 108 Auto Scrambling Code sssrinin 65 108 Capture Offset 91 94 Center sirrinin 86 Channel Detection 2 conet tr tnr 96 Code Domain Settings 119 121 Contin e Single SWEEP tne 106 Contin oUs SWEEP iscrisse t eere ere 106 CPICH is DiglGOBf iiir eren 71 Digital Oenema ont pet o pee etus 89 Display Config 15 57 Evaluation Range asarei 116 dc i EA ETTET 131 External s89
93. erben exe rneg troc ANETE EG E EE ODE EY concen 222 SENSe CDPower HSDbPa rrode trt rte e n ere C et nnt te n RR e EX Eee SENSe CDPower HSLot 5 reote trn ra E RENTE XR ELEC y ENAT ATENON SENSe CDPower ICTReshold m SENSe CBPower IOlLerigtli rotor trt en etti n tr etn rx eg EE OTi SENSe CDPower ECODe DVALU 1 coo tnter ta tton SER er Pe eher n XE ne x Eee E RR EN EER 165 SENSe CDPower L CODe SEARCh LIST eeessessseseseeee eene eren ennt enne oE ANE rennen treten enne 164 SENSe CDPower ECODe SEARch IMMediate exterrita rn ntt cere 163 SENSe CDPower ECODe TYPE tree hr er ettet nta e hse Ern ATENT Rey teh ear n Ea trc coe FER ENTE SENSe CDPower LCODe VALue SENSe CDPower LEVel ADJust sta SENSe CDPowerMAPPing ota tereti teint terrae hr a ex eye y HER E tu Ene eges SENSE CDPOWEr dl H SENSe CDPower NORMAalize otn tee err nene et rentre den e Fe RED REX ena ge SENSe CDPower PCONtrol SENSe GDPowWeFPD IET sainan ene A e E A EEEIEE SENSe CDPower PDISpl amp y ntn terrre i e eren Ere aSa AA ESTEE aei SENSe CDPower PREF6rence uet rere rrr Ente EHE PER EYE EHE REY EE EXE ERE ERE MEE CER RER EN ER Fe ead SENSE CDPOWer PRESET onn rue Dre ter Sota eripe chen ek eA EEIX Ce Ure E rer d e EEEE EEN SENSe CDPOWErOINVE D E aii SENSe CDPowe
94. extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the application data The application data range is indicated in the MSRA Master by verti cal blue lines However the individual result displays of the application need not analyze the com plete data range The data range that is actually analyzed by the individual result dis play is referred to as the analysis interval In the 3GPP FDD BTS application the analysis interval is automatically determined according to the selected channel slot or frame to analyze which is defined for the evaluation range depending on the result display The currently used analysis interval in seconds related to capture buffer start is indicated in the window header for each result display For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual 3 2 Time Alignment Error Measurements Time Alignment Error Measurements are a special type of Code Domain Analysis used to determine the time offset between the signals of both antennas of a base station They are only available in 3GPP FDD BTS measurements The result is displayed numerically on the screen a graphical result is not available Measurement setup The antenna signals of the two BTS transmitter branches are fed to the analyzer via a combiner Each antenna must provide a common pilot channel i e P CPICH for antenna 1 and P CPICH or S CPICH for antenna 2 The figure 3 20 shows the mea surement setup Time Alignmen
95. for a Time Alignment Error or Power measurement for the same input signal Then you can use the Sequencer to perform all measurements consecutively and either switch through the results easily or monitor all results at the same time in the MultiView tab For details on the Sequencer function see the R amp S FSW User Manual Selecting the measurement type When you activate an 3GPP FDD application Code Domain Analysis of the input sig nal is started automatically However the 3GPP FDD applications also provide other measurement types gt To select a different measurement type do one of the following e Select the Overview softkey In the Overview select the Select Measure ment button Select the required measurement e Press the MEAS key on the front panel In the Select Measurement dialog box select the required measurement e FOSSUR DPI cedit attt A ve ade P 57 Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements 58 sE Messulremielis c rct rec etre d e p re Hr d petas 111 5 1 Result Display The captured signal can be displayed using various evaluation methods All evaluation methods available for 3GPP FDD applications are displayed in the evaluation bar in SmartGrid mode when you do one of the following e Select the EJ SmartGrid icon from the toolbar e Select the Display button in the Overview e Press the MEAS key e Select the Display Config softkey in any 3GPP FDD me
96. for delta marker 1 is always Delta These types cannot be changed Note If normal marker 1 is the active marker switching the Mkr Type activates an additional delta marker 1 For any other marker switching the marker type does not activate an additional marker it only switches the type of the selected marker Normal A normal marker indicates the absolute value at the defined position in the diagram Delta A delta marker defines the value of the marker relative to the speci fied reference marker marker 1 by default Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 269 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 270 All Markers Off Deactivates all markers in one step Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF on page 270 R amp S FSW K72 K73 Analysis 6 5 2 General Marker Settings General marker settings are defined in the Marker Config tab of the Marker dialog box Analysis Markers Marker Settings Search Range Marker Table Settings o o GUI Trace Marker Table Display Defines how the marker information is displayed On Displays the marker information in a table in a separate area beneath the diagram Off Displays the marker information within the diagram area Auto Default Up to two markers are displayed in the diagram area If more markers are active the marker table is displayed automatically Remote command DISPlay MTABle o
97. for each channel in ascend ing order Usage Query only Manual operation See Channel Table on page 19 See Code Domain Power on page 21 TRACe lt n gt DATA FINal1 This command returns the peak list For each peak the following results are given Return values lt Freq gt Peak frequency lt Level gt Peak level lt DeltaLevel gt Delta between current peak level and next higher peak level Example TRAC2 DATA FINall Returns a list of peak values Usage Query only Mode BTS application only TRACe lt n gt DATA LIST This command returns the peak list of the spectrum emission mask measurement list evaluation An array of values is returned for each range of the limit line array of range 1 gt array of range 2 gt array of range n where each array consists of the following values Retrieving Results No Start Stop lt RBW gt lt Freq gt lt Levelabs gt Levelrel Delta Limit check lt Unused1 gt lt Unused2 gt Parameters lt No gt Number of the limit line range lt Start gt Start frequency of the limit line range Default unit Hz lt Stop gt Stop frequency of the limit line range Default unit Hz lt RBW gt Resolution bandwidth of the limit line range Default unit Hz lt Freq gt Frequency of the peak power within the range Default unit Hz lt Levelabs gt Absolute power of the peak within the range Default unit dBm lt Levelrel gt Relative
98. functions are available to provide input via the Digital Base band Interface R amp S FSW B17 in the applications that support it They can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key in the Input dialog box d Input Source Power Sensor Frequency 100 dim OOO oo IQR 100 101165 Digital IQ OUT Z 10 MHz Full Scale Level 10 dBm For more information see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and l Q Input User Manual Digtal VO PUT State EM 70 Input Sample Rafees n NEEE E AA ET 71 Fall Scale Level EEUU 71 Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level sssssssssseeeeeeeneees 71 Connected IMS rumeni cn eno etta ter re ete x etel us Feo tg ae dne c pe dee ER de restates 71 BI M rete 71 Digital I Q Input State Enables or disable the use of the Digital IQ input source for measurements Digital IQ is only available if the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is installed Remote command INPut SELect on page 169 Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Input Sample Rate Defines the sample rate of the digital I Q signal source This sample rate must corre spond with the sample rate provided by the connected device e g a generator If Auto is selected the sample rate is adjusted automatically by the connected device The allowed range is from 100 Hz to 10 GHz Remote command INPut DIQ SRATe on page 174 INPut DIQ SR
99. gt File name of individual channel table file lt FileSize gt File size of individual channel table file in bytes Example CONF WCDP CTAB CAT Sample result description see table below 52853 2634403840 3GB 1 16 XML 3469 3GB 1 32 XML 5853 3GB 1 64 XML 10712 3GB 2 XML 1428 3GB 3 16 XML 3430 3GB 3 32 XML 5868 3GB 4 XML 678 3GB 5 2 XML 2554 3GB 5 4 XML 4101 3GB 5 8 XML 7202 3GB 6 XML 7209 MYTABLE XML 349 Usage Query only Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Predefined Tables on page 99 Table 11 5 Description of query results in example Value Description 52853 Total size of all channel table files 52583 bytes 2634403840 Free memory on hard disk 2 6 Gbytes 3GB 1 16 XML Channel table 1 3GB 1 16 XML 3469 File size for channel table 1 3469 bytes 3GB 1 32 XML Channel table 2 3GB 1 32 XML 5853 File size for channel table 2 5853 bytes 3GB 1 64 XML Channel table 3 3GB 1 64 XML Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Value Description 10712 File size for channel table 3 10712 bytes Channel table x CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle COPY lt FileName gt This command copies one channel table onto another one The channel table to be copied is selected with command CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle NAME on page 213 The name of the channel table may contain a maximum of
100. high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are suppressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Remote command INPut FILTer HPASs STATe on page 168 YIG Preselector Activates or deactivates the YIG preselector An internal YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FSW ensures that image frequen cies are rejected However this is only possible for a restricted bandwidth In order to use the maximum bandwidth for signal analysis you can deactivate the YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FSW which may lead to image frequency display Note that the YIG preselector is active only on frequencies greater than 8 GHz There fore switching the YIG preselector on or off has no effect if the frequency is below that value Remote command INPut FILTer YIG STATe on page 169 Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Input Connector Determines whether the RF input data is taken from the RF INPUT connector default or the optional BASEBAND INPUT I connector This setting is only available if the Ana log Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 is installed and active for input It is not avail able for the R amp S FSW67 For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and l Q Input User Manual Remote command INPut CONNector on page 168 Digital I Q Input Settings The following settings and
101. individual window toggle the Use Com mon Branch setting to No Select the window from the list of active windows under Specifics for then select the Branch Remote command CALCulate lt n gt CDPower Mapping on page 223 Code Domain Analysis Settings BTS Measurements Some evaluations provide further settings for the results The settings for BTS meas urements are described here Code Domain Analysis Settings BTS Measurements Analysis domain Analyzer Common Range m Eliminate DC Offset Code Domain Settings Code Domain Power Eole M DEEA Absolute MESTSETQV Trace Power Reference TOT CPICH Pow Show Difference to Previous Slot Bitstream Constellation Parameter B Compensate IQ OffSet 0 cccccceccecesceeceneeeeeseeeeeeeeceaaeeseeneecsaaeesseneeessaeesseneeeseureeseneees 120 ode POWER LSPA AM 120 Show Difference to Previous SlOt ccccccccssssssssesesececececececeueueseseueususeuaueueeeeueeseeseess 120 Constellation Parameter B rete etre en aa nn tn ta gane n taa baa aaa E Ian RE RUd 121 Compensate IQ Offset If enabled the Q offset is eliminated from the measured signal This is useful to deduct a DC offset to the baseband caused by the DUT thus improving the EVM Note however that for EVM measurements according to standard compensation must be disabled Remote command SENSe CDPower NORMalize on page 224 Code P
102. information seinere oien na 14 Differential input Analog Baseband B71 remote control Analog Baseband B71 ses DiglConf Softkey see also R amp S DiglConf 71 Digital Baseband Interface B17 sssssss 77 Connected instr ment eser 78 Input Setlifij Si reote ert rheto o ra onera LE EIN Ej vex Pr axe AES 70 Input status remote sis d71 Output connection status remote 174 Output settings een 77 T8 Status TegiSlels nier oto correr tavacnatscsacesssseanteronencence 175 Digital 1 Q Connection information ern Enhanced mode Input connection information Input settings Output settings M Output settings information esses MIG QCM OE epe PET Digital input Connection information eren 71 Digital output Enabling Rt 7T Display Config Softkey DPOEIS eot teu MEL e EM LE Drop out time BID EE 90 Duplicating Measurement channel remote 156 E Electronic input attenuation eere 81 Eliminating o fol 1 MP 120 122 224 Mall CIPS MERC TE E E Eiaa 122 Enhanced mode DOHO MR e eA EE E HUS 89 Errors Device connections B17
103. input signal Test setup 1 Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMU to the RF input of the R amp S FSW coaxial cable with N connectors 2 Connect the reference input REF INPUT on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW to the reference output REF on the rear panel of R amp S SMU coaxial cable with BNC connectors Settings on the R amp S SMU 1 PRESET FREQ 2 1175 GHz LEVEL 0 dBm 2 3 4 DIGITAL STD WCDMA 3GPP 5 DIGITAL STD gt Set Default 6 DIGITAL STD gt LINK DIRECTION gt UP REVERSE SSS SS S NUUS User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 140 R amp S FSW K72 K73 Measurement Examples U U ee 7 DIGITAL STD gt TEST MODELS gt DPCCH_DPDCH960ksps 8 DIGITAL STD gt Select User Equipment gt UE 1 ON 9 DIGITAL STD WCDMA 3GPP STATE ON Settings on the R amp S FSW 1 PRESET MODE gt 3GPP FDD UE 2 3 AMPT Reference level 10 dBm 4 FREQ gt Center frequency 2 1175 GHz 5 AMPT Scale Config Auto Scale Once Result Window 1 shows the code domain power of the signal on the Q branch Window 2 shows the result summary i e the numeric results of the CDP measure ment MultiView Spectrum 3G FDD UE Reference Level Ref Level 10 00dBm Freq 2 1175GHz Channel 0 256 Q Power Relative 10 0 dBm Att 20 dB Slot O Capture Frame 1 Code Domain Power cho 2 Result Summary General Results Frame 0 Slot 0 Tot ver ame Inact Chan esults Ch 0256 Fig
104. lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Example STAT QUES DIQ Usage Query only Configuring Input via the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 The following commands are required to control the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 in a remote environment They are only available if this option is instal led Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface see the R amp S FSW I Q Ana lyzer User Manual Useful commands for Analog Baseband data described elsewhere INP SEL AIQ see INPut SELect on page 169 SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 186 Commands for the Analog Baseband calibration signal are described in the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote commands exclusive to Analog Baseband data input and output INPut lO BAEancegESTATG icu edu e e ae teenies aac aad 179 INP tQ F LPscale AU TO 3 RE te cese ce stas qoi eee Ic E IP ec a eee endl a 179 leges BETIS 180 INPUCIO TYPE tM Rm 180 CALibration ATQ DG OFfset 2 ILE nent uo ce to hotte co eti ero dace cero EDE 181 GALibralion AIQIDGOFfsetQ iere ian pe ex idee ad Rx S OO DPA NEAN E DARNR DDR RE QA RR ARR laces 181 SENSe PROBe ch SETup CMOFfset eeessssssssssssssssseses enne nnn nnn nnne nean 182 YRAGEIO APCORD
105. marked by the number 8 and the last bits represent the transmitted symbol If no power is transmitted in a slot four or six entries per symbol of value 7 are transmitted Example 2 Some slots of the frame are QPSK modulated and some are switched OFF If one or more slots of the frame are QPSK modulated and no slot is 16QAM modulated 2 bits per symbol are transmitted If no power is transmitted in a slot 2 entries per symbol of value 7 are transmitted Example 3 User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 256 Retrieving Results Some slots of a DPCH are suppressed because of compressed mode transmission The bits of the suppressed slots are marked by the digit 6 In this case always 2 bits per symbol are transmitted TRACe lt n gt DATA ATRace1 This command returns a list of absolute Frequency Error vs Slot values for all 16 slots based on CPICH slots In contrast to the TRACE1 parameter return value absolute values are returned Return values lt SlotNumber gt Slot number lt FreqError gt Absolute frequency error Default unit Hz Example TRAC2 DATA ATR Returns a list of absolute frequency errors for all slots in window 2 Usage Query only Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Frequency Error vs Slot on page 25 TRACe lt n gt DATA CTABle This command returns the pilot length and the channel state active inactive in addi tion to the values returned for TRACE lt t gt This command i
106. may lead to hardware damage Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 191 INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 192 Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 If option R amp S FSW B25 is installed you can also activate an electronic attenuator In Auto mode the settings are defined automatically in Manual mode you can define the mechanical and electronic attenuation separately This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 Note Electronic attenuation is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 13 6 GHz In Auto mode RF attenuation is provided by the electronic attenuator as much as possible to reduce the amount of mechanical switching required Mechanical attenua tion may provide a better signal to noise ratio however When you switch off electronic attenuation the RF attenuation is automatically set to the same mode auto manual as the electronic attenuation was set to Thus the RF attenuation may be set to automatic mode and the full attenuation is provided by the mechanical attenuator if possible Both the electronic and the mechanical attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed in the status bar Remote command INPut EA
107. more information see OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel RST DEVice Manual operation See Output Type on page 76 OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe IMMediate This command generates a pulse at the trigger output Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Suffix port Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Usage Event Manual operation See Send Trigger on page 76 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth Length This command defines the length of the pulse generated at the trigger output Suffix port Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters Length Pulse length in seconds Manual operation See Pulse Length on page 76 11 5 5 Signal Capturing The following commands are required to configure how much and how data is captured from the input signal MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master channel actually captures data from the input signal The data acquisition settings for the 3GPP FDD application in MSRA mode define the application data see chapter 11 12 Configuring the Application Data Range MSRA mode only on page 278 For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual Useful commands for configuring data acquisition described elsewhere SENSe CDPower FRAM
108. page 216 Symbol Rate Symbol rate at which the channel is transmitted Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Channel Number Ch SF Number of channel spreading code 0 to spreading factor 1 Remote command BTS measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 214 UE measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA on page 216 Use TFCI Indicates whether the slot format and data rate are determined by the Transport For mat Combination Indicator TFCl Remote command CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 214 Timing Offset Defines a timing offset in relation to the CPICH channel During evaluation the detec ted timing offset can be compared to this setting only the delta is displayed see Tim ing Offset Reference on page 99 Remote command CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 214 Pilot Bits Number of pilot bits of the channel only valid for the control channel DPCCH Remote command BTS measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 214 UE measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA on page 216 CDP Relative Code domain power relative to the total power of the signal Remote command BTS measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 214 UE measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA on page 216 Status Indicates the channel status Codes that are not assigned are marked as inactive channels Remote com
109. rne nth na Rx mad De na Rea sa REREN 156 INS ThumentiGREate MW eran dnte reete hber pene Rope e n ERE haa ERR CER DR DEED 156 INSTramentoREale REPLACE iu Eee eate aeta eb ex dec bp da RE TRAY 157 INS Tr mehtiDEE amp le 11 oor roe E APP ePSSP NT eS Rer Pe n TP POIU 157 NS tumen UST EMT a a LETTO PEE 157 INSTI menbRENGITIG oreca aeo eene cepe d nodu A Ea r ATAA mu aae aa iaia 159 INSTt ment p SEL ect ennir rnana eA E NI ER AEAN A ETE Nii 159 SYSTem PRESetCHANNel EXEC ute csin uoto etna tenere Eaa a A 159 INSTrument CREate DUPLicate This command duplicates the currently selected measurement channel i e starts a new measurement channel of the same type and with the identical measurement set tings The name of the new channel is the same as the copied channel extended by a consecutive number e g Spectrum gt Spectrum 2 The channel to be duplicated must be selected first using the INST SEL command This command is not available if the MSRA Master channel is selected Example INST SEL Spectrum INST CRE DUPL Duplicates the channel named Spectrum and creates a new measurement channel named Spectrum 2 Usage Event INSTrument CREate NEW lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName gt This command adds an additional measurement channel The number of measure ment channels you can configure at the same time depends on available memory Activating 3GPP FDD Measurements Parameters lt ChannelType
110. rohde schwarz com product FSW html Service Manual This manual is available in PDF format on the Documentation CD ROM delivered with the instrument It describes how to check compliance with rated specifications instru ment function repair troubleshooting and fault elimination It contains all information required for repairing the R amp S FSW by replacing modules Release Notes The release notes describe the installation of the firmware new and modified func tions eliminated problems and last minute changes to the documentation The corre sponding firmware version is indicated on the title page of the release notes The most recent release notes are also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html Downloads Firmware Conventions Used in the Documentation Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation Convention Description Graphical user interface ele All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen such as ments dialog boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quotation marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin program code guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics Links
111. rr e tnter 99 Restoring 100 SEIEUN e 99 Settings ertt ete ferret es 100 fami 101 Trace results 248 Channelyp6S case eti eei cn eet rer Ed eee 48 BUS nne 46 COmpressed arret terne rere 48 Configuring in table 102 104 COMO ee 46 50 MIMO 49 Parameter values remote 205 206 POGPGEE 2 dun dn cete beta 45 47 PICA a 48 PSCH 47 SCOCPCH sscan rrt rer eer RR erre 47 SCH C 45 47 SD8Gial z nd tti tied tice eite dete at 45 SSCH irisan 47 Synchronization 46 UE cancri 90 Channels 22 bess ttn hive iere d ro ihe cbr 43 Active 98 103 105 BandWidth 5 tee oreet eire c pe erred 43 Display 5 aaa 13 Evaluation range 117 Inactive showing Mapping 4417 No of Active 2 216 pulsera ici eed aad tive ee E RTENE 43 ICI e 103 105 Chip Tate EOT snra ior rre cro 16 CHIPS 45 Closing Channels remote Windows EMOTE rinsa Code class Relationship to spreading factor 44 Relationship to symbol rate sssrini 44 Code domai ETT 43 Code Domain Analysis see CDA PE 15 Code domain error power See GDEB ee ice xo t AN EE 16 Code Domain Power CI 0 HD PRA 21 Code domain settings SORKEY ioaren sesa eE NEE E LE carr e ea 119 121 Code number see Channel number
112. schema The following example shows an I Q parameter XML file The XML elements and attrib utes are explained in the following sections Q Parameter XML File Specification Sample I Q parameter XML file xyz xml lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt xml stylesheet type text xsl href open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt RS IQ TAR FileFormat fileFormatVersion 1 xsi noNamespaceSchemaLocation RsIqTar xsd xmlns xsi http www w3 0rg 2001 XMLSchema instance lt Name gt FSV K10 lt Name gt lt Comment gt Here is a comment lt Comment gt lt DateTime gt 2011 01 24T14 02 49 lt DateTime gt lt Samples gt 68751 lt Samples gt lt Clock unit Hz gt 6 5e 006 lt Clock gt lt Format gt complex lt Format gt lt DataType gt float32 lt DataType gt lt ScalingFactor unit V gt 1 lt ScalingFactor gt lt NumberOfChannels gt 1 lt NumberOfChannels gt DataFilename xyz complex float32 DataFilename lt UserData gt lt UserDefinedElement gt Example lt UserDefinedElement gt lt UserData gt lt PreviewData gt lt PreviewData gt lt RS_IQ TAR FileFormat Element Description RS IQ TAR File The root element of the XML file It must contain the attribute ileFormatVersion Format that contains the number of the file format definition Currently fileFormatVersion 2 is used Name Optional describes the device or application that created the file Comment Optional
113. sess nns 126 e Marker Search SoN ucciso iced g eue cad ttr Y dea dag t cda dug e va satt Y vdd dc adu R d 126 Marker Positioning PUNCUONS ucc recepte tne eX Ru RcE eR RE RS DE ERN XRRNU CR RR PUEDE RE 128 Individual Marker Settings In CDA evaluations up to 4 markers can be activated in each diagram at any time Analysis Markers Marker Settings Search Range Selected State Stimulus Code Domain Marker All Marker Off Ieri 1 Code Domain Power Markers Selected MAMAN co cott ice tutta etri etri oco cott rav ae ea a caa ER EAE E VR TA DU vY ECL Fou 125 Marker State reete reo t Da el nt ere an c Pel d E d e Ct xod 125 Zealand du NE I 125 MAKO ho 125 All Markets Off 1 eb c tcn e geb aee d el e en E e ce dn o ve aeg 125 Selected Marker Marker name The marker which is currently selected for editing is highlighted orange Remote command Marker selected via suffix m in remote commands Marker State Activates or deactivates the marker in the diagram Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 269 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 270 X value Defines the position of the marker on the x axis channel slot symbol depending on evaluation Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 270 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 269 Marker Type Toggles the marker type The type for marker 1 is always Normal the type
114. tab of the Input dialog box Amplitude Amplitude Scale Reference Level Input Settings VES I Q Mode 14jo Offset inniaevmi mi Differential Unit Auto Level Full Scale Level Mode Value The input settings provided here are identical to those in the Input Source gt Analog Baseband tab see Analog Baseband Input Settings on page 72 Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and l Q Input User Manual FRETERONCS GVO M 83 L Shifting the Display Offeet ssidr neret eerte i eines inten red 83 Fac c renee or rey erty 83 L Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 84 Full Scale Level Mode Value iie rettet reader eoi tos 84 Reference Level Defines the expected maximum reference level Signal levels above this value may not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display OVLD for analog baseband or digitial baseband input The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Since the R amp S FSW hardware is adapted according to this value it is recommended that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good sig
115. table Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Remote commands exclusive to configuring channel tables CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABIe NAME esesesseeeee rennen eene enne nnn tr nnne 213 CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle COMMent esses eene 213 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle NAME cessisse eene nne nnn rere nnn sinn 213 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle COMMent essere nnnm 214 CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle NAME Name This command creates a new channel table file or selects an existing channel table in order to copy or delete it Parameters Name file name RST RECENT Example CONF WCDP CTAB NAME NEW TAB Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Name on page 101 CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle COMMent Comment This command defines a comment for the selected channel table Prior to this command the name of the channel table has to be defined with command CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle NAME on page 213 The values of the table are defined with command CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 214 Parameters Comment Example CONF WCDP CTAB NAME NEW TAB Defines the channel table name CONF WCDP CTAB COMM Comment for table 1 Defines a comment for the table CONF WCDP CTAB DATA 8 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 00 8 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 00 7 1 0 256 8 0 1 0 00 Defines the table values Mode
116. the MEAS key on the front panel b In the Select Measurement dialog box select the Time Alignment Error but ton The Time Alignment Error is calculated and displayed immediately To perform an RF measurement 1 Press the MODE key on the front panel and select the 3GPP FDD BTS applica tions for base station tests or SGPP FDD UE for user equipment tests The R amp S FSW opens a new measurement channel for the 3GPP FDD application Code Domain Analysis of the input signal is performed by default Select the RF measurement a Press the MEAS key on the front panel b In the Select Measurement dialog box select the required measurement The selected measurement is activated with the default settings for the 3GPP FDD application immediately If necessary adapt the settings as described for the individual measurements in the R amp S FSW User Manual Select the Display Config button and select the evaluation methods that are of interest to you Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences Exit the SmartGrid mode and select the Overview softkey to display the Over view again Select the Analysis button in the Overview to make use of the advanced analy sis functions in the result displays e Configure a trace to display the average over a series of sweeps if necessary increase the Sweep Count in the Sweep settings e Configure markers and delta markers to determine deviations and offsets wi
117. the default Spectrum channel is activated Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel you want to delete A measurement channel must exist in order to be able delete it Example INST DEL Spectrum4 Deletes the spectrum channel with the name Spectrum4 INSTrument LIST This command queries all active measurement channels This is useful in order to obtain the names of the existing measurement channels which are required in order to replace or delete the channels Activating 3GPP FDD Measurements Return values lt ChannelType gt For each channel the command returns the channel type and lt ChannelName gt channel name see tables below Tip to change the channel name use the INSTrument REName command Example INST LIST Result for 3 measurement channels ADEM Analog Demod IQ IQ Analyzer SANALYZER Spectrum Usage Query only Table 11 1 Available measurement channel types and default channel names in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode Application lt ChannelType gt Parameter Default Channel Name Spectrum SANALYZER Spectrum 1 Q Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer Pulse R amp S FSW K6 Pulse Analog Demodulation Analog Demod R amp S FSW K7 GSM R amp S FSW K10 GSM Multi Carrier Group Delay MCGD MC Group Delay R amp S FSW K17 Noise R amp S FSW K30 NOISE Noise Phase Noise R amp S FSW PNOISE Phase Noise K40 Transi
118. the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument Very low frequencies in the input signal may be dis torted Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements However some specifications require DC coupling In this case you must protect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually For details refer to the data sheet Remote command INPut COUPling on page 168 Impedance The reference impedance for the measured levels of the R amp S FSW can be set to 50 O or 75 OQ 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance using a 75 O adapter of the RAZ type 25 O in series to the input impedance of the instrument The correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 This value also affects the unit conversion see Reference Level on page 79 This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or from the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 For analog baseband input an impedance of 50 Q is always used Remote command INPut IMPedance on page 169 High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the R amp S FSW in order to mea sure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires option R amp S FSW B13 Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the
119. the indication whether or not the currently defined line position lies within the analysis interval of the active application remains in the window title bars Parameters State ON OFF RST ON CALCulate MSRA ALINe VALue lt Position gt This command defines the position of the analysis line for all time based windows in all MSRA applications and the MSRA Master Configuring the Application Data Range MSRA mode only Parameters Position Position of the analysis line in seconds The position must lie within the measurement time of the MSRA measurement Default unit s CALCulate MSRA WINDow lt n gt IVAL This command queries the analysis interval for the window specified by the index lt n gt This command is only available in application measurement channels not the MSRA View or MSRA Master Return values lt IntStart gt Start value of the analysis interval in seconds Default unit s lt IntStop gt Stop value of the analysis interval in seconds Usage Query only INITiate REFResh This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated SySTem SEQuencer SYST SEQ OFF and only for applications in MSRA mode not the MSRA Master The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by the currently active application only The results for any other applications remain unchanged Example SYST SEQ OFF Deactivates the scheduler INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a n
120. the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate on page 200 R amp S9FSW K72 K73 Configuration poculum ac pu oc ee See 5 2 4 3 Digital I Q Output Settings The optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 allows you to output I Q data from any R amp S FSW application that processes I Q data to an external device The con figuration settings for digital 1 Q output can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key or in the Outputs dialog box o Digital output is not available if the bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B500 is active Output Meas Time 31 28i us SRate 2 Mo Output Digital IQ Digital Baseband Output Output Settings Max Sample Rate 100 MHz Sample Rate 32 MHz Full Scale Level 0 dBm Connected Instrument Device Name SMBYV 100A Serial Number 257374 Port Name Dig BB In For details on digital I Q output see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer User Manual Digital Baseband OUTDUE 5 GIU er HERE E Rae E Pago Te et deed eit ERR REPERTA RUE TT Output Settings Intormmstiol oett t eA E ARR I RR qeERA 78 Connected Instrument eii user teneret pani een ane Rr kn nra apaia baaada a 78
121. 0 0 0000 0000E 0000E 0000E 7200E 8435E 0231E 56503 0 0 006 006 006 009 001 001 3 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Measurement 3 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power RST Reset the instrument INST CRE NEW MWCD UEMeasurement Activate a 3GPP FDD UE measurement channel named UEMeasurement DISP TRAC Y SCAL RLEV 10 Set the reference level to 10 dBm FREQ CENT 2 1175 GHz Set the center frequency to 2 1175 GHz DISP TRAC Y SCAL AUTO ONCE Optimize the scaling of the y axis for the current measurement INIT CONT OFF Stops continuous sweep SWE COUN 100 Set the number of sweeps to be performed to 100 INIT WAI Start a new measurement with 100 sweeps and wait for the end CALC MARK FUNC WCDP MS RES CDPR Retrieve the relative code domain power Result 0 dB TRAC DATA TRACE1 Retrieve the trace data of the code domain power measurement Result 8 000000000 0 000000000 4 319848537 3 011176586 0 000000000 2 000000000 1 000000000 4 318360806 3 009688854 1 000000000 8 000000000 0 000000000 7 348078156E 001 7 217211151E 001 1 000000000 TE area ROSC SOUR EXT10 Select the external frequency from the REF INPUT 1 20 MHZ connector as a reference CALC MARK FUNC WCDP MS RES FERR Query the carrier frequency error Result 0 1 Hz 11 15 4 Programming Examples R amp S FSW K73 CDP LCO
122. 0 TRACe IQ APCon B lt ConvFact gt Defines the conversion factor B for the calculation of the average power consumption 11 5 2 4 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Parameters lt ConvFact gt numeric value RST 0 0 mM E TRACe IQ APCon RESult Queries the average power consumption for an analog baseband input This value is only calculated at the end of the I Q data measurement if the TRACe 10 APCon STATe command is set to ON before the measurement is performed Parameters Average numeric value Default unit W Usage Query only Setting up Probes Probes can be connected to the optional BASEBAND INPUT connectors if the Analog Baseband interface option R amp S FSW B71 is installed SENS amp eTPROBSESps ID PAR Inimber auae Detector tecta 183 SENSeqPROBe p ID SRNUumbSr reete rre seen edis oc cita ode eaa toos ed pereo ds 183 SENSe PROBesp SET piMODBDE cr riii reperti hb eben ene bbg ra aai e ead 184 ISENSeTPROBESp SE Pupil NAMES reete reet eg AAA AANA EAEEREN 184 SENSe PROBe p SETup S TATe9 uoc oes io seva ce docu ioiai uirri 185 SENSE PROBE p gt SE TUP TYPE ide ache orta da tee nex nde EEE 185 SENSe PROBe lt p gt ID PARTnumber Queries the R amp S part number of the probe Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input I 2 Baseb
123. 1 32767 0 999969482421875 V Example PreviewData in XML lt PreviewData gt lt ArrayOfChannel length 1 gt lt Channel gt lt PowerVsTime gt lt Min gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 134 lt float gt lt float gt 142 lt float gt lt float gt 140 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Min gt lt Max gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 70 lt float gt lt float gt 71 lt float gt lt float gt 69 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Max gt lt PowerVsTime gt lt Spectrum gt lt Min gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 133 lt float gt lt float gt 111 lt float gt lt float gt 111 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Min gt lt Max gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 67 lt float gt float 69 float float 70 float float 69 float ArrayOfFloat 12 2 I Q Data Binary File Max Spectrum IQ Histogram width 64 height 64 gt 0123456789 0 lt Histogram gt IQ lt Channel gt lt ArrayOfChannel gt lt PreviewData gt I Q Data Binary File The I Q data is saved in binary format according to the format and data type specified in the XML file see Format element and DataType element To allow reading and writing of streamed I Q data all data is interleaved i e complex values are interleaved pairs of and Q values and multi channel signals contai
124. 1 7 3 2 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe State This command turns the zoom on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DISP ZOOM ON Activates the zoom mode Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 110 See Restore Original Display on page 110 See Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 110 Using the Multiple Zoom DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom AREA eese 237 DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom STATe sesssesseeeeeenenennene 238 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area for a multiple zoom To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm IN A 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Suffix lt zoom gt 1 4 Selects the zoom window Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt x2 gt lt y2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range O to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 110 SSS E S E User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 237 11 8 Starting a Measurement DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom g
125. 12 2c nn renta tree eva eee pev 2a ee CXV E Dac P NR Pad 224 SENSeJOGDPoOWeEPDISP By te to ertet eon Rei ease sat apes ende pM eb REM REM iuE 225 SENSeJCDPOWOPPDIFT 1 c trcetu debetur Ernie rp ta Leo Ep ether haec Uude E aeaa 225 ISENSeJTCDPONWEEPREPGFbPGE exierit nite cag eoe ate oe tarea tede eset ed epe nde d enun 225 CALCulate MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ZOOM State If marker zoom is activated the number of channels displayed on the screen in the code domain power and code domain error power result diagram is reduced to 64 The currently selected marker defines the center of the displayed range Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK FUNC ZOOM ON SENSe CDPower CPB lt Value gt This command selects the constellation parameter B According to 3GPP specification the mapping of 16QAM symbols to an assigned bit pattern depends on the constella tion parameter B Parameters lt Value gt lt numeric value gt RST 0 Example SENS CDP CDP 1 Manual operation See Constellation Parameter B on page 121 SENSe CDPower NORMalize lt State gt If enabled the I Q offset is eliminated from the measured signal This is useful to deduct a DC offset to the baseband caused by the DUT thus improving the EVM Note however that for EVM measurements according to standard compensation must be disabled Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example SENS CDP NORM ON Acti
126. 14 Commands for Compatibility The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to be reported in the summary bit If a bitis 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel STATus QUEStionable SYNC NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the Negative TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel STATus QUEStionable SYNC PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt These commands control the Positive TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to
127. 275 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 273 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum RIGHt on page 275 E CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt on page 273 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum LEFT on page 275 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT on page 274 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 276 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum NEXT on page 274 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum RIGHt on page 276 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt on page 274 Marker Positioning Functions The following functions set the currently selected marker to the result of a peak search These functions are available as softkeys in the Marker To menu which is displayed when you press the MKR gt key Markers in Code Domain Analysis measurements In Code Domain Analysis measurements the markers are set to individual symbols codes slots or channels depending on the result display Thus you can use the mark ers to identify individual codes for example Search Next Peak sacatavdsddevvansadvadbvaved Ple cae rca de bae o ce cr t Dur o 128 Search Next IMEI 1 ete dacs ec reves Det acedeveebu Co verit e EL e Dre ETE EE c ex ped eR Pop 129 Peak SeBFICli iei tice a Vacscaaaassaandeerauduasaads ridere Eeen bea E RUNE RAUE 129 SS AUC MIT TRIDENTI 129 EIC MERO E 129 uiu
128. 36 Build 47 Example 2 SOURCe EBOX USER CLOCk REFerence FREQuency 5MHZ Defines the frequency value of the reference clock Remote commands exclusive to digital I Q data input and output l izussieHaiD 3 c pm 171 INPut BIQ RANGe UPPer AUTQO 12i ecc enu occa ek uen Ru e ete TAE 172 I Put bDIOTRANGSCODPIII ceto n EER onere oce AA A a ado en OqedR 173 INPut DIQO RANGe UPPer eroe tuper tuna enirn north n ben canh k ener anaidia 173 INPuEDIDIRANGSLEUPPerEUMNET iac teo etate eerte o ettet dete rede tet eee toner teas 173 INPU DI QO SRA TC LE 174 INPUR DIOS RA TS AUTO Em 174 OUTP DIG soca T ys 174 OUTPUE DIO CDE V te c 174 INPut DIQ CDEVice This command queries the current configuration and the status of the digital I Q input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 For details see the section Interface Status Information for the Digital Baseband Inter face R amp S FSW B17 in the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer User Manual Return values lt ConnState gt Defines whether a device is connected or not 0 No device is connected 1 A device is connected lt DeviceName gt Device ID of the connected device lt SerialNumber gt Serial number of the connected device Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements lt PortName gt Port name used by the connected device lt SampleRate g
129. 48 Channel table re Evaltjatiori 5 rtm rir riens Measurement example sse 140 Programming example 289 Trace results 248 Center frequency x occ oer eere erre rrr es 86 Analog Baseband B71 ssssssssssss 73 Measurement example wa 142 kic 86 illl 86 imc 21 Channel bandwidth MSRA mode iiiincre ot artc eere tis ev e RUE SEE 56 Channel detection AuitoSeareh uir iac per re recedet qiias Config rllg 3 eet t e terere renes h i iglejo la Predefined tables Remote control Search mode Softkey Channel number Channel POWER 4 nonet tb recte tre rre rin AGUR See ACLR insciis orien ener reet reos Measurement example E Programming example Channel table Gorifig ratiOn onore reet ences 20 Channel tables COompaliSOLD 5 oreet interrete Une or go Ed 46 99 GonifigUrllig nicer tnr eret rae rona 134 Configuring remote rere tre 212 Configuring channels remote 214 215 eres 100 Creating 100 Creating from input 23 101 Deleting isni 100 Details BTS 101 Details UE 104 Editing me 100 EvalljatiOr rtr rere rerit 19 Managing corr erret nr rr rt init 99 Managing remote 208 Predetined ere
130. 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Commands for Compatibility The following commands are provided for compatibility to other signal analyzers only For new remote control programs use the specified alternative commands CAL Culaiesne REED M 283 SENSGICDPoWwerbEVelADUUSt c 2 aceti ide eda eec Aaa nanan a 284 SENSe CDPoWerPRESet 2 1 ennnen RTENE En E ASN E AAN A aaa 284 Commands for Compatibility SENSeT CDPowerUCPich CODE ieeuece apeuu tute er t nna kon nha bunker hb ide aUa a e nnda e 284 SENSE CDBPower DOPich PAT TIE caa dh E une tto aera e pneter E ee exe tru tae 285 SENSeq1CDPower UCPichES TA Te ooo ioo aacra t comun ea to co aret thoro are egg Pad d II 285 CALCulate n FEED Evaluation This command selects the evaluation method of the measured data that is to be dis played in the specified window Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the LAYout commands for new remote control programs see chapter 11 7 2 Working with Win dows in the Display on page 229 Parameters Evaluation Type of evaluation you want to display See the table below for available parameter values Example INST SEL BWCD Activates 3GPP FDD BTS mode CALC FEED CDP Selects the display of the code domain power
131. 86317205 1 197872400 Table 11 11 Trace results for power measurement Frequency Power level 1 201362252 1 173495054 1 187217355 1 186594367 1 171583891 1 188250422 11 15 2 Measurement 2 Determining the Spectrum Emission Mask RST Reset the instrument INST CRE NEW MWCD UEMeasurement Activate a 3GPP FDD UE measurement channel named UEMeasurement DISP TRAC Y SCAL RLEV 0 Set the reference level to 0 dBm FREQ CENT 2 1175 GHz Set the center frequency to 2 1175 GHz CONF WCDP MS MEAS ESP Select the spectrum emission mask measurement Programming Examples R amp S FSW K73 DISP TRAC Y SCAL AUTO ONCE Optimize the scaling of the y axis for the current measurement INIT CONT OFF Stops continuous sweep SWE COUN 100 Sets the number of sweeps to be performed to 100 INIT WAI Start a new measurement with 100 sweeps and wait for the end CALC MAR FUNC POW RES CPOW Retrieves the calculated channel power value of the reference channel Result 36 013 dBm CALC LIM FAIL Queries the result of the limit check Result 0 passed TRAC DATA LIST Retrieves the peak list of the spectrum emission mask measurement Result 1 000000000 1 275000000E 007 8 500000000E 006 1 000000000E 006 2 108782336E 009 8 057177734E 001 7 882799530E 001 2 982799530E 001 0 000000000 0 000000000 0 00000000 2 000000000 8 500000000E 006 7 500000000E
132. A operating mode the following commands are not available as they require a new data acquisition However 3GPP FDD applications cannot perform data acquisi tion in MSRA operating mode Useful commands for adjusting settings automatically described elsewhere DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 188 SENSe CDPower LCODe SEARch IMMediate on page 163 Remote commands exclusive to adjusting settings automatically CONFigure WCDPower BTS ASCale STATe 2 rtt inttr ntn 219 CONFigure WCDPower BTS MCARrier STATe sss 219 SEN Se aH 220 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation esses nennen nennen rens 220 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE ai nsa aad adanada 220 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWEV ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaeaeaeaeeeenetenenes 221 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPe ececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaeaaeaaaaeaeeneteneeenes 221 ISENSGADIUSELEVEL enne Peers ashe reote oett aet ert eene il aide ca attentus eid 222 CONFigure WCDPower BTS ASCale STATe State Activate this command if multiple carriers are used In this case the autoscaling func tion automatically changes the level settings if the center frequency is changed to another carrier Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example CONF WCDP ASC STAT ON Mode BTS application only CONFigure WCDPo
133. AIQI Selects the analog baseband input Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Connector on page 70 INPut COUPling lt CouplingType gt This command selects the coupling type of the RF input The command is not available for measurements with the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 Parameters lt CouplingType gt AC AC coupling DC DC coupling RST AC Example INP COUP DC Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Coupling on page 68 INPut FILTer HPASs STATe lt State gt Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the R amp S FSW in order to mea sure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires option R amp S FSW B13 Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are suppressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz on page 69 INPut FILTer YIG STATe State This command turns the YIG preselector on and off Note the special conditions and restrictions for the YIG filter described in YIG Prese lector on page 69 Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 0
134. ATe AUTO on page 174 Full Scale Level The Full Scale Level defines the level and unit that should correspond to an I Q sam ple with the magnitude 1 If Auto is selected the level is automatically set to the value provided by the connec ted device Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer on page 173 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT on page 173 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer AUTO on page 172 Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level If enabled the reference level is adjusted to the full scale level automatically if any change occurs Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling on page 173 Connected Instrument Displays the status of the Digital Baseband Interface connection If an instrument is connected the following information is displayed e Name and serial number of the instrument connected to the Digital Baseband Inter face e Used port e Sample rate of the data currently being transferred via the Digital Baseband Inter face e Level and unit that corresponds to an I Q sample with the magnitude 1 Full Scale Level if provided by connected instrument Remote command INPut DIQ CDEVice on page 171 DiglConf Starts the optional R amp S DiglConf application This softkey is available in the In Output menu but only if the optional software is installed Note that R amp S DiglConf requires a USB connection not LAN from the R amp S FSW to the R amp S EX IQ BOX in addition to the Digital Baseband Interface R a
135. C MARK FUNC POW RES ACP see CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESult on page 264 CALC MARK FUNC POW RES OBW CALC MARK FUNC POW RES CPOW L CALCulate LIMit k FAIL on page 263 Spectrum Emission Mask The Spectrum Emission Mask measurement determines the power of the 3GPP FDD signal in defined offsets from the carrier and compares the power values with a spec tral mask specified by 3GPP User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 38 R amp S FSW K72 K73 Measurements and Result Display SSS SS SEE SS ESE ESE eS A MultiView Spectrum 3G FDD BTS Ref Level 0 Bm Mode Auto eep 1 Spectrum Emission Mask CF 1 0 GHz 1001 pts 2 55 MHz Span 25 5 MHz 2 Result Summary W CDMA 3GPP DL Tx Power 98 Tx Bandwidth 3 840 MHz RBW 1 000 MHz Range Low t Frequency Power Abs Power Rel ALimit 12 MHz 1 00 z 991 68078 MHz 77 67 dBm 66 69 dB 52 91 dB 4 995 85987 MHz 78 00 dBm 67 02 dB 55 89 dB 996 31908 MHz 93 53 dBm 61 03 dB 996 60113 MHz 94 35 dBm e 63 59 dB 997 47071 MHz 90 83 dBm e 70 33 dB 1 00267 GHz 91 71 dBm 80 73 dB 71 21 dB 1 00350 GHz 93 52 dBm 61 21 dB 1 00396 GHz 92 71 dBm 60 21 dB 1 00409 GHz 78 58 dBm E 59 08 dB 1 01274 GHz 80 47 dBm E 56 97 dB Fig 3 23 SEM measurement results for 3GPP FDD BTS measurements Remote command CONF WCDP MEAS ESP see CONFigure WCDPower BTS MEASurement on page 160 Querying results CALC MARK FUNC POW RES CPOW see CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWercsb RESult o
136. D UEMeasurement Activate a 3GPP FDD UE measurement channel named UEMeasurement DISP TRAC Y SCAL RLEV 10 Set the reference level to 10 dBm FREQ CENT 2 1175 GHz Set the center frequency to 2 1175 GHz CDP LCOD DVAL 0000 Programming Examples R amp S FSW K73 Change the scrambling code on the analyzer to 0000 TRIG SOUR EXT Set the trigger source to the external trigger TRIGGER INPUT connector on the front panel DISP TRAC Y SCAL AUTO ONCE Optimize the scaling of the y axis for the current measurement INIT CONT OFF Stops continuous sweep SWE COUN 100 Set the number of sweeps to be performed to 100 INIT WAI Start a new measurement with 100 sweeps and wait for the end CALC MARK FUNC WCDP MS RES TFR Retrieve the trigger to frame the offset between trigger event and start of first captured frame Result 0 00599987013 ms TRIG HOLD 100 us Change the trigger offset to 100 us trigger to frame value CALC MARK FUNC WCDP MS RES TFR Retrieve the trigger to frame value Result 0 00599987013 ms 11 15 5 Measurement 5 Measuring the Composite EVM RST Reset the instrument INST CRE NEW MWCD UEMeasurement Activate a 3GPP FDD UE measurement channel named UEMeasurement DISP TRAC Y SCAL RLEV 10 Set the reference level to 10 dBm FREQ CENT 2 1175 GHz Set the center frequency to 2 1175 GHz TRIG SOUR EXT Set the trigger source to the external trigger TRIGGER IN
137. D DVAL 0001 Change the scrambling code on the analyzer to 0001 default is 0000 TRAC DATA TRACE1 Retrieve the trace data of the code domain power measurement Result 1 000000000 8 000000000 7 700000000E 001 2 991873932E 001 2 861357307E 001 0 000000000 8 000000000 7 800000000E 001 2 892916107E 001 2 762399483E 001 1 000000000 8 000000000 7 800000000E 001 2 856664085E 001 2 726147461E 001 be Deel Table 11 13 Trace results for Relative Code Domain Power measurement correct scrambling code Code class Channel no Abs power level Rel power level Timing offset dBm chips 8 000000000 0 000000000 4 319848537 3 011176586 0 000000000 2 000000000 1 000000000 4 318360806 3 009688854 1 000000000 8 000000000 0 000000000 7 348078156E 7 217211151E 1 000000000 001 001 Table 11 14 Trace results for Relative Code Domain Power measurement incorrect scrambling code Code class Channel no Abs power level Rel power level Timing offset dBm chips 1 000000000 8 000000000 7 700000000E 2 991873932E 2 861357307E 001 001 001 0 000000000 8 000000000 7 800000000E 2 892916107E 2 762399483E 001 001 001 1 000000000 8 000000000 7 800000000E 2 856664085E 2 726147461E 001 001 001 Measurement 4 Triggered Measurement of Relative Code Domain Power RST Reset the instrument INST CRE NEW MWC
138. DD 1 RIGH MTAB see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 230 Results CALCulate n MARKercm X on page 269 CALCulate n MARKercm Y on page 266 Marker Peak List The marker peak list determines the frequencies and levels of peaks in the spectrum or time domain How many peaks are displayed can be defined as well as the sort order In addition the detected peaks can be indicated in the diagram The peak list can also be exported to a file for analysis in an external application User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 41 R amp S FSW K72 K73 Measurements and Result Display 2 Marker Peak List No l Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PEAK see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 230 Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 269 CALCulate n MARKercm Y on page 266 User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 42 4 Measurement Basics Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in 3GPP FDD tests and measurements is provided here for a better understanding of the required configu ration settings Basic principle The basic principle of 3GPP FDD frequency division duplex is that the communication between a base station and several mobile stations is performed in the same fre quency band and in the same time slots The seperation of the data for the different mobile stations is achieved by using CDMA Code Division Multiple Access In this technique channels are distinguished by using different orthogona
139. DP LCOD SEAR Searches the scrambling code that leads to the highest signal power and returns the status of the search Usage Query only Mode BTS application only Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Manual operation See Autosearch for Scrambling Code on page 65 SENSe CDPower LCODe SEARch LIST This command returns the automatic search sequence see SENSe CDPower LCODe SEARch IMMediate on page 163 as a comma separated list of results for each detected scrambling code Return values lt Code1 gt Scrambling code in decimal format Range 16 n with n 0 511 lt Code2 gt Scrambling code in hexadecimal format Range 0x0000h Ox1FFOh where the last digit is always 0 lt CPICHPower gt Highest power value for the corresponding scrambling code Example SENS CDP LCOD SEAR LIST Result 16 0x10 18 04 32 0x20 22 87 48 0x30 27 62 64 0x40 29 46 Explanation in table below Usage Query only Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Scrambling Codes on page 65 Table 11 2 Description of query results in example Code dec Code hex CPICH power dBm 16 0x10 18 04 32 0x20 22 87 48 0x30 27 62 64 0x40 29 46 SENSe CDPower MIMO State Activates or deactivates single antenna MIMO measurement mode Channels that have modulation type MIMO QPSK or MIMO 16QAM are only recog nized as active channels if this setti
140. DPower MS CTABle STATE cccceccececeeeececaeaeaeaeaaeeedececeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeees 211 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle CATalog 2 ccccsceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeneaaaeaeaeaeseeteteneeens 211 CONFigure WCDPowerMS CTABle GCOBY ascia eee sa ade ceevevevarecetesanesevess 211 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DELete iere ettet nnn nean 212 CONFig re WCDPowerMS CTABle SELBel oreet obe te td adadini ini 212 CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle STATe State This command switches the channel table on or off When switched on the measured channel table is stored under the name RECENT and is selected for use After the RECENT channel table is switched on another channel table can be selected with the command CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle SELect on page 210 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CONF WCDP CTAB ON Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Using Predefined Channel Tables on page 98 CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle CATalog This command reads out the names of all channel tables stored on the instrument The first two result values are global values for all channel tables the subsequent values are listed for each individual table Return values lt TotalSize gt Sum of file sizes of all channel table files in bytes lt FreeMem gt Available memory left on hard disk in bytes lt FileName
141. Digital I Q LVDS connection cable or the receiving or transmitting device might be defect not used Digital I Q Input FIFO Overload This bit is set if the sample rate on the connected instrument is higher than the input sam ple rate setting on the R amp S FSW Possible solution e Reduce the sample rate on the connected instrument e Increase the input sample rate setting on the R amp S FSW not used Digital I Q Output Device connected This bit is set if a device is recognized and connected to the Digital I Q Output Digital I Q Output Connection Protocol in progress This bit is set while the connection between analyzer and digital I Q data signal source e g R amp S SMU R amp S Ex I Q Box is established 10 Digital I Q Output Connection Protocol error This bit is set if an error occurred while the connection between analyzer and digital I Q data signal source e g R amp S SMU R amp S Ex I Q Box is established Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Bit No Meaning 11 Digital I Q Output FIFO Overload This bit is set if an overload of the Digital I Q Output FIFO occurred This happens if the output data rate is higher than the maximal data rate of the connected instrument Reduce the sample rate to solve the problem 12 14 not used 15 This bit is always set to 0 STATUS QUEStionable DIQ CONDINON oii iscccsccssuesesecdivwesssssadetevs
142. EF CPIC Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Code Power Display on page 120 Code Domain Analysis Settings UE Measurements Some evaluations provide further settings for the results The commands for UE meas urements are described here Useful commands for Code Domain Analysis described elsewhere CALCulate MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ZOOM on page 224 SENSe CDPower NORMalize on page 224 SENSe CDPower PDISplay on page 225 Remote commands exclusive to Code Domain Analysis in UE Measurements SENSe CDPower ETCHIps eeessssssseeseneneene nennen enne nnns entrent rri rr nnn rhet enns 226 SENSE COP OWES WO Mx R 227 SENSe CDPower ETCHips lt State gt This command selects length of the measurement interval for calculation of error vec tor magnitude EVM In accordance with 3GPP specification Release 5 the EVM measurement interval is one slot 4096 chips minus 25 us 3904 chips at each end of the burst if power changes are expected If no power changes are expected the evalu ation length is one slot 4096 chips Parameters lt State gt ON Changes of power are expected Therefore an EVM measure ment interval of one slot minus 25 us 3904 chips is considered OFF Changes of power are not expected Therefore an EVM mea surement interval of one slot 4096 chips is considered RST OFF Example SENS CDP ETCH ON Manual operation See
143. EQuence IFPower HOLDOofr 2 222 cire cee onere tre eene Fu ianiai 195 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis essere 195 TRIGger SEQuencel EEVelBBPUOWOL tte ott t tate qt b tte ere eter 195 TRIGger SEQuenceJ LEVel EXTernal port cesses 196 TRIGSer SEQuence E EVeldP POWeF cou clare Ete RR E EP gun Pv RE RUD IEE 196 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements TRIGger SEQuenceJ LEVel IQPower eeeesesssssseseeeneneeneneneen enne nnn nnne nnne nnns 196 TRIGger SEQuence EEVeliREPOWOE s etia nexu eerta e Exe eene tnn 197 TRIGger SEQuence LEVelVID amp o iiu iioi eec ei opu easter ieee 197 WRIGGEer SEQuCHCe SLOP m 197 TRIGE SEQUENCE SOURCE e eect ves terraa cea e etse ete dede aa Aa 197 TRIGger SEQu ence TIME RINTetVal 2 acri ha eeabecevevessesveveaaaceieneteneenvenasee 199 TRIGger SEQuence BBPower HOLDoff Period This command defines the holding time before the baseband power trigger event The command requires the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or the Ana log Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 195 command for new remote control programs Parameters Period Range 150 ns to 1000s RST 150 ns Example TRIG SOUR BBP Sets the baseband power trigger source TRIG BBP
144. HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe lt DropoutTime gt Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before a trigger is detected again For input from the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 using the baseband power trigger BBP the default drop out time is set to 100 ns to avoid unintentional trigger events as no hysteresis can be configured in this case Parameters lt DropoutTime gt Dropout time of the trigger Range O sto 10 0s RST 0s Manual operation See Drop Out Time on page 90 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME Offset Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the sweep data cap turing Parameters lt Offset gt RST Os Example TRIG HOLD 500us Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Manual operation See Trigger Offset on page 91 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff Period This command defines the holding time before the next trigger event Note that this command can be used for any trigger source not just IF Power despite the legacy keyword Note If you perform gated measurements in combination with the IF Power trigger the R amp S FSW ignores the holding time for frequency sweep FFT sweep zero span and I Q data measurements Parameters Period Range Os to 10s RST 0s Example TRIG SOUR EXT Sets an external trigger source TRIG IFP
145. IGGER INPUT to the external trigger output on the front panel of the R amp S SMU TRIG OUT1 of PAR DATA Settings on the R amp S SMU 1 oO o ud o a b o9 wm PRESET FREQ 2 1175 GHz LEVEL 0 dBm DIGITAL STD WCDMA 3GPP DIGITAL STD gt Set Default DIGITAL STD gt LINK DIRECTION gt UP REVERSE DIGITAL STD gt TEST MODELS gt DPCCH DPDCH960ksps DIGITAL STD gt Select User Equipment gt UE 1 ON DIGITAL STD gt WCDMA 3GPP gt STATE ON Settings on the R amp S FSW 1 PRESET 2 MODE gt 3GPP FDD UE 3 AMPT gt Reference level 0 dBm 4 FREQ gt Center frequency 2 1175 GHz 5 TRIG gt External Trigger 1 6 MEAS CONFIG gt Display Config gt Peak Code Domain Error Window 2 7 AMPT gt Scale Config gt Auto Scale Once Results The following is displayed R amp S9FSW K72 K73 Measurement Examples e Window 1 Code domain power of signal branch Q e Window 2 Peak code domain error projection of error onto the class with spread ing factor 256 MultiView Spectrum 3G FDD UE Ref Level 0 00dBm Freq 2 1175 GHz Channel 0 Power Re Att dB Slot O Capture Frame TRG EXT1 2 Code Domain Power cho 1 Peak Code Domain Error Fig 10 8 Measurement Example 6 Determining the Peak Code Domain Error User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 149 Introduction 11 Remote Commands for 3GPP FDD Meas urements The following commands are required to perform measurements
146. INDow on page 230 CALC MARK FUNC WCDP RES CDP see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion WCDPower BTS RESult on page 243 CALC MARK FUNC WCDP MS RES CDP see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion WCDPower MS RESult on page 245 TRACe lt n gt DATA CTABle TRACe lt n gt DATA PWCDp TRACe lt n gt DATA CWCDp Code Domain Error Power Code Domain Error Power is the difference in power between the measured and the ideal signal The unit is dB There are no other units for the y axis 1 Code Domain Error Power Fig 3 4 Code Domain Error Power Display for 3GPP FDD BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CDEPower See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 230 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE 1 4 Composite Constellation The Composite Constellation evaluation analyzes the entire signal for one single slot If a large number of channels is to be analyzed the results are superimposed In that case the benefit of this evaluation is limited senseless In Composite Constellation evaluation the constellation points of the 1536 chips are displayed for the specified slot This data is determined inside the DSP even before the channel search Thus it is not possible to assign constellation points to channels The constellation points are displayed normalized with respect to the total power User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 22 R amp S FSW K72 K73 Measurements and Result Display 3 Co
147. ITiate IMMediate this command does not reset traces in maxhold minhold or average mode Therefore it can be used to continue measure ments using maxhold or averaging functions Manual operation See Continue Single Sweep on page 106 INITiate CONTinuous State This command controls the sweep mode Note that in single sweep mode you can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous sweep mode synchronization to the end of the measurement is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous sweep mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a single sweep end synchronization For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual If the sweep mode is changed for a measurement channel while the Sequencer is active see 1NITiate SEQuencer IMMediate on page 240 the mode is only con sidered the next time the measurement in that channel is activated by the Sequencer Starting a Measurement Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 Continuous sweep OFF 0 Single sweep RST 1 Example INIT CONT OFF Switches the sweep mode to single sweep INIT CONT ON Switches the sweep mode to continuous sweep Manual operation See Continuous Sweep RUN CONT on page 106 INITiate IMMediate This command starts a single new measurement With sweep count or average count gt 0 this means a r
148. MEASurement on page 160 Querying results CALC MARK FUNC POW RES CPOW see CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESult on page 264 CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP see CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESul1t on page 264 RF Combi This measurement combines the following measurements e Ch Power ACLR on page 36 e Occupied Bandwidth on page 36 e Spectrum Emission Mask on page 38 The ACLR and OBW are measured on trace 1 from which the SEM trace 2 is derived via integration The advantage of the RF COMBI measurement is that all RF results are measured with a single measurement process This measurement is faster than the three individ ual measurements R amp S FSW K72 K73 Measurements and Result Display MultiView Spectrum 3G FDD BTS Ref Level 0 00 dBm Att 10 dB SWT 100 ms 1 CF 1 0 GHz 1251 pts 2 55 MHz Span 25 5 MHz 2 Channel Power W CDMA SGPP FWD MILII Bandwidth Offset Power 40 MHz 11 00 dBm 11 00 dBm Channel Bandwidth Offset Lower Upper 3 840 5 000 MH Adj N 61 12 dB 64 64 dB dis 40 MHz 1 MH 61 77 dB 65 85 dB Fig 3 22 RF Combi measurement results Remote command CONF WCDP BTS MI on page 160 Querying results CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACPCALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWercsb RESult on page 264 t3 AS RFC see CONFigure WCDPower BTS MEASurement CALC MARK FUNC POW RES OBW CALC MARK FUNC POW RES CPOW CAL
149. MS CTABIe COMMSernl 2 rire erit trier entere P e pa ea nga 214 CONFigure WCDPowerMS CTABIe GOBY 1 etin oti rette Re epar uno nena S ELE cre bd KO RES ER ERE be TiS 211 GONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA oreet terrent tte nth rn rr nino ER ko ao ENN 216 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA HSDPZcch essere nenne enne neret neret nnne 217 GONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DELete 5 5 treinta terii Fi nont Fe eb epe re Pa rk NER n 212 GONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle EDATa 2 rnt toon tenni rni rr n khe ER Ires 217 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABIe EDATa EDPOGOo erre tnnt nb eene tere tnr eran 217 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABIe NAME CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle SELect CGONFigure WCDPower MS CTABIe STATe irin tetto eot a 211 GONFigure WCDPower MS MEASurertrient ucciso te ennt ona rein hl sper E Ck ko Ee e KE RE rea Ra RARE Re 161 GONFigure WCDPower BTS ASCale STATe n rennen nn toni tents 219 GONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle GCATaloQf ent treten nett eret 209 CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle COMMSent cineasta sette nhanh tn aa thea anna insta aaa 213 CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle COMPare GONFigure WCDPower BTS GTABle GODBNY ttti ere rentre nen xr rrt nne rh rn an CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle DATA essent nnnm rennen nennt rennen erstes enne GONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABIe DEbLete 2 rnnt eere rer nn tient
150. Mu eie de RBRUM 129 Search Next Peak Sets the selected marker delta marker to the next lower maximum of the assigned trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum NEXT on page 273 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum NEXT on page 275 Markers Search Next Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the next higher minimum of the selected trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 274 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum NEXT on page 276 Peak Search Sets the selected marker delta marker to the maximum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK on page 273 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK on page 275 Search Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the minimum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum PEAK on page 274 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum PEAK on page 276 Marker To CPICH Sets the marker to the CPICH channel Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CPICh on page 272 Marker To PCCPCH Sets the marker to the PCCPCH channel Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion PCCPch on page 273 T Import Export Functions Q Data Imp
151. N OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP EATT AUTO OFF Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 on page 81 INPut EATT STATe lt State gt This command turns the electronic attenuator on and off This command is only available with option R amp S FSW B25 It is not available if R amp S FSW B17 is active Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP EATT STAT ON Switches the electronic attenuator into the signal path Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 on page 81 Configuring Triggered Measurements The following commands are required to configure a triggered measurement in a remote environment The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 5 2 6 Trigger Settings on page 87 The OPC command should be used after commands that retrieve data so that subse quent commands to change the selected trigger source are held off until after the sweep is completed and the data has been returned e Configuring the Triggering Conditions 193 e Configuring the Trigger ODUIpUL ida oiri Ln ee Latet ribs 199 Configuring the Triggering Conditions TRIGger SEQuence BBPowerdHOLEBoff 1 ertt tette Rr tra Roni trina anas 194 TRIiGger SEQuence DTIME cecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ease eae aeeaeaeaeaaaaaaaaaaaeaeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeeeees 194 TRiGger SEQuence AOLDON ANIME eaves corta ute canoe tta ebat e ore tutte ete 194 TRIGger S
152. NFigure DURation MODE Mode In order to determine the ideal reference level the R amp S FSW performs a measurement on the current input data This command selects the way the R amp S FSW determines the length of the measurement Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Parameters Mode AUTO The R amp S FSW determines the measurement length automati cally according to the current input data MANual The R amp S FSW uses the measurement length defined by SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation on page 220 RST AUTO Manual operation See Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto on page 109 See Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 109 SENSe JADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer Threshold When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 222 command the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last measurement before the reference level is adapted auto matically Parameters Threshold Range O dB to 200 dB RST 1dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST LOW 2 For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal lev
153. NSe FREQuency CENTer lt Frequency gt This command defines the center frequency Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Parameters Frequency The allowed range and fmax is specified in the data sheet UP Increases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command DOWN Decreases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command RST fmax 2 Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Center Frequency on page 73 See Center frequency on page 86 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP lt StepSize gt This command defines the center frequency step size You can increase or decrease the center frequency quickly in fixed steps using the SENS FREQ UP AND SENS FREQ DOWN commands see SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 186 Parameters lt StepSize gt fmax iS specified in the data sheet Range 1 to fMAX RST 0 1 x span Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 86 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO State This command couples or decouples the center frequency step
154. POWSLE 2 ttt rr retener era enr rtt ra eer enr ne e P tt ra an TRIGger SEQuence LEVel l QPower TRIGger SEQuence P EVel RE ROWS 2i oett oi eren et etn eie meat dec RE ERR HE FR ERE ERR dr tae delenved TRIGger SEQuence DEVel VID6O nit err tt eren ci rere rr rh enr er eire rre rion TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernalsport rto tnr tren rrr 196 TRIGger SEQuenceLl SEOPS uiros Tete encre tn deo essa ten EM CAE RECEN Dr a c Pone da 197 TRIGger SEQuence SOURCe iternm rere etinm trae enne rrr i cerea aeri aeos 197 TRIGger SEQuence TIME RINTerVal 2 epist N etx eens nep reed einen esee Rd mE ingens 199 Index Symbols 3GPP FDD BASICS asc 43 Measurement examples eene 137 MeaSUIemelllSi oso epo notte ert ci tacitae rete c Eoo Ende 15 Programming examples 285 Remote control x150 ISFimessutremienllS oes cocci rne OEE OE 35 A Aborting E Pm M 106 AC DC COUPIING orco a t ee he 68 ACLR 3GPP FDD results Configuration SGPP FDD Results remote e RF COMB kssr err eter dre reti tei etes Activating 3GPP FDD measurements remote 156 Active probe MICKODUTON oe 74 Adjacent channel leakage ratio See ACER 1 2 erret terr aes 36 Amplitude Analog Baseband Interface B71 settings 82 Configuration remote
155. PUT connector on the front panel LAY REPL 2 XTIM CDP MACC Replace the second measurement window Result Summary by Composite EVM evaluation DISP WIND2 TRAC Y SCAL AUTO ONCE Optimize the scaling of the y axis for the Composite EVM measurement INIT CONT OFF Stops continuous sweep SWE COUN 100 Set the number of sweeps to be performed to 100 INIT WAI Start a new measurement with 100 sweeps and wait for the end TRAC2 DATA TRACE1 11 15 6 Programming Examples R amp S FSW K73 Retrieve the trace data of the composite EVM measurement Result 0 000000000 5 876136422E 001 1 000000000 5 916179419E 001 2 000000000 5 949081182E 001 LE Es Table 11 15 Trace results for Composite EVM measurement CPICH Slot number EVM 0 5 876136422E 001 1 5 916179419E 001 2 5 949081182E 001 Measurement 6 Determining the Peak Code Domain Error RST Reset the instrument INST CRE NEW MWCD UEMeasurement Activate a 3GPP FDD UE measurement channel named UEMeasurement DISP TRAC Y SCAL RLEV 10 Set the reference level to 10 dBm FREQ CENT 2 1175 GHz Set the center frequency to 2 1175 GHz TRIG SOUR EXT Set the trigger source to the external trigger TRIGGER INPUT connector on the front panel LAY REPL 2 XTIM CDP ERR PCD Replace the second measurement window Result Summary by the Peak Code Domain Error evaluation DISP WIND2 TRAC Y SCAL AUTO ONCE
156. Power SYM SPERror Symbol Phase Error Bol EVM PHASe Use SENS CDP PDIS ABS REL subsequently to change the scaling SENSe CDPower LEVel ADJust This command adjusts the reference level to the measured channel power This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FSW or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small Note that this command is retained for compatibility reasons only For new R amp S FSW programs use SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 222 SENSe CDPower PRESet This command resets the 3GPP FDD channel to its predefined settings Any RF mea surement is aborted and the measurement type is reset to Code Domain Analysis Note that this command is retained for compatibility reasons only For new R amp S FSW programs use SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute on page 159 Usage Event SENSe CDPower UCPich CODE lt CodeNumber gt This command sets the code number of the user defined CPICH used for signal analy sis This command only applies to antenna 1 Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use SENSe CDPower UCPich ANT antenna CODE on page 203 for new remote control pro grams Parameters lt CodeNumber gt Range 0 to 225 RST 0 Example SENS CDP UCP CODE 10 Mode BTS application only 11 15 Programming E
157. R amp S FSW K72 K73 3GPP FDD Measurements Options User Manual r h Br Ch SF Tris Buren 3 dBm de State Mod Sum 3 Type k os 1173 9305 02 12 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Test amp Measurement User Manual This manual applies to the following R amp S9FSW models with firmware version 2 00 and higher e R amp S9 FSWS 1312 8000K08 e R amp S FSW13 1312 8000K13 e R amp S FSW26 1312 8000K26 e R amp S FSW43 1312 8000K43 e R amp S FSW50 1312 8000K50 e R amp S FSW67 1312 8000K67 The following firmware options are described R amp S FSW K72 1313 1422 02 e R amp S FSW K73 1313 1439 02 The firmware of the instrument makes use of several valuable open source software packages For information see the Open Source Acknowledgement on the user documentation CD ROM included in delivery Rohde amp Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing 2014 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 81671 M nchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S9FSW is abbreviated as R amp S FSW
158. RIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 197 External Trigger 1 2 3 Trigger Source Trigger Source Data acquisition starts when the TTL signal fed into the specified input connector on the front or rear panel meets or exceeds the specified trigger level See Trigger Level on page 90 Note The External Trigger 1 softkey automatically selects the trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector on the front panel For details see the Instrument Tour chapter in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual External Trigger 1 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector on the front panel External Trigger 2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Note Connector must be configured for Input in the Outputs con figuration see Trigger 2 3 on page 75 External Trigger 3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Note Connector must be configured for Input in the Outputs con figuration see Trigger 2 3 on page 75 Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG SOUR EXT2 TRIG SOUR EXT3 See TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 197 Digital I Q Trigger Source Trigger Source For applications that process I Q data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applica tions and only if the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is available Defines triggering of the measurement directly via the LVDS connector In th
159. RT Master not for the applications You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 109 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 222 RF Attenuation Defines the attenuation applied to the RF input This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 R amp S9FSW K72 K73 Configuration Attenuation Mode Value RF Attenuation The RF attenuation can be set automatically as a function of the selected reference level Auto mode This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used It is the default setting By default and when Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 is not available mechanical attenuation is applied This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 In Manual mode you can set the RF attenuation in 1 dB steps down to 0 dB also using the rotary knob Other entries are rounded to the next integer value The range is specified in the data sheet If the defined reference level cannot be set for the defined RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed NOTICE Risk of hardware damage due to high power levels When decreasing the attenuation manually ensure that the power level does not exceed the maximum level allowed at the RF input as an overload
160. SEI ETUR 33 Results remote control ssssssees 243 Tail chips Eliminating rm reete 122 Test models Time Alignment Error see TAE Timing offset CONTIGUO terere rtr e 103 cual E 99 Traces Configuration remote esses 267 Configuration softkey srein 123 Exporting emote caede tmt es 261 Mode 123 Mode remote ree 267 Results remote 2 ice ieina 253 Trigger Configuration remote eseseseeseee 193 Configuration softkey Drop out time 90 External remote 197 HONDO ere 91 Hysteresis ioter tente Von rrr RR rta 91 Level 2 Measurement example sse 144 OffSeb SOflKGy crede boot oet etenim 91 OUIDUEL cerit eet 75 91 Programming example cr ente enia 290 SIODO ciini ets 91 197 NOUMAM Ci sciri Hie c psc rede o pter e pier ecd 16 Trigger level External trigger remote ianiai 196 l Q Power remote rfe 196 IF Power remote osiinsa 196 RF Power Femole 2e trt eatem 197 Trigger source 88 Digital 1 Q 89 External n89 Free RUN yrii ecrit emeret oce E R ates 89 IF POWO in eiie ite e toe eee e teri AR 90 Troubleshooting Inputoverloadi entrer nen 167 Type Seramblitig codes UE 2 acit ternis 67 U UE User equipment eeeenee 11 Uni
161. STATe ite Fea aec rta ttt rentas ce nete gene eedem aaia 182 TRACHI AFCON T 182 TRA O AP COM Be Mm 182 Diz euer icstordzictzU ram 183 INPut IQ BALanced STATe State This command defines whether the input is provided as a differential signal via all 4 Analog Baseband connectors or as a plain I Q signal via 2 simple ended lines Parameters State ON Differential OFF Simple ended RST ON Example INP IQ BAL OFF Manual operation See Input configuration on page 73 INPut IQ FULLscale AUTO State This command defines whether the full scale level i e the maximum input power on the Baseband Input connector is defined automatically according to the reference level or manually Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Parameters State Example Manual operation ON Automatic definition OFF Manual definition according to 1NPut 10 FULLscale LEVel on page 180 RST ON INP IO FULL AUTO OFF See Full Scale Level Mode Value on page 84 INPut IQ FULLscale LEVel lt PeakVoltage gt This command defines the peak voltage at the Baseband Input connector if the full scale level is set to manual mode see 1NPut 10 FULLscale AUTO on page 179 Parameters lt PeakVoltage gt Example Manual operation 0 25 V 05 V 1V 2V Peak voltage level at the connector For probes the possible full scale values are adapted acc
162. See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 127 See Search Next Minimum on page 129 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 127 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 129 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion CPICh This command sets the delta marker to channel 0 This command is only available in Code Domain Power and Code Domain Error Power evaluations Example CALC DELT2 FUNC CPIC CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion PCCPch This command sets the delta marker to the position of the PCCPCH Analysis This command is only available in code domain power and code domain error power evaluations Example CALC DELT2 FUNC PCCP CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 127 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves
163. Station Tests Table 4 11 Test model 4 Channel type Number of chan Power Level dB Spreading code Timing offset nels 96 16 32 x256Tchip 16 32 PCCPCH SCH 1 50 to 1 6 3 to 18 1 0 Primary CPICH 1 10 10 0 0 Table 4 12 Test model 5 Channel type Number of Power Level Spreading Timing offset channels dB code x256Tchip PCCPCH SCH 1 7 9 11 1 0 Primary CPICH 1 7 9 11 0 0 PICH 1 13 19 16 120 SCCPCH SF 256 1 1 3 19 3 0 DPCH SF 256 30 14 6 14 14 2 14 4 total see TS seeTS see TS 25 141 25 141 25 141 HS_SCCH 2 4 total see TS seeTS see TS 25 141 25 141 25 141 HS_PDSCH 8 4 2 63 6 63 4 63 2 total see TS see TS see TS 25 141 16QAM 25 141 25 141 Setup for Base Station Tests This section describes how to set up the analyzer for 3GPP FDD BTS tests As a pre requisite for starting the test the instrument must be correctly set up and connected to the AC power supply as described in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Further more the 3GPP FDD BTS application must be available Standard Test Setup e Connect the antenna output or Tx output of the BTS to the RF input of the ana lyzer via a power attenuator of suitable attenuation The following values are recommended for the external attenuator to ensure that the RF input of the analyzer is protected and the sensitivity of the analyzer is not reduced too much
164. T OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a new data measurement and waits for the end of the sweep INIT SEQ REFR Refreshes the display for all channels Usage Event SYSTem SEQuencer State This command turns the Sequencer on and off The Sequencer must be active before any other Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are executed otherwise an error will occur A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 The Sequencer is activated and a sequential measurement is started immediately OFF 0 The Sequencer is deactivated Any running sequential measure ments are stopped Further Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are not available RST 0 Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single Sequencer mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements SYST SEQ OFF Retrieving Results 11 9 Retrieving Results 11 9 1 The following commands are required to retrieve the results from a 3GPP FDD mea surement in a remote environment When the channel type is required as a parameter by a remote command or provided as a result for a remote query abbreviations or assignments to a numeric value are used as described in chapter 11 5 7 Channel Detection on page 205 Specific commands e
165. TT STATe on page 193 INPut EATT AUTO on page 192 INPut EATT on page 192 Input Settings Some input settings affect the measured amplitude of the signal as well User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 81 5 2 5 2 Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements The parameters Input Coupling and Impedance are identical to those in the Input settings see chapter 5 2 4 1 Input Source Settings on page 67 Preamplifier option B24 Input Settings If option R amp S FSW B24 is installed a preamplifier can be activated for the RF input signal You can use a preamplifier to analyze signals from DUTs with low input power This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 For R amp S FSW 26 or higher models the input signal is amplified by 30 dB if the pream plifier is activated For R amp S FSW 8 or 13 models the following settings are available Off Deactivates the preamplifier 15 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 15 dB 30 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 30 dB Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 190 INPut GAIN VALue on page 191 Amplitude Settings for Analog Baseband Input The following settings and functions are available to define amplitude settings for input via the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 in the applications that support it They can be configured via the AMPT key or in the Amplitude
166. TUs QUEStionable SYNG EVENIt i Etre etr eet erect repete o 281 SYSTem PRESSECHANnel EXECU te icri FP edet ra eben mare te tec E HE Sr dL ke OG oe AE tend 159 ib XIIe 242 TRACGAQAPCON p 182 TIRAG61QsAP CON i E 182 TRAGe IQ APCODIRESUIE ctii erp eer erc ec gee enn ina dope EE cU e DE A MCI ERE 183 TRACe IQ APCon STATe ns Bie BAD 254 Mise ir V 255 TRACE SAF EDA TAO uit Etre c tenet rv t erbe ceto ue eU Pere ger CM aad 256 Be IDATA esinin naaa aa a E a a ia a aE AA E 257 disse IPC nae ti A TS E anaes E YE AE EA ES KOTTEN FEE 257 TRACE SAF E DATA uit Etre rere eet rer geb cet deo usce LU verd ee EROR te e pte deed 258 TIRAG IPAE 259 TRAGeSn DATA rC 259 TRACE SAF EDA rr E M 260 TIRAG IBN 261 TRIGger SEQuence BBPower HOLDoff n TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe otrn rn ttp e toner teen ob er na t rrr r E EE Sex eas TRIGger SEQuence HODBboffE TIME a etti eie bat a nep nrbi Ci Eee prete tint Menden TRIGger SEQuence 1F Power HOLDBDoft rint rrr mre nr n rrr rie rrr net ro cina TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYS Teresi Sissis nri rr rper hr nnt ree in 195 TRIGger SEQuence EVebLBBPOWOTE ssi A ert ent p esa io Penn dr erk i tun n a TRIGger SEQuence P EVel IE
167. Used port Remote command OUTPut DIQ CDEVice on page 174 Frontend Settings Frequency amplitude and y axis scaling settings represent the frontend of the mea surement setup e Amplitude Settings ssssssssssssssessesseenee nennen nennen nnn nennen nnns nnns 78 e Amplitude Settings for Analog Baseband Input esses 82 WAS Oli cried ree eiae a tu epe don evi pe t vp dor ovre ead 84 e Prouenn Selullgj ter nre reet terr due pex tacere UU de Rz A ducere icd au cU exu 85 Amplitude Settings Amplitude settings determine how the R amp S FSW must process or display the expected input power levels Amplitude settings for input from the Analog Baseband interface R amp S FSW B71 are described in chapter 5 2 5 2 Amplitude Settings for Analog Baseband Input on page 82 Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements To configure the amplitude settings Amplitude settings can be configured via the AMPT key or in the Amplitude dialog box gt To display the Amplitude dialog box do one of the following e Select Input Frontend from the Overview and then switch to the Amplitude tab e Select the AMPT key and then the Amplitude Config softkey Amplitude Reference Level Input Settings p g Value 0 0 dBm Preamplifier Offset 0 0 dB Input Coupling Unit Bend Impedance Mechanical Attenuation Electronic Attenuation State Mode Mode
168. a marker to the next higher value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 127 See Search Next Peak on page 128 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 129 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 127 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event 11 11 Importing and Exporting I Q Data and Results Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 127 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher minimum value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 127 See Search Next Minimum on page 129 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event
169. ai 165 SENSe CDPower L CODe VALue esses nnnetrn rrr hinh nn sinere 166 SENSe CDPower LCODe DVALue lt ScramblingCode gt This command defines the scrambling code in decimal format Parameters ScramblingCode lt numeric value RST 0 Example SENS CDP LCOD DVAL 3 Defines the scrambling code in decimal format 11 5 1 3 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Manual operation See Scrambling Code on page 65 See Format Hex Dec on page 65 See Format on page 67 SENSe CDPower LCODe VALue lt ScramblingCode gt This command defines the scrambling code in hexadecimal format Parameters lt ScramblingCode gt Range HO to H1fff RST HO Example SENS CDP LCOD H2 Defines the scrambling code in hexadecimal format Manual operation See Format Hex Dec on page 65 See Scrambling Code on page 66 UE Signal Description The following commands describe the input signal in UE measurements Useful commands for describing UE signals described elsewhere SENSe CDPower LCODe VALue on page 166 SENSe CDPower HSDPamode on page 163 Remote commands exclusive to describing UE signals SENSeJODPowerECODeTYDBE d reuera iter eap EEEa 166 ISENSe COPOWEMOR SK Dm 166 SENSeJTCDPOWeRSEADIOE italie ra ectetuer aen ea cente redd eR e ERR RE RR 167 SENSe CDPower LCODe TYPE Type This command switches between long and short scrambling code
170. al value negative symbol magnitude errors indicate a symbol magnitude that is less than the ideal one The symbol magnitude error is the difference between the magnitude of the received symbol and that of the reference symbol rela ted to the magnitude of the reference symbol 1 Symbol Magnitude Error Symb 0 2 Symb Symb 19 Fig 3 18 Symbol Magnitude Error display for 3GPP FDD BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH SMERror see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 230 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE 1 4 Symbol Phase Error The Symbol Phase Error is calculated analogous to symbol EVM The result is one symbol phase error value for each symbol of the slot of a special channel Positive val ues of symbol phase error indicate a symbol phase that is larger than the expected ideal value negative symbol phase errors indicate a symbol phase that is less than the ideal one 1 Symbol Phase Error Symb 0 2Symb Symb 19 Fig 3 19 Symbol Phase Error display for 3GPP FDD BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH SPERror see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 230 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE 1 4 Se ae User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 32 Time Alignment Error Measurements 3 1 3 CDA Measurements in MSRA Operating Mode The 3GPP FDD BTS application can also be used to analyze data in MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master actually captures data the MSRA applications receive an
171. ambling code Invert Q values are set incorrectly or the input signal is invalid Sync OK This message is displayed if synchronization is possible Incorrect pilot symbols This message is displayed if one or more of the received pilot symbols are not equal to the specified pilot symbols of the 3GPP standard Possible causes are e Incorrectly sent pilot symbols in the received frame e Low signal to noise ratio SNR of the W CDMA signal e Oneor more code channels have a significantly lower power level compared to the total power The incorrect pilots are detected in these channels because of low channel SNR e One or more channels are sent with high power ramping In slots with low relative power to total power the pilot symbols might be detected incorrectly check the signal quality by using the symbol constellation display 9 How to Perform Measurements in 3GPP FDD Applications The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to perform measurements with the 3GPP FDD applications To perform Code Domain Analysis 1 Press the MODE key on the front panel and select the 3GPP FDD BTS applica tions for base station tests or SGPP FDD UE for user equipment tests Code Domain Analysis of the input signal is performed by default 2 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for Code Domain Analysis 3 Select the Signal Description button and configure the expected input signal and used
172. amples in the I Q data binary file see DataFilename element and chapter 12 2 I Q Data Binary File on page 298 The following data types are allowed e int8 8bit signed integer data int16 16 bit signed integer data int32 32 bit signed integer data float32 32 bit floating point data IEEE 754 float64 64 bit floating point data IEEE 754 ScalingFactor Optional describes how the binary data can be transformed into values in the unit Volt The binary I Q data itself has no unit To get an I Q sample in the unit Volt the saved samples have to be multiplied by the value of the ScalingFactor For polar data only the magnitude value has to be multiplied For multi channel signals the ScalingFactor must be applied to all channels The attribute unit must be set to v The ScalingFactor must be gt 0 If the ScalingFactor element is not defined a value of 1 V is assumed NumberOfChan nels Optional specifies the number of channels e g of a MIMO signal contained in the I Q data binary file For multi channels the I Q samples of the channels are expected to be interleaved within the I Q data file see chapter 12 2 I Q Data Binary File on page 298 If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is assumed DataFilename Contains the filename of the I Q data binary file that is part of the iq tar file It is recommended that the filename uses the following convention lt xyz gt lt Format gt
173. an power calculation of reference signal 1 EVM vs Chip 256 Chip Chip 2559 Fig 3 7 EVM vs Chip display for 3GPP FDD BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH EVMChip see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 230 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE 1 4 Frequency Error vs Slot For each value to be displayed the difference between the frequency error of the cor responding slot to the frequency error of the first zero slot is calculated based on CPICH slots This helps eliminate a static frequency offset of the whole signal to ach ieve a better display of the actual time dependant frequency diagram 1 Frequency Error vs Slot Slot 0 Fig 3 8 Frequency Error vs Slot display for 3GPP FDD BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH FESLot see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 230 TRACe lt n gt DATA ATRACE Mag Error vs Chip Mag Error vs Chip activates the Magnitude Error versus chip display The magnitude error is displayed for all chips of the selected slot Note In UE measurements if the measurement interval Halfslot is selected for eval uation 30 slots are displayed instead of the usual 15 see Measurement Interval on page 122 User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 25 R amp S FSW K72 K73 Measurements and Result Display The magnitude error is calculated as the difference of the magnitude of the received signal to the magnitude of the reference signal The reference signal is estimat
174. and OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 200 Level Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 200 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger cport PULSe LENGth on page 201 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent 5 2 7 Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate on page 200 Signal Capture Data Acquisition How much and how data is captured from the input signal are defined in the Signal Capture settings Signal Capture Common Settings Sample Rate Invert Q RRC Filter State Frame Capture Settings Analysis Mode Frame Capture Length Frames Frame To Analyze MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master channel actually captures data from the input signal Th
175. and Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values lt PartNumber gt Part number in a string Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt ID SRNumber Queries the serial number of the probe Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Suffix p 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values lt SerialNo gt Serial number in a string Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup MODE lt Mode gt Select the action that is started with the micro button on the probe head See also Microbutton Action on page 74 Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input I 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Parameters Mode RSINgle Run single starts one data acquisition NOACtion Nothing is started on pressing the micro button RST RSINgle Manual operation See Microbutton Action on page 74 SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup NAME Queries the name of the probe Suffix lt p gt 1 2 3 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values Name Na
176. annelization code of HS DPCCH Nmax dpdch as defined in subclause 4 2 1 Channelization code C 1 Cn 256 64 2 4 6 Con 256 1 3 5 Cc 256 32 4 7 Setup for User Equipment Tests This section describes how to set up the analyzer for 3GPP FDD UE user equipment tests As a prerequisite for starting the test the instrument must be correctly set up and connected to the AC power supply as described in the R amp S FSW Getting Started man ual Furthermore the 3GPP FDD UE application must be properly installed following the instructions provided in the operating manual for the analyzer Standard Test Setup e Connect antenna output or Tx output of UE to RF input of the analyzer via a power attenuator of suitable attenuation User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 54 CDA Measurements in MSRA Operating Mode The following values are recommended for the external attenuator to ensure that the RF input of the analyzer is protected and the sensitivity of the analyzer is not reduced too much Max power Recommended ext attenuation 355 to 60 dBm 35 to 40 dB 350 to 55 dBm 30 to 35 dB 345 to 50 dBm 25 to 30 dB 340 to 45 dBm 20 to 25 dB 335 to 40 dBm 15 to 20 dB 330 to 35 dBm 10 to 15 dB 325 to 30 dBm 5 to 10 dB 320 to 25 dBm 0 to 5 dB lt 20 dBm 0 dB For signal measurements at the output of two port networks connect the reference frequency of the signal source to the external referen
177. ansmitted to operate the mobile station in HSDPA mode Thus the 3GPP FDD UE application checks for these channel configurations only during the automatic channel search Therefore channels whose parameters do not correspond to one of these configurations are not automatically detected as active channels The two possible channel configurations are summarized below Table 4 13 Channel configuration 1 DPCCH and 1 DPDCH Channel type Number of chan Symbol rate Spreading Mapping nels code s DPCCH 1 15 ksps 0 Q DPDCH 1 15 ksps 960 spreading l ksps factor 4 R amp S9FSW K72 K73 Measurement Basics Table 4 14 Channel configuration 2 DPCCH and up to 6 DPDCH Channel type Number of channels Symbol rate Spreading code s Mapping DPCCH 1 15 ksps 0 Q DPDCH 1 960 ksps 1 DPDCH 1 960 ksps 1 Q DPDCH 1 960 ksps 3 DPDCH 1 960 ksps 3 Q DPDCH 1 960 ksps 2 DPDCH 1 960 ksps 2 Q Table 4 15 Channel configuration 3 DPCCH up to 6 DPDCH and 1 HS DPCCH The channel configu ration is as above in table 4 2 On HS DPCCH is added to each channel table Number of Symbol rate all DPDCH Symbol rate Spreading code Mapping HS DPCCH DPDCH HS DPCCH HS DPCCH 1 15 960 ksps 15 ksps 64 Q 2 1920 ksps 15 ksps 1 l 3 2880 ksps 15 ksps 32 Q 4 3840 ksps 15 ksps 1 l 5 4800 ksps 15 ksps 32 Q 6 5760 ksps 15 ksps 1 l Table 4 16 Ch
178. anual 2 2 Understanding the Display Information The following figure shows a measurement diagram during a 3GPP FDD BTS mea surement All different information areas are labeled They are explained in more detail in the following sections The basic screen elements are identical for 3GPP FDD UE measurements R amp S9FSW K72 K73 Welcome to the 3GPP FDD Applications MultiView Spectrum 3G FDD BTS Ref Level 0 00 Freq 1 0GHz Channel 0 256 Power Att CPICH Slot SymbRate 1 Code Domain Pc amp or 2 Resu nmary General Results Frame 0 CPICH Slot 0 ChannerResults CH 0 256 1 Channel bar for firmware and measurement settings 2 3 Window title bar with diagram specific trace information 4 Diagram area 5 Diagram footer with diagram specific information 6 Instrument status bar with error messages progress bar and date time display MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode additional tabs and elements are available A colored back ground of the screen behind the measurement channel tabs indicates that you are in MSRA operating mode For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual Channel bar information In 3GPP FDD applications when performing Code Domain Analysis the R amp S FSW screen display deviates from the Spectrum application For RF measurements the familiar settings are displayed see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Table 2 1 Hardware settings
179. arts a new sweep and waits for its end CALC LIM3 FAIL Queries the result of the check for limit line 3 Usage Query only SCPI confirmed Retrieving Results Manual operation See RF Combi on page 37 See Spectrum Emission Mask on page 38 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESult Measurement This command queries the results of power measurements To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INITiate CONTinuous on page 239 Suffix sb 1 2 3 Sub block in a Multi SEM measurement for all other measure ments irrelevant Retrieving Results Query parameters Measurement ACPower MCACpower ACLR measurements also known as adjacent channel power or multicarrier adjacent channel measurements Returns the power for every active transmission and adjacent channel The order is power of the transmission channels power of adjacent channel lower upper power of alternate channels lower upper MSR ACLR results For MSR ACLR measurements the order of the returned results is slightly different power of the transmission channels total power of the transmission channels for each sub block power of adjacent channels lower upper power of alternate channels lower upper power of gap channels lower1 upper1 lower2 upper2 The unit of the r
180. asacivansvanccdeccenenessestivedvwnceduoncins 130 Import Export FUNCONS w5cc0c cis cccscsscsccdescdcceccvesdsseassaseeesecesccndecsebsecansaeevencereasavarccncsese 130 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement 132 Error Messages EO ent tete naive ttr ENRILE EESE 132 How to Perform Measurements in 3GPP FDD Applications 133 Measurement Examples eeeeeeeeeeeeee rere 137 Measurement 1 Measuring the Signal Channel Power eene 137 Measurement 2 Determining the Spectrum Emission Mask 138 Measurement 3 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power 140 Measurement 4 Triggered Measurement of Relative Code Domain Power 144 Measurement 5 Measuring the Composite EVM eee 146 Measurement 6 Determining the Peak Code Domain Error 147 Remote Commands for 3GPP FDD Measurements 150 Introduction etre beret TS 150 Common SUNT CI Ime 155 Activating 3GPP FDD Measurements eese 156 Selecting a Measurement eese nnne nennen nennen nnn nennt nnn nnns 160 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements nn 162 Configuring RF Measurements eene nnne nnne nnn nnn niens 227 Configuring the Result Display eeeeeeeeeene
181. at times all channels are dis played in blue with almost the same level e Above a frequency error of approx 2 kHz a CDP measurement cannot be per formed The R amp S FSW displays all possible codes in blue with a similar level 3 Resetthe frequency to 2 1175 GHz both on the R amp S SMU and on the R amp S FSW R amp S9FSW K72 K73 Measurement Examples pee M M M M aes MultiView Spectrum 3G FDD UE Ref Level 10 00 daem Freq 2 1175 GHz Channel 0 256 Q Power Relative Att 20 dB 1 Code Domain Power Slot O Capture Frame cho 2 Result Summary r ilts Frame 0 Slot 0 an esults Ch 0 256 Fig 10 4 Measurement Example 3 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power with Incorrect Center Frequency 10 3 3 Behaviour with Incorrect Scrambling Code A valid CDP measurement can be carried out only if the scrambling code set on the R amp S FSW is identical to that of the transmitted signal Settings on the R amp S SMU e SCRAMBLING CODE 0000 Settings on the R amp S FSW e Meas Config gt Signal Description gt Scrambling Code 0001 Result The CDP display shows all possible codes with approximately the same level SSS eS a a User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 143 R amp S9FSW K72 K73 Measurement Examples 10 4 MultiView Spectrum 3G FDD UE Ref Level 10 00 dam Freq 2 1175 GHz Channel 0 256 Q Power Relative Att 20 dt Slot O Capture Frame 1 Code Domain Po
182. ata processing and sets the required attenuation accordingly This function is not available if the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is active Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP ATT AUTO ON Couples the attenuation to the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 81 INPut EATT lt Attenuation gt This command defines an electronic attenuation manually Automatic mode must be switched off INP EATT AUTO OFF see INPut EATT AUTO on page 192 If the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level This command is only available with option R amp S FSW B25 It is not available if R amp S FSW B17 is active Parameters lt Attenuation gt attenuation in dB Range see data sheet Increment 1 dB RST 0 dB OFF Example INP EATT AUTO OFF INP EATT 10 dB Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 on page 81 INPut EATT AUTO State This command turns automatic selection of the electronic attenuation on and off If on electronic attenuation reduces the mechanical attenuation whenever possible This command is only available with option R amp S FSW B25 11 5 4 11 5 4 1 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements It is not available if R amp S FSW B17 is active Parameters State O
183. ate tab of the dialog box Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Trigger Source Trigger In Out Trigger 2 Output Output Type User Defined t Level Low Pulse Length 100 0 us Send Trigger JL Trigger 3 Input Output For step by step instructions on configuring triggered measurements see the main R amp S FSW User Manual Die e ee gels eR CE 88 L Tigger UI OTT UO OD ULT 88 Mz 1 TU UU T 89 L Eutemal Tigger 18 8 eise ieri ad Rr epa 89 Beo oic MNMEPIMR Tr 89 Md m 90 uuo METTE 90 L Drop Out Time isi dci dace cl d ad a ub odd 90 EU Et o NNNM ROC 91 L PSS NENNEN 91 L Trigger NI ec niiina raei Rete MR ad 91 E MATNE 91 Bir 0 1101 ERR EM 91 INNS QE eh m M agrees 91 Matec tl ae clei E 92 2t eL 92 BEC 1E o NEED 92 L Send TMOJE DNE 92 Trigger Source The trigger settings define the beginning of a measurement Trigger Source Trigger Source Defines the trigger source If a trigger source other than Free Run is set TRG is displayed in the channel bar and the trigger source is indicated Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 197 Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Free Run Trigger Source Trigger Source No trigger source is considered Data acquisition is started manually or automatically and continues until stopped explicitely Remote command T
184. ation Release 5 On Changes of power are expected Therefore an EVM measurement interval of one slot minus 25 us at each end of the burst 3904 chips is considered Off Changes of power are not expected Therefore an EVM measure ment interval of one slot 4096 chips is considered Default settings Remote command SENSe CDPower ETCHips on page 226 Code Power Display For Code Domain Power evaluation Defines whether the absolute power or the power relative to the total signal is dis played Absolute Absolute power levels Relative Relative to the total signal power Remote command SENSe CDPower PDISplay on page 225 Traces 6 4 Traces The trace settings determine how the measured data is analyzed and displayed on the Screen Traces M ar Write Se l Code Domain Power In CDA evaluations only one trace can be active in each diagram at any time Window specific configuration The settings in this dialog box are specific to the selected window To configure the settings for a different window select the window outside the displayed dialog box or select the window from the Specifics for selection list in the dialog box Trace Mode Defines the update mode for subsequent traces Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S FSW save
185. ble 4 3 Common 3GPP FDD BTS data channels and their usage Channel type Description PICH Paging Indication Channel The Paging Indication Channel is expected at code class 8 and code number 16 The lower part of the table indicates the data channels contained in the signal A data channel is any channel that does not have a predefined channel number and symbol rate There are different types of data channels which are indicated in the column Chan Type DPCH Dedicated Physical Channel of a standard frame The Dedicated Physical Channel is a data channel that contains pilot symbols The displayed channel type is DPCH CPRSD Dedicated Physical Channel DPCH in compressed mode Compressed mode channels usually do not transmit valid symbols in all slots There are different lengths of the transmitting gap One to fourteen slots can be Switched off in each frame In some cases outside the gap the symbol rate is increased by 2 to ensure a constant average symbol rate of this channel In any case all of the transmitted slots contain a pilot sequence defined in the 3GPP speci fication There are different types of compressed mode channels To evaluate compressed mode channels the associated measurement mode needs to be activated see Compressed Mode on page 64 CPR TPC DPCH in compressed mode where TPC symbols are sent in the first slot of the transmitting gap CPR SF 2 DPCH in compressed mode using half spreading factor
186. by the 3GPP standard the application firmware offers meas urements with predefined settings in the frequency domain e g power and ACLR measurements R amp S FSW K72 performs Base Transceiver Station BTS measurements for downlink signals R amp S FSW K73 performs User Equipment UE measurements for uplink signals In particular the 3GPP FDD applications feature e Code domain analysis providing results like code domain power EVM peak code domain error etc e Time alignment error determination e Various power measurements e Spectrum Emission Mask measurements e Statistical CCDF evaluation This user manual contains a description of the functionality that the application pro vides including remote control operation All functions not discussed in this manual are the same as in the base unit and are described in the R amp S FSW User Manual The latest version is available for download at the product homepage http www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html Installation You can find detailed installation instructions in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual or in the Release Notes 2 1 Starting the 3GPP FDD Application The 3GPP FDD measurements require a special application on the R amp S FSW To activate the 3GPP FDD applications 1 Press the MODE key on the front panel of the R amp S FSW A dialog box opens that contains all operating modes and applications currently available on your R amp S FSW Unders
187. cal to the LAYout REPLace WINDow com mand To add a new window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt ADD command Parameters lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to replace another one with See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 230 for a list of availa ble window types Zooming into the Display Using the Single Zoom DISPlayPWINDowensrZOONCAREA rti oreet i ete eee ten ex iia 236 BISPlay WINBewsneprZOONE STAT 25 22 pe coepto rete a A a bee ect uEa sore e a ANNA 237 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm ome CF 2 000519931 GHz 498 pts 1 24 MHz Span 12 435008666 MHz 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt x2 gt lt y2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 110 SSS eS Se a User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 236 R amp S FSW K72 K73 Remote Commands for 3GPP FDD Measurements u P ee eee 1
188. ce input connector of the R amp S FSW REF INPUT To ensure that the error limits specified by the 3GPP standard are met the R amp S FSW should use an external reference frequency for frequency measure ments on user equipment For instance a rubidium frequency standard may be used as a reference source If the user equipment is provided with a trigger output connect this output to one of the TRIGGER INPUT connectors of the R amp S FSW Presetting Configure the R amp S FSW as follows Set the external attenuation Reference level offset Set the reference level Set the center frequency Set the trigger Select the UE standard and measurement 4 8 CDA Measurements in MSRA Operating Mode The 3GPP FDD BTS application can also be used to analyze data in MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master actually captures data the MSRA applications receive an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the application data For the 3GPP FDD BTS application in MSRA operating mode the R amp S FSW K72 K73 Measurement Basics application data range is defined by the same settings used to define the signal cap ture in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the analysis interval for the 3GPP FDD BTS measurement Data coverage for each active application Generally if a signal contains mult
189. chips at the selected slot is returned 2560 values The values are calculated as the square root of the square difference between the received signal and the reference sig Retrieving Results nal for each chip normalized to the square root of the average power at the selected slot 11 9 2 16 Mag Error vs Chip When the trace data for this evaluation is queried a list of magnitude error values of all chips at the selected slot is returned 2560 values The values are calculated as the magnitude difference between the received signal and the reference signal for each chip in and are normalized to the square root of the average power at the selected slot 11 9 2 17 Phase Error vs Chip When the trace data for this evaluation is queried a list of phase error values of all chips in the selected slot is returned 2560 values The values are calculated as the phase difference between the received signal and the reference signal for each chip in degrees and are normalized to the square root of the average power at the selected slot 11 9 2 18 Symbol Magnitude Error When the trace data for this evaluation is queried the magnitude error in of each symbol at the selected slot is transferred The number of the symbols depends on the spreading factor of the selected channel NOFSymbols 10 2 9 CodeClass 11 9 2 19 Symbol Phase Error When the trace data for this evaluation is queried the phase error in degrees of each symbol at
190. command defines a DC offset of the Q input from the Analog Baseband interface R amp S FSW B71 Parameters lt Offset gt Example numeric value DC offset RST 0 Default unit V CAL AIQ DCOF Q 0 001 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements SENSe PROBe lt ch gt SETup CMOFfset lt CMOffset gt Sets the common mode offset The setting is only available if a differential probe is connected to the R amp S FSW If the probe is disconnected the common mode offset of the probe is reset to 0 0 V Suffix lt ch gt 1 4 Selects the input channel Parameters CMOffset Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 Increment 1E 3 RST 0 Default unit V TRACe IQ APCon STATe State If enabled the average power consumption is calculated at the end of the I Q data measurement This command must be set before the measurement is performed The conversion factors A and B for the calculation are defined using TRACe 10 APCon A and TRACe IQ APCon B The results can be queried using TRACe 10 APCon RESult on page 183 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example RST TRAC STAT ON Q Q SRAT 1MHZ TRAC IQ RLEN 1000000 Q APC STAT ON Q APC A 3 0 TRAC IQ APC B 0 6 NIT WAI TRAC IQ APC RES TRACe IQ APCon A lt ConvFact gt Defines the conversion factor A for the calculation of the average power consumption Parameters lt ConvFact gt numeric value RST 1
191. cosvtensvadvvnbeavsieabeuscsaceenee 177 STATuUus QUESUonable DIG ENADBl 1 1 22 2 rnit tudri aad raa d ex aen ces a ode hun 177 STATUSQUEStotable DIC NN TEARS 2 22 2 dtr ra eL epe S T E 178 STATus QUEStionable DIQ PTRansition eee 178 STA TUS QUESHGmable DIOL EVEN pcan tede reet eec ete e neri 178 STATus QUEStionable DIQ CONDition lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the CONDition section of the STATus QUEStionable DIQ CONDition status register The command does not delete the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Example STAT QUES DIQ COND Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable DIQ ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the ENABle part of a register The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to be reported in the summary bit If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Setting parameters lt SumBit gt Range 0 to 65535 Usage SCPI confirmed 11 5 2 3
192. cro etui e rnt i n uere aed 201 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection Direction This command selects the trigger direction Suffix port Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters Direction INPut Port works as an input OUTPut Port works as an output RST INPut Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 75 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel Level This command defines the level of the signal generated at the trigger output This command works only if you have selected a user defined output with OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTY Pe Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters lt Level gt HIGH TTL signal LOW OV RST LOW Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 75 See Level on page 76 This command selects the type of signal generated at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters lt OutputType gt DEVice Sends a trigger signal when the R amp S FSW has triggered inter nally TARMed Sends a trigger signal when the trigger is armed and ready for an external trigger event UDEFined Sends a user defined trigger signal For
193. ctly check the signal quality by using the symbol constellation display 6to 14 Not used 15 This bit is always 0 STATus QUEStIonable S YNOLEVENI ctea ceteri a pedea entra ia tent rta 281 STATUS OUEStIonable SYNOIOONDIUOI 5 Ire I oer deve eta avere a Eve rere N 281 STATus QUEStionable SYNC ENABle eere nennen nnne nne nne nr nnn nnn eran na 281 STATUus QUESRonable SYNG NTRATfISILOFL 7 iinn traiter ir rk e ark nk rtr a Rec ies 282 STATUus QUESUornable S YNGOIPTRSSIBOE die cone dee bre d e la oaa Fara ke denen 282 STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the EVENt section of the status register The command also deletes the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the CONDition section of the status register The command does not delete the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable SYNC ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the ENABle part of a register 11
194. ctly for test purposes e List of remote commands Alphahabetical list of all remote commands described in the manual e Index Documentation Overview 1 2 Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R amp S FSW consists of the following parts e Printed Getting Started manual e Online Help system on the instrument e Documentation CD ROM with Getting Started User Manuals for base unit and firmware applications Service Manual Release Notes Data sheet and product brochures Online Help The Online Help is embedded in the instrument s firmware It offers quick context sen sitive access to the complete information needed for operation and programming Online help is available using the icon on the toolbar of the R amp S FSW Web Help The web help provides online access to the complete information on operating the R amp S FSW and all available options without downloading The content of the web help corresponds to the user manuals for the latest product version The web help is availa ble from the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FSW html Downloads Web Help Getting Started This manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format on the CD It provides the information needed to set up and start working with the instrument Basic operations and handling are described Safety information is also included The Getting Started manual in va
195. cupied bandwidth is defined as the bandwidth in which in default settings 99 96 of the total signal power is to be found The percentage of the signal power to be included in the bandwidth measurement can be changed The Occupied Bandwidth measurement is performed as in the Spectrum application with default settings Table 5 4 Predefined settings for 3GPP FDD OBW measurements Setting Default value 96 Power Bandwidth 99 96 Channel bandwidth 3 84 MHz For further details about the Occupied Bandwidth measurements refer to Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth in the R amp S FSW User Manual To restore adapted measurement parameters the following parameters are saved on exiting and are restored on re entering this measurement e Reference level and reference level offset e RBW VBW e Sweep time e Span RF Measurements 5 3 3 Output Power Measurements The Output Power measurement determines the 3GPP FDD signal channel power In order to determine the Output Power the 3GPP FDD application performs a Chan nel Power measurement as in the Spectrum application with the following settings Table 5 5 Predefined settings for 3GPP FDD Output Channel Power measurements Standard W CDMA 3GPP REV BTS W CDMA 3GPP FWD UE By default the Normal base station standard is used How ever you can switch to the Home base station standard using the BTS Standard softkey Number of adjacent channels 0
196. d CDD terr rper 144 Measurement time Auto settings etn nm rs 109 Measurement types en E M 15 RE niei toc dedo re tia ET 35 p 33 Measurements Interval rene rr er te 122 Selecting ccr herr rd re 62 Selecting remote i5 Starting remote nid eee mz Microbutton n m 74 MIMO Channel typ6S 1c ttr rer t ries Mapping to constellation points n Measuremiernit mode cnt pert terere Remote control rr iens 164 Minimum Marker positiohilig irr rrt 129 DH M M Softkey sd CI MKR gt X 128 Mobile station see UE user equipment eeesee 11 Modulation type rrt ern nene 17 MSR ACLR Fes lts remole 5 3 ntc terere 264 MSRA Analysis Interval nuanced 93 95 201 Operating mode i eene iere 33 55 RF measurements seiri nct net need 35 MSRA applications Gaptu re OIfSel icc n etat 91 94 95 Capture offset remote sssesessss 279 MSRA Master Data Coverage iriran rre tree nr rere eh 56 Multiple Measurement channels ssssesssss 12 57 Multiple ZOOEm oret rrr rrt err enn 110 N Next Minimum Marker positioning erret 129 SONKEY Cm 129 Next Peak Marker DOSIIONING user rir tarn kehren eterne pn 128 cle A
197. de In MSRA operating mode the following automatic settings are not available as they require a new data acquisition However 3GPP FDD applications cannot perform data acquisition in MSRA operating mode Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto All 108 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level ssessssssss 108 Autosearch fot Scrambling GOde dett tiic rte eet oa Ren dac te n dv 108 Auto Scale WIDdOW 2 1 5 2 2 1 nier rr EE EE EH AERE bdo EAE FIL EE HERE LLL XE ERR AO 108 PUNO SCANS AU M 109 Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Restore Scale Window sessi ener nnns nent 109 Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto 109 Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual 109 Upper Level Hysteresis sess meret nn en en nn nnn 109 Lower Level Flysielesis c tec Mee eet el e ec e acl d dtm oda dnce 109 Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto AII Activates all automatic adjustment functions for the current measurement settings This includes e Auto Level e Autosearch for Scrambling Code on page 65 e Auto Scale All on page 109 This function is only available for the MSRA MSRT Master not for the applications Remote command SENSe ADJust ALL on page 220
198. details see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual To abort a sequence of measurements by the Sequencer use the INITiate SEQuencer ABORt on page 240 command Note on blocked remote control programs If a sequential command cannot be completed for example because a triggered sweep never receives a trigger the remote control program will never finish and the remote channel to the R amp S FSW is blocked for further commands In this case you must inter rupt processing on the remote channel first in order to abort the measurement Starting a Measurement To do so send a Device Clear command from the control instrument to the R amp S FSW on a parallel channel to clear all currently active remote channels Depend ing on the used interface and protocol send the following commands e Visa viClear e GPIB ibcir e RSIB RSDLLibclr Now you can send the ABORt command on the remote channel performing the mea surement Example ABOR INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and immediately starts a new one Example ABOR WAI INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and starts a new one once abortion has been completed Usage SCPI confirmed INITiate CONMeas This command restarts a single measurement that has been stopped using INIT CONT OFF or finished in single sweep mode The measurement is restarted at the beginning not where the previous measurement was stopped As opposed to IN
199. dis played as the SCCPCH Any further QPSK modulated channels without pilot symbols are not detected as active channels e If the signal contains more than one channel without pilot symbols the channel that is received in the highest code class and with the lowest code number is displayed as the SCCPCH It is expected that only one channel of this type is included in the received signal According to this assumption this channel is probably the SCCPCH e If the application is configured to recognize all QPSK modulated channels without pilot symbols see HSDPA UPA on page 63 and one of these channels is received at code class 8 and code number 3 it is displayed as the SCCPCH CPICH Common Pilot Channel The Common Pilot Channel is used to synchronize the signal in the case of CPICH synchronization It is expected at code class 8 and code number 0 If it is not contained in the signal configuration the firmware application must be configured to sychronize to the SCH channel see Synchronization Type on page 95 Other channels are optional and contain the user data to be transmitted A data chan nel is any channel that does not have a predefined channel number and symbol rate The following channel types can be detected by the 3GPP FDD BTS application R amp S FSW K72 K73 Measurement Basics _ M U MP eee ee a Ta
200. e BELow lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to add See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 230 for a list of availa ble window types Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY WIND1 ADD LEFT MTAB Result 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Usage Query only LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify This command queries the name of a particular display window indicated by the lt n gt suffix Note to query the index of a particular window use the LAYout IDENtify WINDow command Return values lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window In the default state the name of the window is its index Usage Query only LAY out WINDow lt n gt REMove This command removes the window specified by the suffix lt n gt from the display The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REMove WINDow command Usage Event R amp S FSW K72 K73 Remote Commands for 3GPP FDD Measurements s o ee eee 11 7 3 11 7 3 1 LAY out WINDow lt n gt REPLace lt WindowType gt This command changes the window type of an existing window specified by the suffix lt n gt The result of this command is identi
201. e Antenna Diversity on page 64 See Antenna Number on page 64 See Antenna Antenna2 on page 96 SENSe CDPower HSDPamode State This command defines whether the HS DPCCH channel is searched or not Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 The high speed channels can be detected A detection of the modulation type QPSK 16QAM is done instead of a detection of pilot symbols OFF 0 The high speed channel can not be detected A detection of pilot symbols is done instead a detection of the modulation type QPSK 16QAM RST 1 Example SENS CDP HSDP OFF Manual operation See HSDPA UPA on page 63 SENSe CDPower L CODe SEARch IMMediate This command automatically searches for the scrambling codes that lead to the high est signal power The code with the highest power is stored as the new scrambling code for further measurements Searching requires that the correct center frequency and level are set The scrambling code search can automatically determine the primary scrambling code number The secondary scrambling code number is expected as 0 Alternative scrambling codes can not be detected Therefore the range for detection is 0x0000 Ox1FFOh where the last digit is always O If the search is successful PASS a code was found and can be queried using SENSe CDPower LCODe SEARch LIST Parameters Status PASSed Scrambling code s found FAlLed No scrambling code found Example SENS C
202. e Overview provides quick access to the following configuration dialog boxes listed in the recom mended order of processing 1 Select Measurement See chapter 3 Measurements and Result Display on page 15 2 Signal Description See chapter 5 2 3 Signal Description on page 62 3 Input Frontend See chapter 5 2 4 Data Input and Output Settings on page 67 4 Optionally Trigger Gate See chapter 5 2 6 Trigger Settings on page 87 5 Signal Capture 5 2 3 Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements See chapter 5 2 7 Signal Capture Data Acquisition on page 93 6 BTS measurements only Synchronization See chapter 5 2 9 Synchronization BTS Measurements Only on page 95 7 Channel Detection See chapter 5 2 10 Channel Detection on page 96 8 Analysis See chapter 6 Analysis on page 116 9 Display Configuration See chapter 3 1 2 Evaluation Methods for Code Domain Analysis on page 18 and Evaluation Methods on page 34 To configure settings P Select any button in the Overview to open the corresponding dialog box Select a setting in the channel bar at the top of the measurement channel tab to change a specific setting Preset Channel Select the Preset Channel button in the lower lefthand corner of the Overview to restore all measurement settings in the current channel to their default values Note that the PRESET key on the front panel re
203. e VALue on page 222 Remote commands exclusive to signal capturing ISENSeJOCDPOWEEBASE iet thos es IEEE Enea exea ORI eR RR RR etae x ROUEN evade aus 201 SENSe CDPower FILTer S TATe cessisse nenne rrr nnne nnns 202 SENSeJTODPowernlGOLengill nator cher ed eerte gi eet teer tte e Pes 202 SENSe CDPower OINVert 1r criticae eo Po eda ceci uda io io deed erbe eed ds 202 ISENSe JODPawWernSBANd 2 erdt rt ue EE ENR EXER ERE Ce EE 203 SENSe CDPower BASE lt BaseValue gt This command defines the base of the CDP analysis Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Parameters lt BaseValue gt SLOT FRAMe SLOT Only one slot of the signal is analyzed FRAMe The complete 3GPP frame is analyzed RST FRAMe Example CDP BASE SLOT Manual operation See Capture Mode on page 94 SENSe CDPower FILTer STATe State This command selects if a root raised cosine RRC receiver filter is used or not This feature is useful if the RRC filter is implemented in the device under test DUT Parameters State ON 1 If an unfiltered signal is received normal case the RRC filter should be used to get a correct signal demodulation OFF 0 If a filtered signal is received the RRC filter should not be used to get a correct signal demodulation This is the case if the DUT filters the signal RST 1 Example SENS CDP FILT STAT OFF Manual operat
204. e dialog box which is displayed when you select the New Copy or Edit buttons for a predefined channel table in the Channel Detection dialog box ML 101 IECUR 101 Adding a CRANES ME 101 Deleting a Channel ciiin orte toco ce treo ir E dd 101 Creating a New Channel Table from the Measured Signal Measure Table 101 Sort the Table une sister itera nep e eee ERE De Ip e eter uae 101 Cancelling GConfigureltlbli 2 eere tree creed dere ter de cet ene tege tee des e oa 101 Saving Me Table m H PS 101 Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Name Name of the channel table that will be displayed in the Predefined Channel Tables list Remote command BTS measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle NAME on page 213 UE measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle NAME on page 213 Comment Optional description of the channel table Remote command BTS measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle COMMent on page 213 UE measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle COMMent on page 214 Adding a Channel Inserts a new row in the channel table to define another channel Deleting a Channel Deletes the currently selected channel from the table Creating a New Channel Table from the Measured Signal Measure Table Creates a completely new channel table according to the current measu
205. e 264 CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP see CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWercsb RESult on page 264 Occupied Bandwidth The Occupied Bandwidth measurement determines the bandwidth that the signal occu pies The occupied bandwidth is defined as the bandwidth in which in default settings 99 of the total signal power is to be found The percentage of the signal power to be included in the bandwidth measurement can be changed The occupied bandwidth Occ BW and the frequency markers are displayed in the marker table Remote command CONF WCDP MEAS OBAN see CONFigure WCDPower BTS MEASurement on page 160 Querying results CALC MARK FUNC POW RES OBW see CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESu1t on page 264 CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP see CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWercsb RESult on page 264 Power The Output Power measurement determines the 3GPP FDD signal channel power The R amp S FSW measures the unweighted RF signal power in a bandwidth of Jaw MH R a 384MHg a 0 22 RF Measurements The power is measured in zero span mode time domain using a digital channel filter of 5 MHz in bandwidth According to the 3GPP standard the measurement bandwidth 5 MHz is slightly larger than the minimum required bandwidth of 4 7 MHz The band width is displayed numerically below the screen Remote command CONF WCDP MEAS POW see CONFigure WCDPower BTS
206. e data acquisition settings for the 3GPP FDD BTS application in MSRA mode define the application data extract See chapter 5 2 8 Application Data MSRA on page 95 For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual Sample t H 93 NAV GRE EE 94 RRG Filter State m 94 Capture Mode re cem dmt et et ette e eet ote dave td ur ed 94 Capture Length Frames Jesiis ete irt to che eai d vire cd ER E SPetr iode 94 Gapture ISON p 94 Frame TOANE e 94 IA E 94 Sample Rate The sample rate is always 16 MHz indicated for reference only Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Invert Q Inverts the sign of the signal s Q branch The default setting is OFF Remote command SENSe CDPower QINVert on page 202 RRC Filter State Selects if a root raised cosine RRC receiver filter is used or not This feature is useful if the RRC filter is implemented in the device under test DUT ON If an unfiltered signal is received normal case the RRC filter should be used to get a correct signal demodulation Default settings OFF If a filtered signal is received the RRC filter should not be used to get a correct signal demodulation This is the case if the DUT filters the signal Remote command SENSe CDPower FILTer STATe on page 202 Capture Mode Captures a single slot or one complete frame
207. e e A A 237 11 7 1 General Window Commands The following commands are required to configure general window layout independent of the application Note that the suffix n always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channel see INSTrument SELect on page 159 DIS Play POR MAD HL 229 DISPlayEWINDowstn SIZE cro doeet veteres eun oco ocn ur aaaeaii 229 Configuring the Result Display DISPlay FORMat Format This command determines which tab is displayed Parameters Format SPLit Displays the MultiView tab with an overview of all active chan nels SINGle Displays the measurement channel that was previously focused RST SING Example DISP FORM SPL DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE Size This command maximizes the size of the selected result display window temporarily To change the size of several windows on the screen permanently use the LAY SPL command see LAYout SPLitter on page 233 Parameters lt Size gt LARGe Maximizes the selected window to full screen Other windows are still active in the background SMALI Reduces the size of the selected window to its original size If more than one measurement window was displayed originally these are visible again RST SMALI Example DISP WIND2 LARG 11 7 2 Working with Windows in the Display The following commands are required to change the evaluation type and rearrange the screen layout for a measurement channel as yo
208. e emet eei te rd eel a ene uud nu 155 e BIOCK Dati uuu HAIR NP DRUSI INDE OI DDID N P deste eects 155 11 1 6 1 Numeric Values Numeric values can be entered in any form i e with sign decimal point or exponent In case of physical quantities you can also add the unit If the unit is missing the com mand uses the basic unit Example with unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ without unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1E9 would also set a frequency of 1 GHz 11 1 6 2 Introduction Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down If the number you have entered is not supported e g in case of discrete steps the command returns an error Instead of a number you can also set numeric values with a text parameter in special cases e MIN MAX Defines the minimum or maximum numeric value that is supported e DEF Defines the default value e UP DOWN Increases or decreases the numeric value by one step The step size depends on the setting In some cases you can customize the step size with a corresponding command Querying numeric values When you query numeric values the system returns a number In case of physical quantities it applies the basic unit e g Hz in case of frequencies The number of dig its after the decimal point depends on the type of numeric value Example Setting SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ Query SENSe FREQuency CENTer would return 1E9
209. e name of the existing window the new win dow is inserted next to By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt Direction gt LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow Direction the new window is added relative to the existing win dow lt WindowType gt text value Type of result display evaluation method you want to add See the table below for available parameter values Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY ADD 1 LEFT MTAB Result 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Example LAY ADD 1 BEL XPOW CDP ABSolute Adds a Code Domain Power display below window 1 Usage Query only Manual operation Configuring the Result Display See Bitstream on page 18 See Channel Table on page 19 See Code Domain Power on page 21 See Code Domain Error Power on page 22 See Composite Constellation on page 22 See Composite EVM on page 23 See EVM vs Chip on page 24 See Frequency Error vs Slot on page 25 See Mag Error vs Chip on page 25 See Marker Table on page 26 See Peak Code Domain Error on page 27 See Phase Discontinuity vs Slot on page 27 See Phase Error vs Chip on page 28 See Power vs Slot on page 29 See Power vs Symbol
210. e number of codes per channel and the symbol rate R amp S FSW K72 K73 Measurement Basics Table 4 1 Relationship between code class spreading factor codes per channel and symbol rate for 3GPP FDD signals Code class Spreading factor No codes chan Symbol rate nel 2 4 128 960 ksps 3 8 64 480 ksps 4 16 32 240 ksps 5 32 16 120 ksps 6 64 8 60 ksps 7 128 4 30 ksps 8 256 2 15 ksps 9 512 1 7 5 ksps In the measurement settings and results the spreading factor is often represented by the corresponding symbol rate in kilo symbols per second ksps The power of a channel is always measured in relation to its symbol rate or spreading factor In the 3GPP FDD applications the channel number consists of the used spreading fac tor and the channel s sequential number in the code domain assuming the code domain is divided into equal divisions lt sequence number gt lt spreading factor gt Example For a channel number of 5 32 for example imagine a code domain of 512 codes with a scale of 16 codes per division Each division represents a possible channel with spreading factor 32 Since channel numbering starts at 0 channel number 5 is the sixth division on the scale Selected codes and channels In the result displays that refer to channels the currently selected channel is highligh ted in the diagram You select a channel by entering a channel number and spreading facto
211. e on page 165 SENSe CDPower LCODe VALue on page 166 Scrambling Codes This table includes all found scrambling codes from the last autosearch sequence In the first column each detected scrambling code can be selected for export Remote command SENSe CDPower LCODe SEARCh LIST on page 164 Autosearch for Scrambling Code Starts a search on the measured signal for all scrambling codes The scrambling code that leads to the highest signal power is chosen as the new scrambling code Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Searching requires that the correct center frequency and level are set The scrambling code search can automatically determine the primary scrambling code number The secondary scrambling code number is expected as O Alternative scrambling codes can not be detected Therefore the range for detection is 0x0000 Ox1FFOh where the last digit is always 0 Remote command SENSe CDPower LCODe SEARch IMMediate on page 163 Export Writes the detected scrambling codes together with their powers into a text file in the R amp S user directory C R_S Instr User ScrCodes txt 5 2 3 3 UE Signal Description UE Measurements The settings available to describe the input signal in UE measurements are described here Scrambling Scrambling Code Format Type Signal Settings HSDPA UPA QPSK Modulation Only Scrambling COGO ri taii ER n He rid e dE c EU pad 66 x
212. e selection list you must specify which general purpose bit GPO to GP5 will provide the trigger data Note If the Digital I Q enhanced mode is used i e the connected device supports transfer rates up to 200 Msps only the general purpose bits GPO and GP1 are available as a Digital I Q trigger source The following table describes the assignment of the general purpose bits to the LVDS connector pins For details on the LVDS connector see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer User Manual Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Table 5 2 Assignment of general purpose bits to LVDS connector pins Bit LVDS pin GPO SDATAA P Trigger1 GP1 SDATA4 P Trigger2 GP2 SDATAO P Reserve1 GP3 SDATAA P Reserve2 GP4 SDATAO P Marker1 GP5 SDATAA P Marker2 not available for Digital 1 Q enhanced mode Remote command TRIG SOUR GPO see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 197 IF Power Trigger Source Trigger Source The R amp S FSW starts capturing data as soon as the trigger level is exceeded around the third intermediate frequency This trigger source is only available for RF input This trigger source is available for frequency and time domain measurements only It is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 For frequency sweeps the third IF represents the start frequency
213. ed channel and the selected slot QPSK constellation points are located on the diagonals not x and y axis of the constellation diagram BPSK constellation points are always on the x axis 3 Symbol Constellation ei Clrw Fig 3 16 Symbol Constellation display for 3GPP FDD BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH SCONst see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 230 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE 1 4 Symbol EVM The Symbol EVM evaluation shows the error between the measured signal and the ideal reference signal in percent for the selected channel and the selected slot A trace over all symbols of a slot is drawn The number of symbols is in the range from 12 min to 384 max It depends on the symbol rate of the channel 1 Symbol EVM Symb 0 1 Symb Fig 3 17 Symbol EVM display for 3GPP FDD BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH SEVM See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 230 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE 1 4 User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 31 R amp S FSW K72 K73 Measurements and Result Display umm SS I MH E LL 9s Symbol Magnitude Error The Symbol Magnitude Error is calculated analogous to symbol EVM The result is one symbol magnitude error value for each symbol of the slot of a special channel Positive values of symbol magnitude error indicate a symbol magnitude that is larger than the expected ide
214. ed by code number i e in the same sequence they are displayed on screen This command is only available for Code Domain Power or Channel Table evaluations see chapter 3 1 2 Evaluation Methods for Code Domain Analysis on page 18 Return values lt CodeClass gt 2 9 Code class of the channel lt ChannelNo gt 0 511 Code number of the channel lt AbsLevel gt dBm Absolute level of the code channel at the selected channel slot lt RelLevel gt Relative level of the code channel at the selected channel slot referenced to CPICH or total power lt TimingOffset gt 0 38400 chips Timing offset of the code channel to the CPICH frame start The value is measured in chips The step width is 256 chips in the case of code class 2 to 8 and 512 chips in the case of code class 9 lt PilotLength gt The length of the pilot symbols According to the 3GPP stand ard the pilot length range depends on the code class Range 0 2 4 8 16 Default unit symbols lt ActiveFlag gt 0 1 Flag to indicate whether a channel is active 1 or not 0 Retrieving Results lt ChannelType gt Channel type For details see table 11 3 Range 0 16 lt ModType gt Modulation type of the code channel at the selected channel slot 2 QPSK 4 16 QAM 15 NONE There is no power in the selected channel slot slot is switched OFF Range 2 4 15 lt Reserved gt for future use Example TRAC DATA CWCDp Returns a list of channel information
215. ed from the channel configuration of all active channels The magnitude error is related to the square root of the mean power of reference signal and given in percent MAG Fel e100 N 2560 kelo N 1 pa where MAG magnitude error of chip number k Sk complex chip value of received signal Xk complex chip value of reference signal k index number of the evaluated chip N number of chips at each CPICH slot n index number for mean power calculation of reference signal 1 Magnitude Error vs Chip Chip 0 256 hip Chip 2559 Fig 3 9 Magnitude Error vs Chip display for 3GPP FDD BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH MECHip see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 230 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE 1 4 Marker Table Displays a table with the current marker values for the active markers This table may be displayed automatically if configured accordingly see Marker Table Display on page 126 User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 26 R amp S FSW K72 K73 Measurements and Result Display Function Function Result Count 13 19705 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH MTAB see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 230 Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 269 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 266 Peak Code Domain Error In line with the 3GPP specifications the error between the measurement signal and the ideal reference signal for a given slot and for all
216. ed in 3GPP the channel table can contain up to 6 DPDCHs or up to 4 E DPDCHs 0 4 4 3GPP FDD BTS Test Models For measurements on base station signals in line with 3GPP test models with different channel configurations are specified in the document Base station conformance test ing FDD 3GPP TS 25 141 V5 7 0 An overview of the test models is provided here Table 4 8 Test model 1 Channel type Number of chan Power Level dB Spreading Timing offset nels 96 code x256Tchip PCCPCH SCH 1 10 10 1 0 Primary CPICH 1 10 10 0 0 PICH 1 1 6 18 16 120 SCCPCH SF 256 1 1 6 18 3 0 DPCH SF 128 16 32 64 76 8 see TS see TS 25 141 see TS 25 141 total 25 141 Table 4 9 Test model 2 Channel type Number of chan Power Level dB Spreading Timing offset nels code x256Tchip PCCPCH SCH 1 10 10 1 0 Primary CPICH 1 10 10 0 0 PICH 1 5 13 16 120 SCCPCH SF 256 1 5 13 3 0 DPCH SF 128 3 2x10 2x 10 1x 24 72 120 1 7 2 1x50 3 Table 4 10 Test model 3 Channel type Number of Power Level dB Spreading Timing offset channels 16 32 16 32 code x256Tchip PCCPCH SCH 1 12 6 7 9 9 11 1 0 Primary CPICH 1 12 6 7 9 9 11 0 0 PICH 1 5 1 6 13 18 16 120 SCCPCH 1 5 1 6 13 18 3 0 SF 256 DPCH SF 256 16 32 63 7 80 4 see TS see TS 25 141 see TS 25 141 total 25 141 4 5 Setup for Base
217. ee Use TFCI on page 103 See Timing Offset on page 103 See Pilot Bits on page 103 See CDP Relative on page 103 See Status on page 103 Configuring Channel Details UE Measurements The following commands are used to configure individual channels in a predefined channel table in UE measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA esessssseesee senem nnns ntn tr tnt r treni 216 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA HSDPZcch essssssssessee eene 217 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle EDATa eeeisisisiseseseeee nena nan nnns snnt a nant nn nn 217 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle EDATa EDPOc sse 217 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA lt CodeClass gt lt NoActChan gt lt PilotLength gt This command defines the values of the selected channel table The Channel DPCCH may only be defined once If channel DPCCH is missing in the command data it is automatically added at the end of the table Prior to this command the name of the channel table has to be defined with the command CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle NAME on page 213 Setting parameters lt CodeClass gt lt NoActChan gt lt PilotLength gt Return values lt CodeClass gt lt NoActChan gt lt PilotLength gt lt CDP1 gt lt CDP2 gt lt CDP3 gt lt CDP4 gt lt CDP5 gt lt CDP6 gt Example Mode Manual operation Code c
218. eeeeeeaceeeesaaeeseeaeeeseeaeeeteneeeees 243 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion WCDPower MS RESUIE esee 245 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion WCDPower BTS RESUIt essseeneeees 243 CAL Culatesn MARKer m MAXimum LEEF T saucia iiir tpe rta erepta reete creta eg ecc rata nu de Coppe CALCulate snz MARKer m MAXimum NENXT 2 nandi nnne Eta aaa i DEEE CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimUMIRIG ElE uico niente ice rotten cae a t Ioco serai ess CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINIMUMILEF Tassini aa D sis rie d Rc eda ean CALGulatesns MARKer m MINim rmNEXT iacere iiu er co cct ici cette cin Et cosa Pa Re UR YR E awe CAL Culatesn MARKer m MINim m RIGEH iterato retta rtp a ee Cake CALCulate n MARKer m MINimump PEAK eeeseesseeeseeee enne ren neret nenne nnns GAL Gulatesns MARKSGESIm9 X 2 aoreet cce tri tetro eee ce extera eet cus de aa tania nec aioe siete 269 CALCulatesna MARKERSIM Sty 2 ecce ette ecc rei rs PUN edet e eri P decre m oct ere dde c E tenes 266 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe GALibration AIQ DGOPFfset l ioe ro rrt i ieii ai e VECES eats 181 CALibration AIQ DGOFPfsetQ coo eite ee Ur eres en a Go a sd sen thx Era Meu aa Dr M e ELE a d er va Edel des 181 GONFigure WCDPower MS CTABIe CATalog rtp trn etae ener ree bere 211 CONFigure WCDPower
219. el this will cause an error Example INST REN Spectrum2 Spectrum3 Renames the channel with the name Spectrum2 to Spectrum3 INSTrument SELect lt ChannelType gt This command activates a new measurement channel with the defined channel type or selects an existing measurement channel with the specified name See also INSTrument CREate NEW on page 156 For a list of available channel types see table 11 1 Parameters lt ChannelType gt BWCD 3GPP FDD BTS option R amp S FSW K72 MWCD 3GPP FDD UE option R amp S FSW K73 SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute This command restores the default instrument settings in the current channel Use INST SEL to select the channel 11 4 Selecting a Measurement Example INST Spectrum2 Selects the channel for Spectrum2 SYST PRES CHAN EXEC Restores the factory default settings to the Spectrum2 channel Usage Event Manual operation See Preset Channel on page 62 Selecting a Measurement The following commands are required to define the measurement type in a remote environment For details on available measurements see chapter 3 Measurements and Result Display on page 15 CONFigure WCDPower BTS MEASurement sesssssssssesssseseeeenene nennen nnne nnne 160 CONFigure WCDPower MS MEASurement sssssssssssssssesene nennen nennen nnn nnne 161 CONFigure WCDPower BTS MEASurement Type This command
220. el falls below 18 dBm Manual operation See Lower Level Hysteresis on page 109 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer Threshold When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 222 command the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed compared to the last measurement before the reference level is adapted automatically Parameters Threshold Range O dB to 200 dB RST 1 dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST UPP 2 11 5 10 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Example For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level rises above 22 dBm Manual operation See Upper Level Hysteresis on page 109 SENSe ADJust LEVel This command initiates a single internal measurement that evaluates and sets the ideal reference level for the current input data and measurement settings This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FSW or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small Example ADJ LEV Usage Event Manual operation See Setting the Reference Le
221. em SEQuencer on page 242 A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Note In order to synchronize to the end of a sequential measurement using OPC OPC or WAI you must use SING1e Sequence mode For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters Mode SINGIe Each measurement is performed once regardless of the chan nel s sweep mode considering each channels sweep count until all measurements in all active channels have been per formed CONTinuous The measurements in each active channel are performed one after the other repeatedly regardless of the channel s sweep mode in the same order until the Sequencer is stopped CDEFined First a single sequence is performed Then only those channels in continuous sweep mode INIT CONT ON are repeated RST CONTinuous Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements Starting a Measurement INITiate SEQuencer REFResh ALL This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated SySTem SEQuencer SYST SEQ OFF and only in MSRA or MSRT mode The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by all active MSRA MSRT applications Example SYST SEQ OFF Deactivates the scheduler INIT CON
222. ements and Result Display on page 15 Code Domain PPOWOf et exor eh thes e eu aeqne uie ERE MEER EN RR eu ERU eR REAMS 248 Channel Elo 248 Code Doman Enor PONO paxec date eee tuc edo dd med a RP ae 248 xem SOl eM 249 PRESUME Sumillaby e etre Rt eet reU teil uie 249 Composite EVM RMS eaaet nee e RR iaaiiai ec ERR da 249 Peak Gode Domain EFFOE iaceret oce reo erbe ero ep ree atu a EE RA Ei 250 Composite Gonstellatioh roto oett eR Eee eR SER Ine RARE ERR INR ERA RRKRE ME SREE 250 Power i r M 250 Symbol Gonstellatign ocra iei rrt rere EO 250 simu 251 Bits tre aM a a oabaaactandaee saunas E EEA 251 Frequency Error sl c 252 Phase Discontinuity vs Slot et ode dee dix es 252 EVNI VS CIID ee EE 252 Mag Emor VS CMDS oi als Boi saree sects dete aren rea Enee e sade atacand tae 253 Phase Emor ys GND centes Dat bank nd eoe ner te etel t te dde t eina esi 253 Symbol Magnitude EFtOI 2 5 irren eccre une er tasse E 253 Symbol PNAS OC EMOL 5 roter ener ea etia ione er RURe tua d Xu EP dece eaa RO Put aru 253 Retrieving Results 11 9 2 1 Code Domain Power When the trace data for this evaluation is queried 5 values are transmitted for each channel e the code class e the channel number e the absolute level e the relative level e the timing offset F
223. en from the predefined table 11 5 7 2 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Parameters Mode PRED MEAS PRED The timing offset and pilot length values from the predefined table are used MEAS The timing offset and the pilot length are measured by the appli cation The channel configuration is specified via the predefined channel table Example CONF WCDP CTAB TOFF MEAS Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Timing Offset Reference on page 99 SENSe CDPower ICTReshold lt ThresholdLevel gt This command defines the minimum power that a single channel must have compared to the total signal in order to be regarded as an active channel Channels below the specified threshold are regarded as inactive Parameters lt ThresholdLevel gt Range 100 dB to 0 dB RST 60 dB Example SENS CDP ICTR 100 Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Inactive Channel Threshold BTS measurements only on page 98 Managing Channel Tables CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle STAT 0 2 cccecececeeeeereeeceeecenenenaaeaeaeaenseneneneee 208 CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle CATalog esses 209 CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle COPY esses nennen nennen 210 CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle DELete essen 210 CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle SELect 2 2 eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeenecenenensaaaeaeauaeauaes 210 CONFigure WC
224. enneren EEDU ERONEN 169 fume 69 Importing opor 1 Q data remote SONKEY Inactive Channel Threshold eese 98 Input Analog Baseband Interface B71 settings 72 Connector remote sesssss 168 lorejo oc 68 Coupling remote eese 168 Digital Baseband Interface B17 settings 70 Overload remote essen 167 De P 68 Setting Sasae ae A rE 67 81 Source Configuration softkey ssss 67 Source Analog Baseband l 73 Source connection errors sarah CO Source digital Q sesssssssss 70 Source Radio frequency RF nsee 68 Input sample rate ISR Digital Ilo tst 71 IristallatiORi 2 2 2 cereo mca v veins oe Renee eco av 11 WTA VGN ee 94 IQ offset Eliminating 1 crc 120 122 224 K Keys AR EAEE alse rds lues AAEE E AE e IET Peak Search RUN CONT RUN SINGLE L Lines MOS cassava ts pcecnar settee cot caveevactisncenesctravaesatsauncenestece 58 Lower Level Hysteresis SOfKBV ici noa ae OAE EE EEES 109 Mag Error vs Chip Evaluation Trace results Mapping CHANNC EE 17 Channeltable 2 net tetris 105 VQ branches i2 2 22 ita edidi eise citans 105 Marker Functions MENU i i erect benda re ere eo Ue eed 58 Marker table Corifigurihg
225. ens 57 Configuration remote etn 228 Result Display 1 nr erben 12 Result displays DiagaM e S 40 Marker table ir ces 26 41 Bealelis nini eri nid eee emus 41 Result Summary enr ree 41 Result list EV alllatiOl t ie o creer eet pee c coner rien 34 Result summary ChannelTesults nene eee cite teta EvalulatlOl 55 citt tenia feret eet tcc cor need General results ta Trace TESUNS cer obe he ied ol eee Result Summary Evalliation Method jx octo tenes contener tot 41 Result display ai RESUS einst cp rens ettet eset Calculated EMOTE cttm 243 Data format remote 5 eee 254 Evaluating rr rete 116 Exporting remote ed metre tes 261 Retrieving remote tectae 243 RE remote ariran ea tad a 263 Trace CEMO ict e nere 253 Trace data query remote ssessss 247 Updating the display Updating the display remote Retrieving Calculated results remote 243 Results remote RF Results remote tae tt 263 Wace results remote etos 253 RF attenuation Auto SOffKGy cci e eru es Manual softkey RF Combi Configuration 3GPP FDD sess 114 Measurement sd eee ecce t reci RESIN ipp ae Connector remote s Overload protection remote sssessss 167 Remole orons nene EERE 167
226. ent Analysis Transient Analysis R amp S FSW K60 VSA R amp S FSW K70 VSA 3GPP FDD BTS 3G FDD BTS R amp S FSW K72 3GPP FDD UE R amp S FSW 3G FDD UE K73 TD SCDMA BTS TD SCDMA BTS R amp S FSW K76 TD SCDMA UE TD SCDMA UE R amp S FSW K77 cdma2000 BTS CDMA2000 BTS R amp S FSW K82 cdma2000 MS R amp S FSW CDMA2000 MS K83 Note the default channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel Activating 3GPP FDD Measurements Application lt ChannelType gt Parameter Default Channel Name 1xEV DO BTS R amp S FSW BDO 1xEV DO BTS K84 1xEV DO MS R amp S FSW MDO 1xEV DO MS K85 WLAN R amp S FSW K91 WLAN WLAN LTE R amp S FSW K10x LTE LTE Realtime Spectrum RTIM Realtime Spectrum R amp S FSW K160R Note the default channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel INSTrument REName lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command renames a measurement channel Parameters lt ChannelName1 gt String containing the name of the channel you want to rename lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the new channel name Note that you can not assign an existing channel name to a new chann
227. ents only sss 98 Using Predefined Channel Tables rent ctt retenta aidi 98 Comparing the Measurement Signal with the Predefined Channel Table 99 Timing Offset REOS NCO coc rer E RPRe e rre Fehr E Pe RO Ete X REN HERE ERHEBEN e xS 99 Inactive Channel Threshold BTS measurements only Defines the minimum power that a single channel must have compared to the total sig nal in order to be recognized as an active channel Remote command SENSe CDPower ICTReshold on page 208 Using Predefined Channel Tables Defines the channel search mode Predefined Compares the input signal to the predefined channel table selected in the Predefined Tables list Auto Detects channels automatically using pilot sequences Remote command BTS measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle STATe on page 208 UE measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle STATe on page 211 5 2 10 2 Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Comparing the Measurement Signal with the Predefined Channel Table If enabled the 3GPP FDD application compares the measured signal to the predefined channel tables In the result summary only the differences to the predefined table set tings are displayed Remote command CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle COMPare on page 207 Timing Offset Reference Defines the reference for the timing offset of the displayed measured signal Relative to The measured t
228. ep CONTINUOUS Channel detection mode AUTOSEARCH Trigger settings FREE RUN Trigger offset 0 Scrambling code 0 Threshold value 60 dB Symbol rate 15 ksps Code number 0 Slot number 0 Evaluations Window 1 Code Domain Power Relative Window 2 Result Summary 5 2 2 BH Ca Overview Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Configuration Overview Throughout the measurement channel configuration an overview of the most important currently defined settings is provided in the Overview The Overview is displayed when you select the Overview icon which is available at the bottom of all softkey menus Code Domain Analyzer eon Co ed Moc v Capture Length iv ower Sensor Gated Trigge RRC Filter Signal Description 9 Ez Signal Capture Input Frontend Trigger Gate Channel frn EN Detection Analysis Display Config No c Result Summary EI Fi P Trac In addition to the main measurement settings the Overview provides quick access to the main settings dialog boxes Thus you can easily configure an entire measurement channel from input over processing to evaluation by stepping through the dialog boxes as indicated in the Overview The available settings and functions in the Overview vary depending on the currently selected measurement For RF measurements see chapter 5 3 RF Measurements on page 111 For Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error measurements th
229. equired e 1 coaxial cable 500 approx 1 m N connector e 1 coaxial cable 500 approx 1 m BNC connector The following measurements are described e Measurement 1 Measuring the Signal Channel Power esses 137 e Measurement 2 Determining the Spectrum Emission Mask 138 e Measurement 3 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power 140 e Measurement 4 Triggered Measurement of Relative Code Domain Power 144 e Measurement 5 Measuring the Composite EVM sss 146 e Measurement 6 Determining the Peak Code Domain Error 147 10 1 Measurement 1 Measuring the Signal Channel Power The measurement of the spectrum gives an overview of the 3GPP FDD UE signal and the spurious emissions close to the carrier Test setup gt Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMU to the RF input of the R amp S FSW coaxial cable with N connectors Settings on the R amp S SMU 1 PRESET 2 FREQ 2 1175 GHz 3 LEVEL 0 dBm 4 DIGITAL STD WCDMA 3GPP 5 DIGITAL STD gt Set Default R amp S FSW K72 K73 Measurement Examples DIGITAL STD gt LINK DIRECTION gt UP REVERSE DIGITAL STD gt TEST MODELS gt DPCCH_DPDCH960ksps DIGITAL STD gt Select User Equipment gt UE 1 ON o o N 9 DIGITAL STD gt WCDMA 3GPP gt STATE ON Settings on the R amp S FSW 1 PRESET MODE gt 3GPP FDD
230. equired details are visible Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn Z00M STATe on page 237 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA on page 236 Multiple Zoom In multiple zoom mode you can enlarge several different areas of the trace simultane ously An overview window indicates the zoom areas in the original trace while the zoomed trace areas are displayed in individual windows The zoom area that corre sponds to the individual zoom display is indicated in the lower right corner between the scrollbars Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 238 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA on page 237 Restore Original Display Restores the original display and closes all zoom windows Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M STATe on page 237 single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 238 for each multiple zoom window Deactivating Zoom Selection mode Deactivates zoom mode Tapping the screen no longer invokes a zoom but selects an object Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 237 single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00OM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 238 for each multiple zoom window RF Measurements 5 3 RF Measurements 3GPP FDD measurements require a special application on the R amp S FSW which you activate using the MODE key on the front panel When you activate a
231. erence between the test signal and the ideal refer ence signal in the selected slot in 96 See also Composite EVM on page 23 Pk CDE 15 ksps The Peak Code Domain Error projects the difference between the test signal and the ideal reference signal onto the selected spreading factor in the selected slot see Peak Code Domain Error on page 27 The spreading factor onto which projection is performed can be derived from the symbol rate indicated in brackets RHO Quality parameter RHO for each slot No of Active Chan The number of active channels detected in the signal in the selected slot Both the detected data channels and the control channels are considered active channels Avg RCDE Average Relative Code Domain Error over all channels detected with 64 QAM UE 4PAM modulation in the selected frame Carrier Frequency Error The maximum frequency error that can be compensated is specified in Maximum fre quency error that can be compensated as a function of the synchronization mode Transmitter and receiver should be synchronized as far as possible Table 3 2 Maximum frequency error that can be compensated SYNC mode ANTENNA DIV Max Freq Offset CPICH X 5 0 kHz SCH OFF 1 6 kHz SCH ANT 1 330 Hz SCH ANT 2 330 Hz Table 3 3 Channel specific code domain power results Symbol Rate Symbol rate at which the channel is transmitted Channel Slot No BTS measurements only
232. estart of the corresponding number of measurements With trace mode MAXHold MINHold and AVERage the previous results are reset on restarting the measurement You can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Manual operation See Single Sweep RUN SINGLE on page 106 INITiate SEQuencer ABORt This command stops the currently active sequence of measurements The Sequencer itself is not deactivated so you can start a new sequence immediately using INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate on page 240 To deactivate the Sequencer use SYSTem SEQuencer on page 242 Usage Event INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate This command starts a new sequence of measurements by the Sequencer Its effect is similar to the INITiate IMMediate command used for a single measurement Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 242 Starting a Measurement Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements Usage Event INITiate SEQuencer MODE Mode This command selects the way the R amp S FSW application performs measurements sequentially Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYST
233. eturn values depends on the scaling of the y axis logarithmic scaling returns the power in the current unit linear scaling returns the power in W CN Carrier to noise measurements Returns the C N ratio in dB CNO Carrier to noise measurements Returns the C N ratio referenced to a 1 Hz bandwidth in dBm Hz CPOWer Channel power measurements Returns the channel power The unit of the return values depends on the scaling of the y axis logarithmic scaling returns the power in the current unit linear scaling returns the power in W For SEM measurements the return value is the channel power of the reference range in the specified sub block PPOWer Peak power measurements Returns the peak power The unit of the return values depends on the scaling of the y axis logarithmic scaling returns the power in the current unit linear scaling returns the power in W For SEM measurements the return value is the peak power of the reference range in the specified sub block OBANdwidth OBWidth Occupied bandwidth Returns the occupied bandwidth in Hz Usage Query only Retrieving Results Manual operation See Ch Power ACLR on page 36 See Occupied Bandwidth on page 36 See Power on page 36 See RF Combi on page 37 See Spectrum Emission Mask on page 38 See CCDF on page 39 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y This command queries the position of a marker on the y axis If necessary the command act
234. ew data measurement and waits for the end of the Sweep INST SEL IQ ANALYZER Selects the IQ Analyzer channel INIT REFR Refreshes the display for the I Q Analyzer channel Usage Event Manual operation See Refresh on page 107 SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRA mode not for the MSRA Master It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements Querying the Status Registers Parameters Offset This parameter defines the time offset between the capture buf fer start and the start of the extracted application data The off set must be a positive value as the application can only analyze data that is contained in the capture buffer Range 0 to Record length RST 0 Manual operation See Capture Offset on page 91 11 13 Querying the Status Registers The following commands are required for the status reporting system specific to the 3GPP FDD applications In addition the 3GPP FDD applications also use the standard status registers of the R amp S FSW depending on the measurement type For details on the common R amp S FSW status registers refer to the description of remote control basics in the R amp S FSW User Manual o RST does not influence the status registers The STATus QUEStionable DIQ register is described in STATus QUEStiona ble DIQ Register on page 175 The STATus QUEStionable SYNC register contai
235. f defined a reference level offset is also considered The input signal must be between 500 MHz and 8 GHz Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV RFP 30dBm TRIGger SEQuence LEVel VIDeo Level This command defines the level the video signal must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed Parameters Level Range 0 PCT to 100 PCT RST 50 PCT Example TRIG LEV VID 50PCT TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe Type For external and time domain trigger sources you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Parameters Type POSitive NEGative POSitive Triggers when the signal rises to the trigger level rising edge NEGative Triggers when the signal drops to the trigger level falling edge RST POSitive Example TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Slope on page 91 TRIGger SEQuence SOURce Source This command selects the trigger source Note on external triggers Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements If a measurement is configured to wait for an external trigger signal in a remote control program remote control is blocked until the trigger is received and the program can continue Make sure this situatio
236. f type CHAN The channels are in descending order according to symbol rates and within a symbol rate in ascending order according to the channel numbers There fore the unassigned codes are always to be found at the end of the table If the modulation type for a channel can vary the measured value of the modulation type will be appended to the type of the channel mum PE HN ee User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 48 R amp S FSW K72 K73 Measurement Basics Channel type EHICH ERGCH Description HSUPA Enhanced HARQ Hybrid Acknowledgement Indicator Channel Enhanced Relative Grant Channel EAGCH Enhanced Absolute Grant Channel SCPICH Secondary Common Pilot Channel CHAN If the application is configured to recognize all QPSK modulated channels without pilot symbols see HSDPA UPA on page 63 all QPSK modulated channels without pilot symbols and a code class higher than or equal to 7 are marked with the channel type CHAN MIMO channel types Optionally single antenna MIMO measurement channels can also be detected In this case HS PDSCH channels with exclusively QPSK or exclusively 16 QAM on both transport streams are automatically detected and demodulated The corresponding channel types are denoted as HS MIMO QPSK and HS MIMO 16QAM The MIMO constellations resulting on a single antenna consist of three amplitudes per dimension 1 0 1 in the case of QPSK x QPSK and seven ampli
237. for I Q Analyzer GSM VSA and MC Group Delay measurements Example INP FILT YIG OFF Deactivates the YIG preselector Manual operation See YIG Preselector on page 69 INPut IMPedance Impedance This command selects the nominal input impedance of the RF input 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance using a matching pad of the RAZ type 25 O in series to the input impedance of the instrument The power loss correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 The command is not available for measurements with the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 Parameters Impedance 50 75 RST 500 Example INP IMP 75 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Impedance on page 69 INPut SELect Source This command selects the signal source for measurements i e it defines which con nector is used to input data to the R amp S FSW If no additional options are installed only RF input is supported 11 5 2 2 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Parameters Source RF Radio Frequency RF INPUT connector DIQ Digital IQ data only available with optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 For details on I Q input see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer User Manual AIQ Analog Baseband signal only available with optional Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 For details on Analog Baseband in
238. g factor 256 with both and Q branches The first entries of the table indicate the channels that must be available in the signal to be analyzed and any other control channels see chapter 4 2 BTS Channel Types on page 46 and chapter 4 3 UE Channel Types on page 50 The lower part of the table indicates the data channels that are contained in the signal If the type of a channel can be fully recognized based on pilot sequences or modula tion type the type is indicated in the table In BTS measurements all other channels are of type CHAN The channels are in descending order according to symbol rates and within a symbol rate in ascending order according to the channel numbers Therefore the unassigned codes are always displayed at the end of the table um EP EIN Ss a User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 19 R amp S9FSW K72 K73 Measurements and Result Display 2 Channel Table SymRate State Pilot PwrAbs PwrRel ksps das Bits dBm dB Chan Type Fig 3 2 Channel Table display for 3GPP FDD BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CTABle see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 230 TRACe lt n gt DATA CTABle TRACe lt n gt DATA PWCDp TRACe lt n gt DATA CWCDp Table Configuration Channel Table You can configure which parameters are displayed in the Channel Table by double clicking the table header A Table Configuration dialog box is displayed in which you can select the columns to be dis
239. ge 93 In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the analysis interval for the 3GPP FDD BTS measurement see Capture Offset on page 91 The analysis interval cannot be edited manually but is determined automatically according to the selected channel slot or frame to analyze which is defined for the evaluation range depending on the result display Note that the frame slot channel is analyzed within the application data Synchronization BTS Measurements Only For BTS tests the individual channels in the input signal need to be synchronized to detect timing offsets in the slot spacings These settings are described here CPICH Mode S CPICH Code Nr S CPICH Antenna Pattern Synclhrontzatto T8 oer Eee ete en Rete einen iens 95 Antentiad y ATernteg cii c i ertet eus tbe ia are ren a era e e c Rd 96 l CRICH TT MCCC ORR RTE ROSS ER 96 L S CPICH Code Ip iuiescssat tci i daten tact sna er cxtra dd 96 S CPICH Antenna Pattern ccccccccceecesseeeeecesesescecesaneeseeeeeceesecseeeeeeeesseseeeeeagseseeetes 96 Synchronization Type Defines whether the signal is synchronized to the CPICH or the synchronization chan nel SCH CPICH The 3GPP FDD application assumes that the CPICH control channel is present in the signal and attempts to synchronize to this channel If the signal does not contain CPICH synchronization fails Code Domain Analysis
240. gt Switches between Normal mode and Home BS Home Base Station mode for ACP and SEM measurements in the BTS application Switching this parameter changes the limits according to the specifications Configuring the Result Display Parameters Type HOME NORMal HOME Home Base Station NORMal Normal mode RST NORMal Example CONF WCDP BTS STD HOME Mode BTS application only Manual operation See BTS Standard on page 112 11 6 2 Analysis General result analysis settings concerning the trace markers lines etc for RF meas urements are identical to the analysis functions in the Spectrum application except for some special marker functions and spectrograms which are not available in the 3GPP FDD applications For details see the General Measurement Analysis and Display chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual 11 7 Configuring the Result Display The following commands are required to configure the screen display in a remote envi ronment The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 3 Measurements and Result Display on page 15 11 7 1 General Window Commands oues sies eene thea nna th bh dan san tha dandas 228 11 7 2 Working with Windows in the Display sssse me 229 11 7 3 Zooming into the Display iin tI tede ettet edle patei tn se Fo tra dre inde 236 11 7 3 1 Using the Single Zoom misss ener nennen 236 11 7 9 2 Using the Multiple ZOOT iieri erre rr aot
241. gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 157 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The channel name is displayed as the tab label for the measurement channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see INSTrument LIST on page 157 Example INST CRE SAN Spectrum 2 Adds an additional spectrum display named Spectrum 2 INSTrument CREate REPLace lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command replaces a measurement channel with another one Parameters lt ChannelName1 gt String containing the name of the measurement channel you want to replace lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 157 lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the name of the new channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see INSTrument LIST on page 157 Example INST CRE REPL Spectrum2 IQ IQAnalyzer Replaces the channel named Spectrum2 by a new measure ment channel of type IQ Analyzer named IQAnalyzer INSTrument DELete lt ChannelName gt This command deletes a measurement channel If you delete the last measurement channel
242. he Input Settings dialog box Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Frequency Offset Value 0 0 Hz ize Stepsize E 1 0 MHz cuiu 86 Canter Frequency 9t epsiza oor rer ERR ERE ad Erneut 86 Frequency Offset essere einen nnne enn thnn snis snnt etin nsi sten 87 Center frequency Defines the normal center frequency of the signal The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span span gt 0 SPAN min 2 E fcenter E fmax SPAN min 2 fmax and span pin are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 186 Center Frequency Stepsize Defines the step size by which the center frequency is increased or decreased when the arrow keys are pressed When you use the rotary knob the center frequency changes in steps of only 1 10 of the Center Frequency Stepsize The step size can be coupled to another value or it can be manually set to a fixed value This setting is available for frequency and time domain measurements X Span Sets the step size for the center frequency to a defined factor of the span The X Factor defines the percentage of the span Values between 1 and 100 96 in steps of 1 96 are allowed The default setting is 10 9o Center Sets the step size to the value of the center frequency The used value is indicated in the Value field Manual Defines a fixed ste
243. igh state of a transmitted bit 6 Bit of a symbol of a suppressed slot of a DPCH in Compressed Mode DPCH CPRSD 7 Bit of a switched off symbol of an HS PDSCH channel 8 Fill value for unused bits of a lower order modulation symbol in a frame containing higher order modulation 9 Bit of a suppressed symbol of a DPCH e g TFCI off Bits per symbol NBitPersymb 2 4 6 Symbols per slot Nsymb sio 10 2 6 Code Class Symbols per frame Neymb Frame 15 Nsymb_siot 150 2 Code Class Number of bits Neit Nsymp Frame NeitPersymb_MAx Format 16QAM Bitoo Bito Bito2 Bito3 Bito Bit Bit 2 Bit 3 i BitNsymb_Frame o Bilusymp Frame 1 Bilysymp Frame 2 Bitusymp Frame 3 Format 64QAM Bitoo Bito Bitos Bitos Bitog Bitos Bitio Bit Bits Bits Bitia Bitis Bitusymp Frame o Bitusymp Frame 1 Bitusymb Frame 2 Bitnsymb_Frame 3 Bitusymp Frame 4 BitNsymb_Frame 5 11 9 2 13 Frequency Error vs Slot When the trace data for this evaluation is queried 15 pairs of slot slot number of CPICH and values are transferred lt slot number gt lt value in Hz gt 11 9 2 14 Phase Discontinuity vs Slot When the trace data for this evaluation is queried 15 pairs of slot slot number of CPICH and values are transferred lt slot number gt lt value in deg gt 11 9 2 15 EVM vs Chip When the trace data for this evaluation is queried a list of vector error values of all
244. iming offset is shown in relation to the CPICH CPICH Relative to If the predefined table contains timing offsets the delta between the Predefined defined and measured offsets are displayed in the evaluations Table Remote command CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle TOFFset on page 207 Channel Table Management Channel tables are managed in the Channel Detection dialog box which is displayed when you select the Channel Detection button in the configuration Overview Predetiriad Tables er bnt tr op ene cl t cd ta td de etd 99 Selecting ai Table rrt miri ri eel ihe E eic zd d 99 Cheating dew Tae encon teurer E bete rere Doreen ee pk c eux nie 100 Zae 2 E rz o E 100 eec E 100 Dobio a Tablo 100 Restoring Default Tables ssesssssssseseseseseeesee enne tennis nnne 100 Predefined Tables The list shows all available channel tables and marks the currently used table with a checkmark The currently focussed table is highlighted blue Remote command BTS measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle CATalog on page 209 UE measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle CATalog on page 211 Selecting a Table Selects the channel table currently focussed in the Predefined Tables list and com pares it to the measured signal to detect channels Remote command BTS measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle SELect on page 210 UE measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle SELect on page 212
245. in 3GPP FDD appli cations in a remote environment It is assumed that the R amp S FSW has already been set up for remote control in a net work as described in the R amp S FSW User Manual o Note that basic tasks that are also performed in the base unit in the same way are not described here For a description of such tasks see the R amp S FSW User Manual In particular this includes e Managing Settings and Results i e storing and loading settings and result data e Basic instrument configuration e g checking the system configuration customizing the screen layout or configuring networks and remote operation e Using the common status registers The following topics specific to 3GPP applications are described here e MOGUCOM reneo aiana tlt ose ute on ertet e Rae ae ERREUR AR uH 150 Common SUIll X65 c prie repere repe Recte artis ise SE Paetos PIRE AEN AA ENa EEANN 155 e Activating 3GPP FDD Measurements enses ntn nhe n nnn 156 e Selecting a Measurement cccccccccccce cee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseceaneaeeeeeeeeess 160 e Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements 162 e Configuring RF Measurements sss eene nne nennen 227 e Configuring the Result Display ccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeceneeceeceeeeeeeeseesesenaeeaeeeeeeeeess 228 e Stating d MeasHremelit 2 ntc dac et ctt rc td tt cred tt Ltd 238 Retrieving Results crei a cei Rec
246. indow is its index Windowlndex numeric value Index of the window Example LAY CAT Result 2 2 1 1 Two windows are displayed named 2 at the top or left and 1 at the bottom or right Usage Query only LAYout IDENtify WINDow lt WindowName gt This command queries the index of a particular display window Note to query the name of a particular window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify query Query parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window Return values Windowlndex Index number of the window Usage Query only LAYout REMove WINDow lt WindowName gt This command removes a window from the display Configuring the Result Display Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Usage Event LAYout REPLace WINDow lt WindowName gt lt WindowType gt This command replaces the window type for example from Diagram to Result Sum mary of an already existing window while keeping its position index and window name To add a new window use the LAYout ADD WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt WindowType gt Type of result display you want t
247. ine a hysteresis This setting defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed compared to the last mea surement before the reference level is adapted automatically This function is only available for the MSRA MSRT Master not for the applications Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer on page 221 Lower Level Hysteresis When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last mea surement before the reference level is adapted automatically This function is only available for the MSRA MSRT Master not for the applications Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer on page 221 5 2 13 Zoom Functions The zoom functions are only available from the toolbar Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements S ZOOIW p E OE 110 KUUNO ZOOM iroa ET AT 110 Restore Otginal Display rnini ianari ainan c ERR arna aaa EE 110 Deactivating Zoom Selection MOde cccccccesceeceeceeeeeeeeseneeeseaeeseeaeeesseeeeeeaeeesenees 110 Single Zoom ES A single zoom replaces the current diagram by a new diagram which displays an enlarged extract of the trace This function can be used repetitively until the r
248. ion See RRC Filter State on page 94 SENSe CDPower IQLength lt CaptureLength gt This command specifies the number of frames that are captured by one sweep Parameters lt CaptureLength gt Range 1 to 100 RST 1 Example SENS CDP IQLength 3 Manual operation See Capture Length Frames on page 94 SENSe CDPower QINVert State This command inverts the Q branch of the signal Parameters ON OFF RST OFF Example CDP QINV ON Activates inversion of Q branch Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Manual operation See Invert Q on page 94 SENSe CDPower SBANd lt NORMal INVers gt This command is used to swap the left and right sideband Parameters lt NORMal INVers gt RST NORM Example CDP SBAN INV Switches the right and left sideband 11 5 6 Synchronization For BTS tests the individual channels in the input signal need to be synchronized to detect timing offsets in the slot spacings These commands are described here they are only available in the 3GPP FDD BTS application Useful commands for synchronization described elsewhere SENSe CDPower ANTenna on page 162 Remote commands exclusive to synchronization SENSe CDPower UCPich ANT antenna CODE esses nnne nnns 203 SENSe CDPower UCPich ANT lt antenna gt PATTEIN cccccccccessesseeeceseeeseseeeeeanenseseesananess 204 SENSe CDPower UCPich ANT lt antenna gt STAT
249. ions and determine correlations If the marked point in time is contained in the analysis interval of the application the line is indicated in all time based result displays such as time symbol slot or bit dia grams By default the analysis line is displayed however it can be hidden from view manually In all result displays the AL label in the window title bar indicates whether or not the analysis line lies within the analysis interval or not e orange AL the line lies within the interval e white AL the line lies within the interval but is not displayed hidden e no AL the line lies outside the interval For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 56 Result Display 9 Configuration The 3GPP FDD applications provide several different measurements for signals according to the 3GPP FDD application The main and default measurement is Code Domain Analysis Furthermore a Time Alignment Error measurement is provided In addition to the code domain power measurements specified by the 3GPP standard the 3GPP FDD options offer measurements with predefined settings in the frequency domain e g RF power measurements Only one measurement type can be configured per channel however several chan nels with 3GPP FDD applications can be configured in parallel on the R amp S FSW Thus you can configure one channel for a Code Domain Analysis for example and another
250. iple data channels for multiple standards separate applications are used to analyze each data channel Thus it is of interest to know which application is analyzing which data channel The MSRA Master display indicates the data covered by each application restricted to the channel bandwidth used by the corresponding standard for 3GPP FDD 5 MHz by vertical blue lines labeled with the application name Analysis interval However the individual result displays of the application need not analyze the com plete data range The data range that is actually analyzed by the individual result dis play is referred to as the analysis interval In the 3GPP FDD BTS application the analysis interval is automatically determined according to the selected channel slot or frame to analyze which is defined for the evaluation range depending on the result display The analysis interval can not be edi ted directly in the 3GPP FDD BTS application but is changed automatically when you change the evaluation range Analysis line A frequent question when analyzing multi standard signals is how each data channel is correlated in time to others Thus an analysis line has been introduced The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRA applications It can be positioned in any MSRA application or the MSRA Master and is then adjusted in all other applications Thus you can easily analyze the results at a specific time in the measurement in all applicat
251. ipped with option R amp S FSW K73 Only the commands required to control the R amp S FSW K73 application are provi ded not the signal generator Programming Examples R amp S FSW K73 The measurements are performed using the following devices and accessories e The R amp S FSW with Application Firmware R amp S FSW K73 3GPP FDD UE user equipment test e The Vector Signal Generator R amp S SMU with option R amp S SMU B45 digital stand ard 3GPP options R amp S SMU B20 and R amp S SMU B11 required e 1 coaxial cable 500 approx 1 m N connector e 1 coaxial cable 500 approx 1 m BNC connector Test setup 1 Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMU to the input of the R amp S FSW 2 Connect the reference input REF INPUT on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW to the reference input REF on the rear panel of the R amp S SMU coaxial cable with BNC connectors 3 Connect the external trigger input on the front panel of the R amp S FSW TRIGGER INPUT to the external trigger output on the front panel of the R amp S SMU TRIG OUT1 of PAR DATA Settings on the R amp S SMU Setting Value Preset Frequency 2 1175 GHz Level 0 dBm Digital standard WCDMA 3GPP Link direction UP REVERSE Test model DPCCH_DPDCH960ksps User equipment UE 1 Digital standard State ON Scrambling code 0000 The following measurements are described e Measurement 1 Measuring the Signal Channel Power
252. iption Scrambling Code Common HSDPA UPA Compressed Mode MIMO Antenna Diversity State Antenna Number Antenna DIVGISID RED 64 Antenna Nutmbe cnet rnt o ee eee nth e ee extr e e e xe eet b deuda 64 HSDPA UPA If enabled the application detects all QPSK modulated channels without pilot symbols HSDPA channels and displays them in the channel table If the type of a channel can be fully recognized as for example with a HS PDSCH based on modulation type the type is indicated in the table All other channels without pilot symbols are of type CHAN Remote command SENSe CDPower HSDPamode on page 163 Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Compressed Mode If compressed mode is switched on some slots of a channel are suppressed To keep the overall data rate the slots just before or just behind a compressed gap can be sent with half spreading factor SF 2 This mode must be enabled to detect compressed mode channels see chapter 4 2 BTS Channel Types on page 46 Remote command SENSe CDPower PCONtrol on page 165 MIMO Activates or deactivates single antenna MIMO measurement mode If activated HS PDSCH channels with exclusively QPSK or exclusively 16 QAM on both transport streams are automatically detected and demodulated The correspond ing channel types are denoted as HS MIMO QPSK and HS MIMO 16QAM respec tively For details see MIMO channel types on page 49
253. itable for the transmission of large amounts of data The ASCII character introduces the data block The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the 4 follow ing digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes The data bytes follow During the trans mission of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted 0 specifies a data block of indefinite length The use of the indefinite for mat requires a NL END message to terminate the data block This format is useful when the length of the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation of the data into blocks of definite length 11 2 Common Suffixes In 3GPP FDD applications the following common suffixes are used in remote com mands Suffix Value range Description n 1 16 Window lt t gt 1 CDA Trace 6 RF Activating 3GPP FDD Measurements Suffix Value range Description m 1 4 CDA Marker 1 16 RF lt ch gt 1 18 Tx channel Channel in RF measurements 1 11 ALT channel lt k gt 1 8 Limit line Line in RF measurements 1 2 Display line 11 3 Activating 3GPP FDD Measurements 3GPP FDD measurements require a special application on the R amp S FSW The mea surement is started immediately with the default settings INSTrument GREate DUPLicale eren cote he
254. ivates the marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INITiate CONTinuous on page 239 Return values lt Result gt Result at the marker position Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single measurement mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches marker 2 INIT WAI Starts a measurement and waits for the end CALC MARK2 Y Outputs the measured value of marker 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker Table on page 26 See CCDF on page 39 See Marker Peak List on page 41 CALCulate STATistics RESult lt t gt lt ResultType gt This command queries the results of a CCDF or ADP measurement for a specific trace Parameters lt ResultType gt MEAN Average RMS power in dBm measured during the measure ment time PEAK Peak power in dBm measured during the measurement time CFACtor Determined crest factor ratio of peak power to average power in dB ALL Results of all three measurements mentioned before separated by commas lt mean power gt lt peak power gt lt crest factor gt Analysis Example CALC STAT RES2 ALL Reads out the three measurement results of trace 2 Example of answer string 5 56 19 25 13 69 i e mean power 5 56 dBm peak power 19 25 dBm crest factor 13 69 dB Usage Query only Manual operation See CCDF on page 39
255. l codes Scrambling codes Each base station uses a unique scrambling code The mobile station can only demod ulate the base station signal if it knows which scrambling code was used by the base station Thus in order to demodulate the data in the 3GPP FDD applications you must either specify the scrambling code explicitely or the application can perform an automatic search to detect the scrambling code itself Channels codes and symbol rate In signals according to the 3GPP FDD standard the data is transmitted in channels These channels are based on orthogonal codes and can have different data rates The data rate depends on the used modulation type and the spreading factor of the chan nel Spreading factors Spreading factors determine whether the transmitted data is sent in short or long sequences The spreading factor is re assigned dynamically in certain time intervals according to the current demand of users and data to be transmitted The higher the spreading factor the lower the data rate the lower the spreading factor the higher the data rate The smallest available spreading factor is 4 the largest is 512 So we can say that the code domain consists of 512 basic codes A channel with a lower spreading factor con sists of several combined codes That means a channel can be described by its num ber and its spreading factor The following table shows the relationship between the code class the spreading fac tor th
256. lass of channel 1 I mapped Range 2 to 9 Number of active channels Range 1to7 pilot length of channel DPCCH Code class of channel 1 I mapped Range 2 to 9 Number of active channels Range 1to7 pilot length of channel DPCCH Measured relative code domain power values of channel 1 Measured relative code domain power values of channel 2 Measured relative code domain power values of channel 3 Measured relative code domain power values of channel 4 Measured relative code domain power values of channel 5 Measured relative code domain power values of channel 6 CONF WCDP MS CTAB DATA 8 0 0 5 1 0 00 4 1 1 0 1 0 00 4 1 0 0 1 0 00 The following channels are defined DPCCH and two data chan nels with 960 ksps UE application only See Channel Type on page 102 See Channel Number Ch SF on page 103 See Pilot Bits on page 103 See CDP Relative on page 103 See Status on page 103 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA HSDPcch State This command activates or deactivates the HS DPCCH entry in a predefined channel table Parameters State RST ON Example CONF WCDP MS CTAB DATA HSDP ON Mode UE application only CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle EDATa lt CodeClass gt lt NoActChan gt This command defines the values for an E DPCCH channel in the selected channel table The channel table must be selected using the command CONFigure WCDPo
257. ltered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center frequency is set to 0 Hz the real baseband signal is dis played without down conversion Real Baseband Q If a center frequency greater than 0 Hz is set the input signal is down converted with the center frequency Low IF Q Remote command INPut IQ TYPE on page 180 Input configuration Defines whether the input is provided as a differential signal via all 4 Analog Baseband connectors or as a plain I Q signal via 2 simple ended lines Note Both single ended and differential probes are supported as input however since only one connector is occupied by a probe the Single ended setting must be used for all probes Differential Q and inverse I Q data Single Ended l Q data only Remote command INPut IQ BALanced STATe on page 179 Center Frequency Defines the center frequency for analog baseband input For real type baseband input I or Q only the center frequency is always 0 Hz R amp S FSW K72 K73 Configuration Note If the analysis bandwidth to either side of the defined center frequency exceeds the minimum frequency 0 Hz or the maximum frequency 40 MHz 80 MHz an error is displayed In this case adjust the center frequency or the analysis bandwidth Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 186 Probe Settings Probes are configured in a separate tab on the Input dialog box which is displayed when you
258. luded in special data channels defined by the 3GPP standard which use fixed codes in the code domain Thus they can be detected easily by the receiver The Primary Common Control Physical Channel PCCPCH must always be contained in the signal As the name implies it is responsible for common control of the channels during transmission The Synchronization Channel SCH is a time reference and responsible for synchro nizing the individual channels Another important channel is the Common Pilot Channel CPICH which continuously transmits the sender s scrambling code This channel is used to identify the sender but also as a reference in 3GPP FDD signal measurements The user data is contained in the Dedicated Physical Channel DPCH More details on channel types are provided in chapter 4 2 BTS Channel Types on page 46 Chips frames and slots The user data is spread across the available bandwidth using the spreading factor before transmission The spreaded bits are referred to as chips A time span of 10 ms is also known as a frame A frame is a basic time unit in the transmission process Each frame is divided into 15 time slots Various channel parameters are put in relation to frames or the individual slots in the 3GPP standard as well as some measurement results for 3GPP FDD signals A slot contains 2560 chips Channel slots versus CPICH slots The time slots of the individual channels may not be absolutely synchr
259. m MAXimum NEXT ssssessesssssseseenene nennen nnnm ennt nsn nnns nitens nnn 275 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGH c ccceesceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeeeneeseeaeeeeeeneeeteaee 275 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimumf PEAK essent nennen nnns 275 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum NEXT ccceccceeeeeceeceeneeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeeseaeeseseaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeas CALCulate n DELTamarker m MlINimum RIGHE eeseesessesessissseseeeeeee nennen nennen ea CALCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK esee CALCulatesn gt DEL Tamarkersms X etii cesi entries tta ret e oti cosa Rove Tuc xs aE eese xS ap EE daB RARE 270 CALCGulatesn DELTamarkersmo XRELaltiVe ceci terne erie irc lenis aden eres eae de 271 CAL Culatesns DELTamatkersimo Y preci eic tet etse pne ec resp ep er boue dap ta eo 271 CALGulatesns DELTamarke rsm ESTATe siii iecore db a toubet intone ai aAa es E eI rd opum DP CAL Culatesn MARKers me AOREF ipte e geo get etre ote t EA rice n eds CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion CP Ch eeessessesssssesesessese eene eee nnn niai aia NEEE CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion PCCPch CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion TAERror RESUlt ccccecccececneeeseeaeeeee
260. main power measurements are performed as specified by the 3GPP standards A signal section of approximately 20 ms is recorded for analysis and then searched through to find the start of a 3GPP FDD frame If a frame start is found in the signal the code domain power analysis is performed for a complete frame starting from slot 0 The different evaluations are calculated from the captured I Q data set Therefore it is not necessary to start a new measurement in order to change the evalu ation The 3GPP FDD applications provide the peak code domain error measurement and composite EVM specified by the 3GPP standard as well as the code domain power measurement of assigned and unassigned codes The power can be displayed either for all channels in one slot or for one channel in all slots The composite constellation diagram of the entire signal can also be displayed In addition the symbols demodula ted in a slot their power and the determined bits or the symbol EVM can be displayed for an active channel The power of a code channel is always measured in relation to its symbol rate within the code domain It can be displayed either as absolute values or relative to the total signal or the CPICH channel By default the power relative to the CPICH channel is displayed The total power may vary depending on the slot since the power can be R amp S9FSW K72 K73 Measurements and Result Display controlled on a per slot basis The power in the CPICH chan
261. mand BTS measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 214 UE measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA on page 216 5 2 10 5 Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Conflict Indicates a code domain conflict between channel definitions e g overlapping chan nels Channel Details UE Measurements Channel details are configured in the Channel Table dialog box which is displayed when you select the New Copy or Edit buttons for a predefined channel table in the Channel Detection dialog box Channel Table Setting Name MyUplinkTable Comment UE tests Channel Type heel ia Mapping DPCCH Ree nywuese oF o O O0 0 0 0 9 0O0 LETTE HEL Bie PEINE c 104 Symbol Rate ote oar nd rd HD Eo te Re a Ed ced o ee 104 Channel Number Ch SE t roast eruere erii rri reed es 105 IGANG MR EE 105 Pilot BIES aee npn ere iet Le Erat re ele ea ig buste qe degeret beet 105 CDP lC M 105 SL CLE 105 Channel Type Type of channel For a list of possible channel types see chapter 4 2 BTS Channel Types on page 46 Remote command BTS measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 214 UE measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA on page 216 Symbol Rate Symbol rate at which the channel is transmitted 5 2 11 Code Domain A
262. mber and use a specific symbol rate by which they can be identified Control and synchronization channels The 3GPP FDD BTS application expects the following control and synchronization channels for the Code Domain Power measurements User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 46 BTS Channel Types Table 4 2 Common 3GPP FDD BTS control channels and their usage Channel type Description PSCH Primary Synchronization Channel The Primary Synchronization Channel is used to synchronize the signal in the case of SCH synchronization It is a non orthogonal channel Only the power of this channel is determined SSCH Secondary Synchronization Channel The Secondary Synchronization Channel is a non orthogonal channel Only the power of this channel is determined PCCPCH Primary Common Control Physical Channel The Primary Common Control Physical Channel is also used to synchronize the signal in the case of SCH synchronization It is expected at code class 8 and code number 1 SCCPCH Secondary Common Control Physical Channel The Secondary Common Control Physical Channel is a QPSK modulated channel without any pilot symbols In the 3GPP test models this channel can be found in code class 8 and code number 3 However the code class and code number need not be fixed and can vary For this reason the following rules are used to indicate the SCCPCH e Only one QPSK modulated channel without pilot symbols is detected and
263. me string Usage Query only 11 5 2 5 0 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup STATe Queries if the probe at the specified connector is active detected or not active not detected To switch the probe on i e activate input from the connector use INP SEL AIQ see INPut SELect on page 169 Suffix lt p gt 1 2 3 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values lt State gt DETected NDETected RST NDETected Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup TYPE Queries the type of the probe Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values lt Type gt String containing one of the following values None no probe detected active differential active single ended Usage Query only Configuring the Outputs Configuring trigger input output is described in chapter 11 5 4 2 Configuring the Trig ger Output on page 199 DIAGnoslicSERVICE NSONIIGB 2 ibana cua cota herbe De So age pae ae RE Cta ERR Ege A ER aged pa ERI SEERA 186 QUT PURIRI EEIBOQBBIS ineca inaina aaar tnercr chances nao Epp tn Sa natae ra pha eren eheu 186 11 5 3 11 5 3 1
264. measured and calculated results of the 3GPP FDD BTS code domain power measurement Retrieving Results Query parameters Measurement The parameter specifies the required evaluation method ACHannels Number of active channels ARCDerror relative code domain error averaged over all channels with mod ulation type 64QAM CDPabsolute code domain power absolute CDPRelative code domain power relative CERRor chip rate error CHANnel channel number CSLot channel slot number EVMPeak error vector magnitude peak EVMRms error vector magnitude RMS FERRor frequency error in Hz IOFFset imaginary part of the I Q offset IQIMbalance 1 Q imbalance IQOFfset 1 Q offset MACCuracy composite EVM MPIC average power of inactive channels MTYPe modulation type 2 QPSK 4 16 QAM 5 64 QAM 15 NONE PCDerror peak code domain error PSYMbol number of pilot bits PTOTal Retrieving Results total power QOFFset real part of the I Q offset RCDerror relative code domain error RHO rho value for every slot SRATe symbol rate TFRame trigger to frame TOFFset timing offset Example CALC MARK FUNC WCDP RES PTOT Usage Query only Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Code Domain Power on page 21 See Result Summary on page 30 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion WCDPower MS RESult Measurement This command queries the measured and calculated results of the 3GPP FDD UE code domain power measure
265. ment Retrieving Results Query parameters Measurement The parameter specifies the required evaluation method ACHannels Number of active channels CDPabsolute code domain power absolute CDPRelative code domain power relative CERRor chip rate error CHANnel channel number CMAPping Channel branch CSLot channel slot number EVMPeak error vector magnitude peak EVMRms error vector magnitude RMS FERRor frequency error in Hz IQIMbalance 1 Q imbalance IQOFfset 1 Q offset MACCuracy composite EVM MPIC average power of the inactive codes for the selected slot MTYPe modulation type BPSK I 0 BPSK Q 1 4PAM I 6 4PAM Q 7 NONE 15 PCDerror peak code domain error PSYMbol Number of pilot bits PTOTal total power RHO 11 9 2 Retrieving Results rho value for every slot SRATe symbol rate TFRame trigger to frame TOFFset timing offset Example CALC MARK FUNC WCDP MS RES PTOT Usage Query only Mode UE application only Manual operation See Code Domain Power on page 21 Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt The evaluation method selected by the LAY ADD WIND command also affects the results of the trace data query TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt see TRACecn DATA on page 255 Details on the returned trace data depending on the evaluation method are provided here For details on the graphical results of these evaluation methods see chapter 3 Meas ur
266. ments the branch to be evaluated can also be defined Evaluation Range Analysis Channel CH SF Range Slot Code Domain Settings Frame Branch Trace 5 Marker S 2 Select Branch for Wi Use Common Branch YES Branch Specifics for Frame To AMA Ze M rei enone aeeoa EA EEEO EEEE EEr AREA SENEN ETENEE EEEn 118 Branch UE measurements Only 2 cree erobert ete eren nerd Den aai 118 o e 118 L Selecting a Different Branch for a Window eee 119 Channel Selects a channel for the following evaluations CDP PWR RELATIVE ABSOLUTE POWER VS SLOT SYMBOL CONST SYMBOL EVM Enter a channel number and spreading factor separated by a decimal point The specified channel is selected and marked in red if active If no spreading factor is specified the code on the basis of the spreading factor 512 is marked For unused channels the code resulting from the conversion is marked Example Enter 5 128 Channel 5 is marked at spreading factor 128 30 ksps if the channel is active other wise code 20 at spreading factor 512 Remote command SENSe CDPower CODE on page 222 Slot Selects the slot for evaluation This affects the following evaluations see also chap ter 3 1 2 Evaluation Methods for Code Domain Analysis on page 18 e Code Domain Power e Peak Code Domain Error Evaluation Range Result Summary Composite Constellation Code Domain Error Po
267. mmon pilot channel CPICH is defined by a user defined posi tion instead of its default position Note this command is equivalent to the command SENSe CDPower UCPich STATe on page 285 for antenna 1 Suffix antenna 1 2 Antenna to be configured Parameters State 0 Standard configuration CPICH is always on channel 0 1 User defined configuration position defined using SENSe CDPower UCPich ANT antenna CODE on page 203 RST 0 Example SENS CDP CPIC ANT2 STAT 1 Mode BTS application only Manual operation See CPICH Mode on page 96 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements 11 5 7 SENSe CDPower STYPe Type This command selects the type of synchronization Parameters Type Example Mode Manual operation CPICh SCHannel CPICh Synchronization is carried out to CPICH For this type of syn chronization the CPICH must be available in the input signal SCHannel Synchronization is carried out without CPICh This type of syn chronization is required for test model 4 without CPICH RST CPICh SENS CDP STYP SCH BTS application only See Synchronization Type on page 95 Channel Detection The channel detection settings determine which channels are found in the input signal The commands for working with channel tables are described here When the channel type is required as a parameter by a remote command or provided as a res
268. mp S FSW B17 connection R amp S DiglConf version 2 20 360 86 Build 170 or higher is required Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements To return to the R amp S FSW application press any key on the front panel The R amp S FSW application is displayed with the Input Output menu regardless of which key was pressed For details on the R amp S DiglConf application see the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Inter face Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Manual Note If you close the R amp S DiglConf window using the Close icon the window is minimized not closed If you select the File gt Exit menu item in the R amp S DiglConf window the application is closed Note that in this case the settings are lost and the EX IQ BOX functionality is no longer available until you restart the application using the DiglConf softkey in the R amp S FSW once again Analog Baseband Input Settings The following settings and functions are available to provide input via the Analog Base band Interface R amp S FSW B71 in the applications that support it Input Source Power Sensor External Generator Probes Radio ege n om Input Settings External Mixer tO ode Input Config Digital IQ Swap I Q Analog Baseband Signal Path Analog BERI Center Frequency OHH For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and l Q Input User Manual
269. mposite Constellation Fig 3 5 Composite Constellation display for 3GPP FDD BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CCONst see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 230 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE 1 4 Composite EVM The Composite EVM evaluation displays the root mean square composite EVM modulation accuracy according to the 3GPP specification The square root is deter mined of the mean squared errors between the real and imaginary components of the received signal and an ideal reference signal EVM referenced to the total signal The error is averaged over all channels for individual slots The Composite EVM evalua tion covers the entire signal during the entire observation time N _ 2 gt 5 X EVM ays 9 100 N 22560 2 2j n 0 where EVMnus root mean square of the vector error of the composite signal Sh complex chip value of received signal Xn complex chip value of reference signal n index number for mean power calculation of received and reference signal N number of chips at each CPICH slot User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 23 R amp S9FSW K72 K73 Measurements and Result Display 3 Composite EVM Slot 0 Fig 3 6 CompositE EVM display for 3GPP FDD BTS measurements The measurement result consists of one composite EVM measurement value per slot In this case the measurement interval is the slot spacing of the CPICH timing offset of 0 chips refe
270. n automatic search for active DPCH channels through out the entire code domain The search is based on the presence of known symbol sequences pilot symbols in the despread symbols of a channel A data channel is considered to be active if the pilot symbols as specified by the 3GPP FDD standard are found at the end of each slot In this mode channels without or with incomplete pilot symbols are therefore not recognized as being active An exception to this rule is seen in the special channels PICH and SCCPCH which can be recognized as active in the automatic search mode although they do not contain pilot symbols Optionally all QPSK modulated channels can also be recog nized without pilot symbols see HSDPA UPA on page 63 In addition the channel must exceed a minimum power in order to be considered active see Inactive Channel Threshold BTS measurements only on page 98 In UE measurements a channel is considered to be active if a minimum signal noise ratio is maintained within the channel e Comparison with predefined channel tables The input signal is compared to a predefined channel table All channels that are included in the predefined channel table are considered to be active 4 2 BTS Channel Types The 3GPP FDD standard defines various BTS channel types Some channels are mandatory and must be contained in the signal as they have control or synchroniza tion functions Thus these channels always occupy a specific channel nu
271. n connectors refer to the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Front Rear Panel View chapters How to provide trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Output settings can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key or in the Outputs dia log box Output Output Digital IQ IF Video Output IF Out Frequency Noise Source Trigger 2 Trigger 3 MM Tues Ue EE 75 duet E P r 75 EX rod diuo TNNT M 76 D o PT 76 E Pulse Lengt uiro atre ta uto scrub ua EEEE AAEE 76 LSend TMOJE MED es pe aa aan 76 Noise Source Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of the R amp S FSW itself for example when measuring the noise level of a DUT Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce on page 186 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors where Trigger 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Trigger 3 TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FSW No further trigger parameters are available for the connector O
272. n interleaved complex sam ples for channel 0 channel 1 channel 2 etc If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is presumed Example Element order for real data 1 channel I 0 Real sample 0 I 1 Real sample 1 I 2 Real sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel I 0 Q 0 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 0 I 1 QOI 1 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 1 I 2 21 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex polar data 1 channel Mag 0 Phi 0 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 0 Mag 1 Phi l Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 1 Mag 2 Phi 2 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 3 channels Complex data I channel no time index Q channel no time index oT 0 GIO 0 Channel 0 Complex sample 0 1 0 Q 1 0 Channel 1 Complex sample 0 2 0 Q 2 0 Channel 2 Complex sample 0 0 1 Qf 0 1 Channel 0 Complex sample 1 1 1 Qf1 1 Channel 1 Complex sample 1 2 1 QI21 1 Channel 2 Complex sample 1 I Q Data Binary File I 0 2 Q 0 21 Channel 0 Complex sample 2 I 1 21 Q 11 2 Channel 1 Complex sample 2 T 2 2 Q 2 2 Channel 2 Complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel
273. n is avoided in your remote control programs Parameters Source Example IMMediate Free Run EXTernal Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector EXT2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input EXT3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input RFPower First intermediate frequency Frequency and time domain measurements only Not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 IFPower Second intermediate frequency For frequency and time domain measurements only Not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 For input from the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 this parameter is interpreted as BBPower for compatibility reasons TIME Time interval For frequency and time domain measurements only PSEN External power sensor For frequency and time domain measurements only GPO GP1 GP2 GP3 GP4 GP5 For applications that process I Q data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applications and only if the Digital Baseband Inter face R amp S FSW B17 is available Defines triggering of the measurement directly via the LVDS connector The parameter specifies which general purpose bit 0 to 5 will provide the trigger data The assignment of the gene
274. n page 113 The advantage of the RF Combi measurement is that all RF results are measured with a single measurement process This measurement is faster than the three individual measurements The RF Combi measurement is performed as in the Spectrum application with the fol lowing settings Table 5 7 Predefined settings for 3GGPP FDD RF Combi measurements Standard W CDMA 3GPP REV BTS W CDMA 3GPP FWD UE By default the Normal base station standard is used How ever you can switch to the Home base station standard using the BTS Standard softkey Number of adjacent channels 2 Span 25 5 MHz Detector RMS RBW 30 kHz Sweep time 100 ms CP ACLR Active on trace 1 OBW Active on trace 1 SEM Active on trace 2 To restore adapted measurement parameters the following parameters are saved on exiting and are restored on re entering this measurement e RBW VBW e Sweep time e Span e Number of adjacent channels 5 3 6 CCDF The CCDF measurement determines the distribution of the signal amplitudes comple mentary cumulative distribution function The CCDF measurement is performed as in the Spectrum application with the follow ing settings RF Measurements Table 5 8 Predefined settings for 3GPP FDD CCDF measurements CCDF Active on trace 1 Analysis bandwidth 10 MHz Number of samples 62500 VBW 5 MHz For further details about the CCDF measurements refer to
275. n page 264 CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP see CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESult on page 264 CALCulate LIMit k FAIL on page 263 CCDF The CCDF measurement determines the distribution of the signal amplitudes comple mentary cumulative distribution function The CCDF and the Crest factor are dis played For the purposes of this measurement a signal section of user definable length is recorded continuously in the zero span and the distribution of the signal amplitudes is evaluated mum EP EIN ae User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 39 R amp S FSW K72 K73 Measurements and Result Display CF 1 0 GHz Mean Pwr 20 00 dB 2 Result Summary Samples 624000 Mean Peak Crest 10 1 0 1 0 01 Trace 1 11 01 dBm 0 05 dBm 10 96 dB 3 68 dB 6 64 dB 8 28 dB 9 36 dB Fig 3 24 CCDF measurement results for 3GPP FDD BTS measurements Remote command CONF WCDP MEAS CCDF see CONFigure WCDPower BTS MEASurement on page 160 Querying results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 266 CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP see CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESult on page 264 CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP see CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESult on page 264 CALCulate STATistics RESult lt t gt on page 266 3 3 2 Evaluation Methods for RF Measurements The evaluation methods for RF measurements are identical to those in the Spectrum application Daa
276. n page 272 6 5 3 Marker Search Settings Several functions are available to set the marker to a specific position very quickly and easily In order to determine the required marker position searches may be performed The search results can be influenced by special settings These settings are available as softkeys in the Marker To menu or in the Search tab of the Marker dialog box To display this tab do one of the following N User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 126 Markers e Press the MKR key then select the Marker Config softkey Then select the hori zontal Search tab e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker Config tab Then select the horizontal Search tab Analysis Markers Marker Settings Search Range Code Domain Settings Trace Marker Sle 1 Code Domain Power Search Mode for Next Peak rere ete reuse eer roo cu eee rev er aee cu e 127 Search Mode for Next Peak Selects the search mode for the next peak search Left Determines the next maximum minimum to the left of the current peak Absolute Determines the next maximum minimum to either side of the current peak 6 5 4 Markers Right Determines the next maximum minimum to the right of the current peak Remote command CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum LEFT on page 275 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT on page 273 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum NEXT on page
277. n power results for a specific frame and slot Parameter Description Total Power The total signal power average power of total evaluated slot Carrier Freq Error The frequency error relative to the center frequency of the analyzer The absolute frequency error is the sum of the analyzer and DUT frequency error The specified value is averaged for one CPICH slot See also the note below this table Chip Rate Error The chip rate error in the frame to analyze in ppm As a result of a high chip rate error symbol errors arise and the CDP measurement is possibly not synchronized to the 3GPP FDD BTS signal The result is valid even if synchronization of the ana lyzer and signal failed Trigger to Frame The time difference between the beginning of the recorded signal section to the start of the analyzed frame In case of triggered data collection this difference is identical with the time difference of frame trigger trigger offset frame start If synchronization of the analyzer and input signal fails the value of Trigger to Frame is not significant IQ Offset DC offset of the signal in the selected slot in IQ Imbalance I Q imbalance of signals in the selected slot in 96 User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 16 R amp S9FSW K72 K73 Measurements and Result Display Parameter Description Avg Power Inact Average power of the inactive channels Chan Composite EVM The composite EVM is the diff
278. nal to noise ratio Note that the Reference Level value ignores the Shifting the Display Offset It is important to know the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel on page 189 Shifting the Display Offset Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespec tive of the selected unit The scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S FSW so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value Note however that the Reference Level value ignores the Reference Level Offset It is important to know the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle To determine the required offset consider the external attenuation or gain applied to the input signal A positive value indicates that an attenuation took place R amp S FSW increases the displayed power values a negative value indicates an external gain R amp S FSW decreases the displayed power values The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 190 Unit Reference Level For CDA measurements the unit should not be changed as this would lead to useless results Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements
279. nalysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Channel Number Ch SF Number of channel spreading code 0 to spreading factor 1 Remote command BTS measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 214 UE measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA on page 216 Mapping Branch onto which the channel is mapped I or Q The setting is not editable since the standard specifies the channel assignment for each channel Pilot Bits Number of pilot bits of the channel only valid for the control channel DPCCH Remote command BTS measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 214 UE measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA on page 216 CDP Relative Code domain power relative to the total power of the signal Remote command BTS measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 214 UE measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA on page 216 Status Indicates the channel status Codes that are not assigned are marked as inactive channels Remote command BTS measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 214 UE measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA on page 216 Sweep Settings The sweep settings define how the data is measured Continuous Sweep RUN CON T iret eae didn nee fot tede renati eres 106 Single Sweep RUN SINGLE ccccccccesecceceeteeeeeneeeeeeeeeeenaeeseeeeeesaaeeeseneeeseaeeseeneeeees 106 Continue Single Sweep
280. nches of the chip constellation at the selected slot are transferred lt Re1 gt lt Im1 gt lt Re2 gt lt Im2 gt lt Re2560 gt Im2560 The values are normalized to the square root of the average power at the selected slot Power vs Symbol When the trace data for this evaluation is queried the power of each symbol at the selected slot is transferred The values indicate the difference to the reference power in dB The number of the symbols depends on the spreading factor of the selected chan nel NOFSymbols 10 2 9 CodeClass Symbol Constellation When the trace data for this evaluation is queried the real and the imaginary branches are transferred lt Re o gt Imo lt Re gt Im lt Re gt Im The number of level values depends on the spreading factor Spreading factor Number of level values 512 5 256 10 128 20 64 40 16 160 8 320 4 640 11 9 2 11 11 9 2 12 Retrieving Results Symbol EVM When the trace data for this evaluation is queried the real and the imaginary branches are transferred lt Re o gt Imo Re lt Im gt lt Re gt Im The number of level values depends on the spreading factor Spreading factor Number of level values 512 5 256 10 128 20 64 40 32 80 16 160 8 320 4 640 Bitstream When the trace data for this evaluation is queried the
281. ncluded e Welcome to the 3GPP FDD Measurements Application Introduction to and getting familiar with the application e Measurements and Result Displays Details on supported measurements and their result types e Measurement Basics Background information on basic terms and principles in the context of the mea surement e Configuration Analysis A concise description of all functions and settings available to configure measure ments and analyze results with their corresponding remote control command e QData Import and Export Description of general functions to import and export raw I Q measurement data e Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Hints and tips on how to handle errors and optimize the test setup e How to Perform Measurements in 3GPP FDD Applications The basic procedure to perform each measurement and step by step instructions for more complex tasks or alternative methods e Measurement Examples Detailed measurement examples to guide you through typical measurement sce narios and allow you to try out the application immediately e Remote Commands for 3GPP FDD Measurements Remote commands required to configure and perform 3GPP FDD measurements in a remote environment sorted by tasks Commands required to set up the environment or to perform common tasks on the instrument are provided in the main R amp S FSW User Manual Programming examples demonstrate the use of many commands and can usually be executed dire
282. nd for an acti vated Bitstream evaluation see chapter 11 9 2 Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt on page 247 The only difference is the number of symbols which are evaluated The ABITst ream parameter evaluates all symbols of one entire frame vs only one slot for TRAC DATA TRAC The values 7 and 8 are only used in case of a varying modulation type of an HS PDSCH channel In this case the number of bits per symbol NBitPerSymb varies as well However the length of the transmitted bit vector NBit depends only on the maxi mum number of bits per symbol in that frame Thus if the modulation type changes throughout the frame this will not influence the number of bits being transmitted see examples below Example LAY REPL 2 XTIM CDP BSTReam Sets the evaluation for window 2 to bit stream TRAC2 DATA ABITstream Returns the bit streams of all 15 slots in window 2 one after the other Usage Query only Manual operation See Bitstream on page 18 Examples for bits 7 and 8 for changing modulation types Example 1 Some slots of the frame are 64QAM modulated other are 16QAM and QPSK modula ted and some are switched OFF NONE If one or more slots of the frame are 64QAM modulated six bits per symbol are transmitted and if the highest modulation order is 16QAM four bits per symbol are transmitted In any slot of the frame with lower order modulation the first two or four of the four or six bits are
283. nd turns the preamplifier on and off The command requires option R amp S FSW B24 This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 For R amp S FSW 26 or higher models the input signal is amplified by 30 dB if the pream plifier is activated For R amp S FSW 8 or 13 models the preamplification is defined by INPut GAIN VALue Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP GAIN STAT ON Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preamplifier option B24 on page 82 11 5 3 3 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements INPut GAIN VALue Gain This command selects the preamplification level if the preamplifier is activated INP GAIN STAT ON see INPut GAIN STATe on page 190 The command requires option R amp S FSW B24 Parameters Gain 15 dB 30 dB The availability of preamplification levels depends on the R amp S FSW model R amp S FSW8 13 15dB and 30 dB R amp S FSW26 or higher 30 dB All other values are rounded to the nearest of these two RST OFF Example INP GAIN VAL 30 Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preamplifier option B24 on page 82 Configuring the Attenuation INPutATTenballor 2 eic a Ree atehiadeandoducade ac cndadeaescal adesdneddaadesioande 191 INPHEATTen atlonAETQ aic cudi nennir c patur Fe
284. ne an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S FSW so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value Note however that the Reference Level value ignores the Reference Level Offset It is important to know the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle To determine the required offset consider the external attenuation or gain applied to the input signal A positive value indicates that an attenuation took place R amp S FSW increases the displayed power values a negative value indicates an external gain R amp S FSW decreases the displayed power values The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 190 Unit Reference Level For CDA measurements the unit should not be changed as this would lead to useless results Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Reference Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier for analog baseband input the full scale level are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression clipping and overload conditions are minimized In order to do so a level measurement is performed to determine the optimal reference level This function is only available for the MSRA MS
285. nel on the other hand is constant in all slots For all measurements performed in a slot of a selected channel bits symbols symbol power EVM the actual slot spacing of the channel is taken as a basis rather than the CPICH slots The time reference for the start of a slot is the CPICH slot If code chan nels contain a timing offset the start of a specific slot of the channel differs from the start of the reference channel CPICH Thus the power per channel display may not be correct If channels with a timing offset contain a power control circuit the channel power versus time display may provide better results The composite EVM peak code domain error and composite constellation measure ments are always referenced to the total signal Remote command CONF WCDP MEAS WCDP see CONFigure WCDPower BTS MEASurement on page 160 3 1 1 Code Domain Parameters Two different types of measurement results are determined and displayed in the Result Summary global results and channel results for the selected channel The number of the CPICH slot at which the measurement is performed is indicated globally for the measurement in the channel bar The spreading code of the selected channel is indicated with the channel number in the channel bar and above the channel specific results in the Result Summary In the Channel Table the analysis results for all active channels are displayed Table 3 1 General code domai
286. nel Details BTS Measurements ssssssssssse eene 101 Channel Details UE Measurements sssssssssseee eee eene 104 Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements 5 2 11 SWEEP Settings renard aeree Rape rok bue PEL Len ud iiaia a Re deck ga 105 5 2 12 Automatic Settings sssssssssssssseeeeneen eene mener nennen nnn 107 5 2139 Zoom FUNCIONS eis dri di ree a tape ea gp re rn Le AE OEE ERR UR La RERE Fu Lan REL 109 5 2 1 Default Settings for Code Domain Analysis When you activate a 3GPP FDD application the first time a set of parameters is passed on from the currently active application e center frequency and frequency offset e reference level and reference level offset e attenuation e Signal source and digital I Q input settings e input coupling e YIG filter state After initial setup the parameters for the measurement channel are stored upon exiting and restored upon re entering the channel Thus you can switch between applications quickly and easily Apart from these settings the following default settings are activated directly after a 3GPP FDD application is activated or after a Preset Channel The following default settings of the Code Domain Analysis are activated Table 5 1 Default settings for 3GPP FDD channels Parameter Value Digital standard W CDMA 3GPP FWD BTS measurements W CDMA 3GPP REV UE measurements Swe
287. nfiguration softkey ssssee 85 Frequency Error vs Slot I TS Ton C E Ataseens Trace results Frequency O ffSel ceca setae per RE OENAR NOTE Frontend Be Te E GM o TERRE TEL 78 Configuration remote sss 186 Full scale level Analog Baseband B71 remote control 179 180 Analog Baseband B1 er 84 PICS 71 Digital I Q remote 21272 173 Unit digital l G remote m ctt 173 Full slot EvalliatiOn ror m rere th 122 H Half slot Evaluatio M ion ror eter he ree prelo fa Senor ciega sep 122 Hardware settings CDABISplayed rci oren ETE E herpes 13 High pass filter Mino 168 SE IDIDU citet ese erp esege n EE RERE PR sr EROs cr dee 69 HS DPAVUBA ais aeneae inrer ent reete ren E eases 63 67 HS PDSCH Esci eC Hysteresis Lower Auto level sssse 109 Trigger Upper Auto level 109 l 1 Q data Export file binary data description Export file parameter description EXPONO rore odorem E Exporting remote rrr etes Im porng so uos eom RUE Importing remote Importing Exporting I Q imbalance m leue pm Em 1 Q Power Trigger level remote sees 196 IF Power Trigger softkey nieren pae Deane ETETE 90 Trigger level remote eese 196 Impedance REMO a
288. ng is ON For details see MIMO on page 64 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example SENS CDP MIMO ON Mode BTS application only 11 5 1 2 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Manual operation See MIMO on page 64 SENSe CDPower PCONtrol lt Position gt This command determines the power control measurement position An enhanced channel search is used to consider the properties of compressed mode channels Parameters lt Position gt SLOT PILot SLOT The slot power is averaged from the beginning of the slot to the end of the slot PILot The slot power is averaged from the beginning of the pilot sym bols of the previous slot to the beginning of the pilot symbols of the current slot RST PILot Example SENS CDP PCON SLOT Switch to power averaging from slot start to the end of the slot An enhanced channel search is used to consider the properties of compressed mode channels SENS CDP PCON PIL Switch to power averaging from the pilot symbols of the previous slot number to the start of the pilots of the displayed slot num ber The channel search only considers standard channels Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Compressed Mode on page 64 BTS Scrambling Code The scrambling code identifies the base station transmitting the signal in BTS meas urements SENSe CDPowerbCODe DVALUS rhet dente eR ee CER De an enu Page ERR ERE C ERAPR
289. nge and reference level position to be dis played for the current measurement settings in the currently selected window No new measurement is performed Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Auto Scale All Automatically determines the optimal range and reference level position to be dis played for the current measurement settings in all displayed diagrams No new mea surement is performed Restore Scale Window Restores the default scale settings in the currently selected window Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto Resets the measurement duration for automatic settings to the default value This function is only available for the MSRA MSRT Master not for the applications Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE on page 220 Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual This function allows you to change the measurement duration for automatic setting adjustments Enter the value in seconds This function is only available for the MSRA MSRT Master not for the applications Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE on page 220 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation on page 220 Upper Level Hysteresis When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can def
290. nly part of the syntax because of SCPI compli ance You can include them in the header or not Note that if an optional keyword has a numeric suffix and you need to use the suffix you have to include the optional keyword Otherwise the suffix of the missing keyword is assumed to be the value 1 Optional keywords are emphasized with square brackets Introduction Example Without a numeric suffix in the optional keyword SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as FREQuency CENTer With a numeric suffix in the optional keyword DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe DISPlay ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 1 no suffix DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 4 11 1 5 Alternative Keywords A vertical stroke indicates alternatives for a specific keyword You can use both key words to the same effect Example SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution In the short form without optional keywords BAND 1MHZ would have the same effect as BWID 1MHZ 11 1 6 SCPI Parameters Many commands feature one or more parameters If a command supports more than one parameter these are separated by a comma Example LAYout ADD WINDow Spectrum LEFT MTABle Parameters may have different forms of values e Numene Values ue cc cete boe dee ee a a a eue seb eden adia 153 ME e m METUIT 154 e GQCharscler DAA tero Dente eee tacet Erbe a AA EE EANA 155 e Character SWINGS seb cera
291. nneennnn nnnm nennen 228 Starting a Meas rement croire eiii eren ecu tenista ii nins 238 Retrieving Results oie ttenn scceetecesseateecessacteccedsavscteceseeseteeres 243 ANALYSIS p 267 Importing and Exporting I Q Data and Results eeeeeeee 276 Configuring the Application Data Range MSRA mode only 278 Querying the Status Registers eeesesseseseeeeeee esent nennen 280 Commands for Compatibility eeeeeeeeeeeeeneneenenen nnne nnns 282 Programming Examples R amp S FSW K723 eene 285 VQ Data File Format Itj Ear eese rra eruta e aeo nnn u o Exe aoro kd use 294 I Q Parameter XML File Specification eeeeseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 294 VQ Data Binary File eeeeeessseeeeeeeeenenennenen nennen nennen nnn nennt nnns nenne nnn nn 298 User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 4 About this Manual 1 Preface 1 1 About this Manual This 3GPP FDD User Manual provides all the information specific to the 3GPP FDD applications All general instrument functions and settings common to all applications and operating modes are described in the main R amp S FSW User Manual The main focus in this manual is on the measurement results and the tasks required to obtain them The following topics are i
292. ns application specific information about synchronization errors or errors during pilot symbol detection Table 11 9 Status error bits in STATus QUEStionable SYNC register for 3GPP FDD applications Bit Definition 0 Not used 1 Frame Sync failed This bit is set when synchronization is not possible within the application Possible reasons Incorrectly set frequency Incorrectly set level Incorrectly set scrambling code Incorrectly set values for Q INVERT or SIDE BAND INVERT Invalid signal at input Antenna 1 synchronization is not possible Time Alignment Error measurements 3GPP FDD BTS only 2 For Time Alignment Error measurements 3GPP FDD BTS only bit is set if antenna 2 syn chronization is not possible Otherwise not used 3to4 Not used Querying the Status Registers Bit Definition 5 Incorrect Pilot Symbol This bit is set when one or more of the received pilot symbols are not equal to the specified pilot symbols of the 3GPP standard Possible reasons e Incorrectly sent pilot symbols in the received frame e Low signal to noise ratio SNR of the W CDMA signal e One or more code channels has a significantly lower power level compared to the total power The incorrect pilots are detected in these channels because of low channel SNR e One or more channels are sent with high power ramping In slots with low relative power to total power the pilot symbols might be detected incorre
293. nt RST command are indicated as RST values if available e Default unit This is the unit used for numeric values if no other unit is provided with the parame ter e Manual operation User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 151 Introduction If the result of a remote command can also be achieved in manual operation a link to the description is inserted 11 1 2 Long and Short Form The keywords have a long and a short form You can use either the long or the short form but no other abbreviations of the keywords The short form is emphasized in upper case letters Note however that this emphasis only serves the purpose to distinguish the short from the long form in the manual For the instrument the case does not matter Example SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as SENS FREQ CENT 11 1 3 Numeric Suffixes Some keywords have a numeric suffix if the command can be applied to multiple instances of an object In that case the suffix selects a particular instance e g a mea surement window Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets n next to the keyword If you don t quote a suffix for keywords that support one a 1 is assumed Example DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe enables the zoom in a particular mea surement window selected by the suffix at WINDow DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON refers to window 4 11 1 4 Optional Keywords Some keywords are optional and are o
294. nt standard 3GPP WCDMA Reverse with predefined settings ESPectrum Measurement of spectrum emission mask WCDPower Code domain power measurement This selection has the same effect as command INSTrument SELect MWCD POWer Channel power measurement standard 3GPP WCDMA Reverse with predefined settings OBANdvwith OBWidth Measurement of occupied power bandwidth CCDF Measurement of complementary cumulative distribution function RST WCDPower Example CONF WCDP MS MEAS POW Mode UE application only Manual operation See Creating a New Channel Table from the Measured Signal Measure Table on page 101 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements 11 5 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Align ment Error Measurements The following commands are required to configure Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error measurements e Signal Description ener Eod tte ke re ELE rv LEER Eee ea b tack n ee EL TER ERR 162 e Configuring the Data Input and Oitput 2 iicet 167 e Frontend Conio ecn LC legc det tr eati Dane cot en eee ee 186 e Configuring Triggered Measurements cocinas to acetic ka keen 193 e Sighal Captuiliu 4 etic E tients eda mtn ee 201 e SSynchboritbzstloii psi canscaedencagaevadeasssaqusdashadoisdesSagnatiassapuayelabgahetsdasadeddeodeys ataelas 203 Chanel Detection E ce rr teg td e E ugs 205 LEE oo 218 JAutoratic SStlligs c erret aae ba
295. nu Up to 16 evaluation methods can be displayed simultaneously in separate windows The 3GPP FDD evaluation methods are described in chapter 3 1 2 Evaluation Meth ods for Code Domain Analysis on page 18 Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements To close the SmartGrid mode and restore the previous softkey menu select the 2 Close icon in the righthand corner of the toolbar or press any key on the front panel D For details on working with the SmartGrid see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual 5 2 Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements 3GPP FDD measurements require special applications on the R amp S FSW which you activate using the MODE key on the front panel When you activate a 3GPP FDD application the first time a set of parameters is passed on from the currently active application e center frequency and frequency offset e reference level and reference level offset e attenuation After initial setup the parameters for the measurement channel are stored upon exiting and restored upon re entering the channel Thus you can switch between applications quickly and easily When you activate a 3GPP FDD application Code Domain Analysis of the input signal is started automatically with the default configuration The Code Domain Analyzer menu is displayed and provides access to the most important configuration functions The Span Bandwidth Lines and Marker F
296. o Frame parameter in the Result Summary Window 2 changes Trigger to Frame 100 us Measurement 5 Measuring the Composite EVM The 3GPP specification defines the composite EVM measurement as the average square deviation of the total signal An ideal reference signal is generated from the demodulated data The test signal and the reference signal are compared with each other The square deviation yields the composite EVM Test setup 1 Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMU to the input of the R amp S FSW 2 Connect the reference input REF INPUT on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW to the reference input REF on the rear panel of the R amp S SMU coaxial cable with BNC connectors 3 Connect the external trigger input on the front panel of the R amp S FSW TRIGGER INPUT to the external trigger output on the front panel of the R amp S SMU TRIG OUT1 of PAR DATA Settings on the R amp S SMU 1 PRESET FREQ 2 2 1175 GHz LEVEL 0 dBm DIGITAL STD WCDMA 3GPP DIGITAL STD gt Set Default DIGITAL STD gt LINK DIRECTION gt UP REVERSE DIGITAL STD gt TEST MODELS gt DPCCH_DPDCH960ksps an o o A2 o m DIGITAL STD gt Select User Equipment gt UE 1 ON R amp S9FSW K72 K73 Measurement Examples 9 DIGITAL STD gt WCDMA 3GPP gt STATE ON Settings on the R amp S FSW 1 PRESET 2 MODE 3GPP FDD UE 3 AMPT Reference level 10 dBm 4 FREQ gt Center frequency 2 1175 GHz
297. o the CPICH frame start The value is measured in chips The step width is 256 chips in the case of code class 2 to 8 and 512 chips in the case of code class 9 Example TRAC2 DATA TRACEL Returns the trace data from trace 1 in window 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Code Domain Error Power on page 22 See Composite Constellation on page 22 See Composite EVM on page 23 See EVM vs Chip on page 24 See Mag Error vs Chip on page 25 See Peak Code Domain Error on page 27 See Phase Discontinuity vs Slot on page 27 See Phase Error vs Chip on page 28 See Power vs Symbol on page 30 See Result Summary on page 30 See Symbol Constellation on page 31 See Symbol EVM on page 31 See Symbol Magnitude Error on page 32 See Symbol Phase Error on page 32 R amp S FSW K72 K73 Remote Commands for 3GPP FDD Measurements TRACe lt n gt DATA ABITstream This command returns the bit streams of all 15 slots one after the other The output format may be REAL UINT or ASCII The number of bits of a 16QAM modulated chan nel is twice that of a QPSK modulated channel the number of bits of a 64QAM modu lated channel is three times that of a QPSK modulated channel This query is only available if the evaluation for the corresponding window is set to Bit stream using the LAY ADD WIND XTIM CDP BSTReam command see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 230 The output format is identical to that of the TRAC DATA TRAC comma
298. o use in the existing window See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 230 for a list of availa ble window types Example LAY REPL WIND 1 MTAB Replaces the result display in window 1 with a marker table LAYout SPLitter lt Index1 gt lt Index2 gt lt Position gt This command changes the position of a splitter and thus controls the size of the win dows on each side of the splitter As opposed to the DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE on page 229 command the LAYout SPLitter changes the size of all windows to either side of the splitter per manently it does not just maximize a single window temporarily Note that windows must have a certain minimum size If the position you define con flicts with the minimum size of any of the affected windows the command will not work but does not return an error R amp S FSW K72 K73 Remote Commands for 3GPP FDD Measurements y 100 x 100 y 100 1 01 GHz 102 12 dim x 0 y 0 x 100 Fig 11 1 SmartGrid coordinates for remote control of the splitters Parameters lt Index1 gt The index of one window the splitter controls Index2 The index of a window on the other side of the splitter Position New vertical or horizontal position of the splitter as a fraction of the screen area without channel and status bar and softkey menu The point of origin x 0 y 0 is in the lower left corner of the screen The end point x 100 y 100 is in the upper right cor ner of
299. oftkey R rii ote COhttOl ie orae ectetur Autosearch Channel detection 21 i ens aee tete 46 Scrambling code 2 AVETAQGE COUN ee Avg Power Inact Chan en nee treten 16 Aug RODE 15er dec De uel leds 16 B Bandwidth Coverage MSRA mode Menu Base station soe BIS seeded iie Gaii ibo de me 11 Base transceiver station SOC BTS cops buie esce e 11 Bitstream Eval atlon iot Deis eroe tl vearatveaatdaceestineese Parameter Trace results Branch Evaluation range sss 118 119 BIS sidus A nete 11 Standard ACER aeui iet erepta 112 C Capture Length eee te il entia c 94 Capture offset MSRA applications Remote nit SOftk6y noises Carrier frequency error Relationship to synchronization mode 17 CCDF 3GPP FDD resulls i iret netten 39 Configuration SGPP FDD 114 CDA 4 15 Analysis settings BTS 119 Analysis settings UE eee 121 Channel results siirsin ritenere oda 17 Configuring 1308 Configuring remote 162 Evaluation settings BTS remote 224 Evaluation settings UE remote 226 Parameters e e oen Sei duds 16 Performing 5e te eiae ret Dee e a PRIN tes 133 Res ults dc mte rete aee eee udo od 16 GDEP EP Evaluation Trace results CDP Channel parameter rne
300. on See Marker To PCCPCH on page 129 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 127 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 127 See Search Next Peak on page 128 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next lower peak The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 127 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 129 Analysis CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 127 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value Usage Event Manual operation
301. on Pilot Channel Table 11 4 UE channel types and their assignment to a numeric parameter value Description Dedicated Physical Data Channel Dedicated Physical Control Channel High Speed Dedicated Physical Control Channel Enhanced Dedicated Physical Control Channel Enhanced Dedicated Physical Data Channel Param Channel type 0 DPDCH 1 DPCCH 2 HS DPCCH 3 E DPCCH 4 E DPDCH e General Channel Detection e Managing Channel Tables e e e Configuring Channel Tables Configuring Channel Details BTS Measurements Configuring Channel Details UE Measurements 11 5 7 1 General Channel Detection The following commands configure how channels are detected in general Useful commands for general channel detection described elsewhere CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle STATe on page 208 CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle SELect on page 210 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle STATe on page 211 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle SELect on page 212 Remote commands exclusive to general channel detection CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle COMPare CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle TOFFset SENSe CDPower ICTReshold Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle COMPare State This command switches between normal predefined mode and predefined channel table compare mode In the compare mode a predefined channel table model can be com
302. on page 30 See Result Summary on page 30 See Symbol Constellation on page 31 See Symbol EVM on page 31 See Symbol Magnitude Error on page 32 See Symbol Phase Error on page 32 See Diagram on page 40 See Result Summary on page 41 See Marker Peak List on page 41 Table 11 6 lt WindowType gt parameter values for 3GPP FDD application Parameter value Window type BITStream Bitstream CCONst Composite Constellation CDPower Code Domain Power CDEPower Code Domain Error Power CEVM Composite EVM CTABle Channel Table EVMChip EVM vs Chip FESLot Frequency Error vs Slot MECHip Magnitude Error vs Chip MTABle Marker table PCDerror Peak Code Domain Error PDSLot Phase Discontinuity vs Slot PECHip Phase Error vs Chip PSLot Power vs Slot PSYMbol Power vs Symbol RSUMmary Result Summary Configuring the Result Display Parameter value Window type SCONst Symbol Constellation SEVM Symbol EVM SMERror Symbol Magnitude Error SPERror Symbol Phase Error LAYout CATalog WINDow This command queries the name and index of all active windows from top left to bot tom right The result is a comma separated list of values for each window with the syn tax lt WindowName_1 gt lt Windowlndex_1 gt lt WindowName_n gt lt Windowlndex_n gt Return values lt WindowName gt string Name of the window In the default state the name of the w
303. onous A time offset may occur so that the slots in a data channel are slightly shifted in relation to the CPICH slots for example In the 3GPP FDD BTS application the CPICH slot number is provided as a reference with the measurement settings in the channel bar In the Result Summary the actual slot number of the evaluated channel is indicated as the Channel Slot No Pilot symbols Some slots contain a fixed sequence of symbols referred to as pilot symbols These pilot symbols allow the receiver to identify a particular channel if the unique pilot sym bols can be detected in the input signal User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 45 R amp S FSW K72 K73 Measurement Basics ee Power control While the spreading factors are adjusted for each frame i e every 10 ms the power levels for transmission must be adapted to the current requirements such as interfer ence much more dynamically Thus power control bits are transmitted in each slot allowing for much higher change rates As the CPICH channel continuously transmits the same data the power level need not be adapted Thus the power control bits can lead to a timing offset between the CPICH slots and other channel slots 4 1 Channel Detection The 3GPP FDD applications provide two basic methods of detecting active channels e Automatic search using pilot sequences The application performs a
304. or details on these parameters see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 255 11 9 2 2 Channel Table When the trace data for this evaluation is queried 5 values are transmitted for each channel e the class e the channel number e the absolute level e the relative level e the timing offset For details on these parameters see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 255 Example The following example shows the results of a query for three channels with the follow ing configuration Channel Spreading factor Channel number Timing offset 1st 512 7 0 2nd 4 1 256 chips 3rd 128 255 2560 chips This yields the following result 9 7 40 20 0 2 1 40 20 256 7 255 40 20 2560 The channel order is the same as in the CDP diagram i e it depends on their position in the code domain of spreading factor 512 11 9 2 3 Code Domain Error Power When the trace data for this evaluation is queried 4 values are transmitted for each channel with code class 9 code class Highest code class of a downlink signal always set to 9 CC9 code number Code number of the evaluated CC9 channel 0 511 Retrieving Results CDEP Code domain error power value of the CC9 channel in dB channel flag Indicates whether the CC9 channel belongs to an assigned code channel 0b00 0d0 CC9 is inactive 0b01 0d1 CC9 channel belongs to an active code channel 0b11 0d3 CC9 channel belongs to an active code channel sent pilot symbols are incorrect
305. or example after evaluation changes have been made or if a new Sweep was performed from another application in this case only that application is updated automatically after data acquisition Note To update all active applications at once use the Refresh all function in the Sequencer menu Remote command INITiate REFResh on page 279 Sweep Average Count Defines the number of sweeps to be performed in the single sweep mode Values from 0 to 200000 are allowed If the values 0 or 1 are set one sweep is performed The sweep count is applied to all the traces in all diagrams If the trace modes Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set this value also deter mines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures In continuous sweep mode if sweep count 0 default averaging is performed over 10 sweeps For sweep count 1 no averaging maxhold or minhold operations are per formed Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 218 SENSe AVERage COUNt on page 218 5 2 12 Automatic Settings Some settings can be adjusted by the R amp S FSW automatically according to the current measurement settings In order to do so a measurement is performed The duration of this measurement can be defined automatically or manually To activate the automatic adjustment of a setting select the corresponding function in the AUTO SET menu or in the configuration dialog box for the setting where available MSRA operating mo
306. ording to the probe s attenuation and maximum allowed power RST 1V INP IQ FULL 0 5V See Full Scale Level Mode Value on page 84 INPut IQ TYPE lt DataType gt This command defines the format of the input signal Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Parameters lt DataType gt Example Manual operation IQIIIQ IQ The input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application Two input channels are required for each input signal one for the in phase component and one for the quadrature compo nent l The in phase component of the input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center fre quency is not 0 see SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 186 the in phase component of the input signal is down converted first Low IF I Q The quadrature component of the input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center fre quency is not 0 the quadrature component of the input signal is down converted first Low IF Q RST IQ INP IO TYPE Q See I Q Mode on page 73 CALibration AIQ DCOFfset Offset This command defines a DC offset of the input from the Analog Baseband interface R amp S FSW B71 Parameters Offset Example numeric value DC offset RST 0 Default unit V CAL AIQ DCOF I 0 001 CALibration AIQ DCOFfset Q Offset This
307. ort and Export Baseband signals mostly occur as so called complex baseband signals i e a signal representation that consists of two channels the in phase lI and the quadrature Q channel Such signals are referred to as l Q signals I Q signals are useful because the specific RF or IF frequencies are not needed The complete modulation information and even distortion that originates from the RF IF or baseband domains can be ana lyzed in the I Q baseband Importing and exporting I Q signals is useful for various applications e Generating and saving I Q signals in an RF or baseband signal generator or in external software tools to analyze them with the R amp S FSW later e Capturing and saving I Q signals with an RF or baseband signal analyzer to ana lyze them with the R amp S FSW or an external software tool later As opposed to storing trace data which may be averaged or restricted to peak values l Q data is stored as it was captured without further processing The data is stored as complex values in 32 bit floating point format Multi channel data is not supported The l Q data is stored in a format with the file extension ig tar For a detailed description see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and l Q Input User Manual Export only in MSRA mode In MSRA mode I Q data can only be exported to other applications I Q data cannot be imported to the MSRA Master or any MSRA applications e ImporUEXxport Pulgellons e te etn t ver n
308. ossible values are 0 to 255 Remote command SENSe CDPower UCPich ANT lt antenna gt CODE on page 203 S CPICH Antenna Pattern Defines the pattern used for evaluation Remote command SENSe CDPower UCPich ANT antenna PATTern on page 204 5 2 10 Channel Detection The channel detection settings determine which channels are found in the input signal 5 2 10 1 Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Inactive Channel Threshold 60 0 dB Pre Compare Meas Signal with Predefined Table Show Timing Offset General Channel Detection SettingS cccccceceeececeeeceeeeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeeseceeeseaeeenas 97 Channel Table Manageteglit cioe erre ccrte ette ette eere 99 Channel Table Settings and Functions c ccccccecsseeeceeeeeceeeeeseeeeeteeeeseaeeeeens 100 Channel Details BTS Measurements sess 101 Channel Details UE Measurements orris ceniti enne 104 General Channel Detection Settings Channel detection settings are configured in the Channel Detection dialog box which is displayed when you select the Channel Detection button in the configuration Over view Inactive Channel Threshold 60 0 dB Predefined Channel Tables Use Predefined Channel Table Predefined mAutosearch Compare Meas Signal with Predefined Table On Show Timing Offset Predefined Tables EN 3GB_1_16 Delete Inactive Channel Threshold BTS measurem
309. ower Display For Code Domain Power evaluation Defines whether the absolute power or the power relative to the chosen reference is displayed TOT Relative to the total signal power CPICH Relative to the power of the CPICH Remote command SENSe CDPower PDISplay on page 225 SENSe CDPower PREFerence on page 225 Show Difference to Previous Slot For Power vs Slot evaluation 6 3 Code Domain Analysis Settings UE Measurements If enabled the slot power difference between the current slot and the previous slot is displayed in the Power vs Slot evaluation Remote command SENSe CDPower PDIFf on page 225 Constellation Parameter B For Bitstream evaluation Defines the constellation parameter B According to 3GPP specification the mapping of 16QAM symbols to an assigned bitstream depends on the constellation parameter B This parameter can be adjusted to decide which bit mapping should be used for bit stream evaluation Remote command SENSe CDPower CPB on page 224 Code Domain Analysis Settings UE Measurements Some evaluations provide further settings for the results The settings for UE measure ments are described here Analysis Code Domain Analyzer Common Range Eliminate DC Offset Code Domain Settin gs Code Domain Power oe GR EEVA Absolute WREE Trace Power Reference TOT CPICH Marker Show Difference to Previous Slot Bitstream Constellation Parameter
310. p size for the center frequency Enter the step size in the Value field Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 187 5 2 6 Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Frequency Offset Shifts the displayed frequency range along the x axis by the defined offset This parameter has no effect on the R amp S FSW hardware or on the captured data or on data processing It is simply a manipulation of the final results in which absolute fre quency values are displayed Thus the x axis of a spectrum display is shifted by a constant offset if it shows absolute frequencies but not if it shows frequencies relative to the signal s center frequency A frequency offset can be used to correct the display of a signal that is slightly distorted by the measurement setup for example The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is 0 Hz Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 188 Trigger Settings Trigger settings determine when the input signal is measured Trigger settings can be configured via the TRIG key or in the Trigger dialog box which is displayed when you select the Trigger button in the Overview Trigger Source Trigger In Out Source Free Run Drop Out Time Offset 0 0 s J Slope Rising Falling Hysteresis Holdoff External triggers from one of the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the R amp S FSW are configured in a separ
311. pared with the measurement in respect to power pilot length and timing offset of the active channels Comparision is a submode of predefined channel table measurement It only influen ces the measurement if the Channel Search Mode is set to Predefined see CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle STATe on page 208 If the compare mode is selected the power values pilot lengths and timing offsets are measured and are compared with the values from the predefined channel table The Timing Offset setting is disabled in this case The differences between the measured and the prede fined values are visualized in the corresponding columns of the CHANNEL TABLE evaluation see Channel Table on page 19 The following columns are displayed in the channel table e PilotL is the substraction of PilotLengthMeasured PilotLengthPredefined e PwrRel is the substraction of PowerRelMeasured PowerRelPredefined e T Offs is the substraction of TimingOffsetMeasured TimingOffsetPredefined For non active channels dashes are shown Parameters State ON OFF ON predefined channel table compare mode OFF normal predefined mode RST OFF Example CONF WCDP CTAB COMP ON Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Comparing the Measurement Signal with the Predefined Channel Table on page 99 CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle TOFFset Mode This command specifies whether the timing offset and pilot length are measured or if the values are tak
312. played Columns to be displayed Chan Type CH SF Power Abs Toffset Power Rel TFCI State PilotL Js Show Inactive Channels By default only active channels are displayed In order to display all channels includ ing the inactive ones enable the Show Inactive Channels option The following parameters of the detected channels are determined by the CDP mea surement and can be displayed in the Channel Table evaluation For details see chap ter 3 1 1 Code Domain Parameters on page 16 User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 20 R amp S FSW K72 K73 Measurements and Result Display Table 3 4 Code domain power results in the channel table Label Description Chan Type Type of channel active channels only Ch SF Number of channel spreading code 0 to spreading factor 1 Symbol Rate ksps Symbol rate at which the channel is transmitted In BTS measurements always State Active channel is active and all pilot symbols are correct Inactive channel is not active Pilotf channel is active but pilot symbols incomplete or missing TFCI BTS measurements only Data channel uses TFCI symbols Mapping UE measurements only Branch the channel is mapped to I or Q PilotL Bits Number of pilot bits in the channel UE measurements only for control channel DPCCH Pwr Abs dBm Pwr Rel dBm Absolute and relative channel power referred to the CPICH or the total power of the signal
313. power of the peak within the range related to channel power Default unit dB lt Delta gt Power difference to margin power Default unit dB lt Limitcheck gt 0 1 Indicates whether the power is below 0 or above 1 the limit line lt Unused1 gt for future use lt Unused2 gt for future use Example TRAC2 DATA LIST Returns a list of SEM results for all slots in window 2 Usage Query only TRACe lt n gt DATA PWCDp This command returns the pilot length in addition to the values returned for TRACE lt t gt This command is only available for Code Domain Power or Channel Table evaluations see chapter 3 1 2 Evaluation Methods for Code Domain Analysis on page 18 Return values lt CodeClass gt 2 9 Code class of the channel lt ChannelNo gt 0 511 Code number of the channel Retrieving Results lt AbsLevel gt dBm Absolute level of the code channel at the selected channel slot lt RelLevel gt Relative level of the code channel at the selected channel slot referenced to CPICH or total power lt TimingOffset gt 0 38400 chips Timing offset of the code channel to the CPICH frame start The value is measured in chips The step width is 256 chips in the case of code class 2 to 8 and 512 chips in the case of code class 9 lt PilotLength gt 0 2 4 8 16 The length of the pilot symbols According to the 3GPP stand ard the pilot length range depends on the code class Default unit symbols E
314. put see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer User Manual RST RF Manual operation See Radio Frequency State on page 68 See Digital I Q Input State on page 70 See Analog Baseband Input State on page 73 Remote Commands for the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 The following commands are required to control the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 in a remote environment They are only available if this option is instal led Information on the STATus QUEStionable DIOQ register can be found in STA Tus QUEStionable DIQ Register on page 175 e Configuring Digital I Q Input and OUtpUt ccc eccsesseececessseeeeeesssseeecessseeeeeseeeas 171 STATuS QUEStonable DIQ Regisler 2 2 rrr t c eee teet ess 175 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Configuring Digital I Q Input and Output Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software always begin with SOURce EBOX Such commands are passed on from the R amp S FSW to the R amp S DiglConf automatically which then configures the R amp S EX IQ BOX via the USB connection All remote commands available for configuration via the R amp S DiglConf software are described in the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Manual Example 1 SOURce EBOX RST SOURCe EBOX IDN Result Rohde amp Schwarz DiglConf 02 05 4
315. r QPSK rrt rentrer rere tr Rn coh pene d EAE a XR creep DAD E EE Erg Fa un SENSe CDPower SBANd SENSe CDPower SFACtor SENSE CDPOWEf SLO D M SENSE CDPOWEr STYPE rnEeE E AEEA ENTE eres ey E EAT ETE SENSe CDPower UCPich ANT antenna CODE notre tent asara 203 SENSe CDPower UCPich ANT antenna PATTern essent nnne nennen 204 SENSe CDPower UCPICh ANT antennas S TATe ccu arena onn ran epa eerta ta renun 204 SENSe CDPower UCPich CODE SENSe CDPower UCPICh PAT TOM unciae tho tn err ena a Eiaeia e pr EYE RR eR ERE araia 285 SENSe GDPower UGPich STATE easi eo pee hene eee AN xy Hb Fee E E ner E ER AAEE 285 SENSe FREQUuency GEITr iiie rrt rr eth ente tr t hn Ga e e YER een ddl 186 SENSe FREQuency GENTet STEP tinent rn eter rena iere car RR Eh EP REESE SERERE Ere riani 187 SENSe EREQUuency CENTer S TEP AU Obs serre rap rare tn entes n ever t rt erue Ege RD IP IIR VE Dey eed 187 SENS ERSEQUency ORF Se bes utet om e E heiter E tr Dre vrai iners Pro lsemia OA SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet SENSe PROBesch SETup GMOPFfS6lt pre itd tpe rp ede er teo tta se ve ve cdd 182 SENSe PROBesp ID PARTR DGE icio a tek hcic ia eet oa ER ker Fo Fd Dee RR Cou uada 183 SENS6e PROBesps ID SRNUImbOE carrier rct eo reia RENEE NARESE Da STREG 183 SENSe PROBesp SE T p MODE nicioni a enden to eese peg Sue DA A 184 SENSe PROBesp SE T p
316. r EJ Open icon in the toolbar For details on importing and exporting I Q data see the R amp S FSW User Manual Default Settings for Code Domain Analysis sss 60 Config ration OVervieW ceterae ec n ese eek e brun EE ORE dead LE e RENS 61 SIle sz Bison E 62 BTS Signal DESCiptiOM si siinsete aa a aa nen nnns 63 BIS Scrambling Code uenen anae aAA AEA E da ustensdecahadanseadseateadeca 64 UE Signal Description UE Measurements sse enne 66 Data Input and Output Settings cercasse eene 67 Input Source Settings i1 deerit nint aie nA o keer aia cauto dua o RON ERR 67 Output Settings PR 75 Digital I Q Output Settings siensia aa a a 77 Fronend suse ee M 78 Amplitude Settings oe rete tete niea aee A gren ask a e MA LAE e RUD geri Rada 78 Amplitude Settings for Analog Baseband Input ssssssseseeees 82 VANS SCAM eee 84 Frogueney Solingen c 85 Migger Settings eI 87 Signal Capture Data Acquisition enne 93 Application Data MSRA sssssssssssss esee ener n herren nennen en 95 Synchronization BTS Measurements Only 95 Channel Detection eder edocet uu inuentum aic U eia demus 96 General Channel Detection Settings ssssssseeneenne ene 97 Channel Table Managerment ttt teure teile rte nb sa kr eee tienes 99 Channel Table Settings and Functions ssee ne 100 Chan
317. r Equipment gt UE 1 ON DIGITAL STD gt WCDMA 3GPP gt STATE ON o oo nu OP aA hb o N Settings on the R amp S FSW 1 PRESET MODE gt 3GPP FDD UE AMPT Reference level 0 dBm FREQ gt Center frequency 2 1175 GHz MEAS gt Spectrum Emission Mask o m F o N AMPT gt Scale Config gt Auto Scale Once Result The following results are displayed e Spectrum of the 3GPP FDD UE signal e Limitline defined in the standard e Information on limit line violations passed failed R amp S FSW K72 K73 Measurement Examples ESESEEEeEEeEEeEeEeEeEE E EEEEEEEEEEEE EEE ee Se 10 3 MultiView Spectrum 3G FDD UE Ref Level 0 00 dBm Mode Auto Sweep 1 Spectrum Emission Mask Rm Clr CF 2 1175 GHz 1001 pts 2 55 MHz Span 25 5 MHz 2 Result Summary W CDMA 3GPP UL Tx Power 0 98 dBm Tx Bandwidth 3 840 MHz RBW 1 000 MHz Range Low Range Up Frequency Power Abs Power Rel ALimit 50 MHz 3 500 MHz 1 N 79 43 dBm 80 15 dBm 41 95 dB 79 85 dBm 78 87 dB 30 77 dB 79 00 dBm 78 01 dB 29 01 dB Fig 10 2 Measurement Example 2 Determining the Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement 3 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power A code domain power measurement on one of the channel configurations is shown in the following Basic parameters of CDP analysis are changed to demonstrate the effects of values that are not adapted to the
318. r Measurements Parameters lt FileName gt Name of the new channel table Example CONF WCDP MS CTAB NAME NEW TAB Defines the channel table name to be copied CONF WCDP MS CTAB COPY CTAB 2 Copies channel table NEW TAB to CTAB 2 Mode UE application only Manual operation See Copying a Table on page 100 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DELete This command deletes the selected channel table The channel table to be deleted is selected with the command CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle NAME on page 213 Example CONF WCDP MS CTAB NAME NEW TAB Defines the channel table name to be deleted CONF WCDP MS CTAB DEL Mode UE application only Manual operation See Deleting a Table on page 100 CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle SELect lt FileName gt This command selects a predefined channel table file for comparison during channel detection Before using this command the RECENT channel table must be switched on first with the command CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle STATe on page 211 Parameters lt FileName gt RST RECENT Example CONF WCDP MS CTABl ON Switches the channel table on CONF WCDP CTAB MS SEL CTAB 1 Selects the predefined channel table CTAB 1 Mode UE application only Manual operation See Selecting a Table on page 99 11 5 7 3 Configuring Channel Tables Some general settings and functions are available when configuring a predefined channel
319. r in the Evaluation Range settings In the example above if you select the chan nel number 5 32 the sixth division on the scale with 16 codes per division is highligh ted For the display in the 3GPP FDD applications the scale for code based diagrams con tains 512 divisions one for each code The selected channel in the example 5 32 would thus correspond to codes 80 96 The division starts at 5 16 80 and is 16 codes wide If no spreading factor is given for the channel number the default factor 512 is assumed Channel number 5 would thus refer to the sixth division on the scale which is the sixth code in the code domain If the code belongs to a detected channel the entire channel is highlighted User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 R amp S FSW K72 K73 Measurement Basics If the selected channel is not active only the first code belonging to the corresponding division is highlighted In the example for the inactive channel number 5 32 the first code in the sixth division on the scale with 16 codes per division is highlighted That corresponds to code number 80 with the scale based on 512 divisions Special channels PCCPCH SCH CPICH DPCH In order to control the data transmission between the sender and the receiver specific symbol must be included in the transmitted data for example the scrambling code of the sender or the used spreading factor as well as synchronization data for different channels This data is inc
320. ral purpose bits used by the Digital IQ trigger to the LVDS connector pins is provided in Digital Q on page 89 RST IMMediate TRIG SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal 11 5 4 2 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Manual operation See Trigger Source on page 88 See Free Run on page 89 See External Trigger 1 2 3 on page 89 See Digital I O on page 89 See IF Power on page 90 TRIGger SEQuence TIME RINTerval Interval This command defines the repetition interval for the time trigger Parameters Interval 2 0 ms to 5000 Range 2ms to 5000s RST 1 0s Example TRIG SOUR TIME Selects the time trigger input for triggering TRIG TIME RINT 50 The sweep starts every 50 s Configuring the Trigger Output The following commands are required to send the trigger signal to one of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors The tasks for manual operation are described in Trigger 2 3 on page 75 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIR CHiON cececeeeceeeeeee eee ceeeeaeaea aa aa aaa aaa enne nnns nnns aiaa 199 OUTPut TRIGger port LE Vel 2 rco cer e deterrere aine aaan zuade 200 DOUTPuE TRIGGersport OTYDQ oie etant exe EE Ert runc Exe NEN der ed ense ERES RERERMERAPAR 200 OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe IMMediate esssssssssssssseseseenenenenn nennen nnne 200 ODTPut hRIGSersport PULSE LENG u
321. rea net rar n x dide 219 e Evaluaon RAN GC ah soceri ettet cetera ce et equo beta ga oerte ced ede dedo cid 222 e Code Domain Analysis Settings BTS Measurements sseusss 224 e Code Domain Analysis Settings UE Measurements ssssss 226 11 5 1 Signal Description The signal description provides information on the expected input signal cie n ilB cen E 162 e BIS Scrambling COdg oec rc ieee edo A o a 165 e UE Signal DeSCIDUODL cou nere cte E trie a uite eR RD ee eee 166 11 5 1 1 BTS Signal Description The following commands describe the input signal in BTS measurements SENSeJODPOWOTRAINTGIN ceto itera a REIR EA IRETE AERA 162 SENSe CDPower HSDPamode sessssssssssssssssssesese enne nnne paiaina iaaiiai 163 SENSe CDPower L CODe SEARch IMMediate essen 163 SENSe ICDPower ECODS SEARGIEL IST iie titer e eee en dene ed eds aca 164 SENSE TODPOWOEMIMO 2 2 retro rte eben eee De ene t en eau da e RE pH ERR Ru 164 SENSe CDPowWerPCONIrOl 2 renun inea araa iaia aodai paaie diik puaik An 165 SENSe CDPower ANTenna lt Mode gt This command activates or deactivates the antenna diversity mode and selects the antenna to be used Parameters lt Mode gt OFF 1 2 RST OFF Example CDP ANT 1 Mode BTS application only Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Manual operation Se
322. rement data Remote command BTS measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS MEASurement on page 160 UE measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS MEASurement on page 161 Sorting the Table Sorts the channel table entries Cancelling Configuration Closes the Channel Table dialog box without saving the changes Saving the Table Saves the changes to the table and closes the Channel Table dialog box 5 2 10 4 Channel Details BTS Measurements Channel details are configured in the Channel Table dialog box which is displayed when you select the New Copy or Edit buttons for a predefined channel table in the Channel Detection dialog box Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements channel Table Setting Add Channel Name MyTable Comment TestTable Delete Channel Measure Table Sort Table erm 102 ela M PRA 102 Channel Number Ch SF renti rano e ee ERR nne EE aia 103 SN Picci tag NEN 103 TIMING OffSOt iie arre tec E ed E 103 osi c E 103 GDP RAINO m 103 icc rs 103 eun 104 Channel Type Type of channel For a list of possible channel types see chapter 4 2 BTS Channel Types on page 46 Remote command BTS measurements CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 214 UE measurements CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle DATA on
323. rements as defined in the 3GPP FDD standard RF measurements are identical to the corresponding measurements in the base unit but configured according to the requirements of the 3GPP FDD standard For details on these measurements see the R amp S FSW User Manual MSRA operating mode RF measurements are not available in MSRA operating mode For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual 3 3 1 RF Measurement Types and Results The 3GPP FDD applications provide the following RF measurements Ch Powet AGLDR iiec deii tese etian c e te e tas ect tede pedit 36 Occupied Bangdwiclli er dte ederet rv uo i rade Fee ER eee adie meee 36 XO PROIECIT Um 36 User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 35 RF Measurements IK eale p 37 SpaecuumiEmissioniMask cine rt nir e ene en e t Ce dan a 38 eis e ER 39 Ch Power ACLR Channel Power ACLR performs an adjacent channel power measurement in the default setting according to 3GPP specifications adjacent channel leakage ratio The R amp S FSW measures the channel power and the relative power of the adjacent channels and of the alternate channels The results are displayed below the diagram Remote command CONF WCDP MEAS ACLR see CONFigure WCDPower BTS MEASurement on page 160 Querying results CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP see CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESul1t on pag
324. renced to the beginning of the frame Only the channels recognized as active are used to generate the ideal reference signal If an assigned channel is not recognized as active since pilot symbols are missing or incomplete the difference between the measurement and reference signal and the composite EVM is very high Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CEVM see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 230 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt 1 4 gt EVM vs Chip EVM vs Chip activates the Error Vector Magnitude EVM versus chip display The EVM is displayed for all chips of the selected slot Note In UE measurements if the measurement interval Halfslot is selected for eval uation 30 slots are displayed instead of the usual 15 see Measurement Interval on page 122 The EVM is calculated by the root of the square difference of received signal and refer ence signal The reference signal is estimated from the channel configuration of all active channels The EVM is related to the square root of the mean power of reference signal and given in percent EVM e100 N 2560 ke 0 1 where EVM vector error of the chip EVM of chip number k Sk complex chip value of received signal Xk complex chip value of reference signal k index number of the evaluated chip User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 24 R amp S FSW K72 K73 Measurements and Result Display N number of chips at each CPICH slot n index number for me
325. rious languages is also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html User Manuals User manuals are provided for the base unit and each additional firmware application The user manuals are available in PDF format in printable form on the Documenta tion CD ROM delivered with the instrument In the user manuals all instrument func tions are described in detail Furthermore they provide a complete description of the remote control commands with programming examples The user manual for the base unit provides basic information on operating the R amp S FSW in general and the Spectrum application in particular Furthermore the soft ware functions that enhance the basic functionality for various applications are descri bed here An introduction to remote control is provided as well as information on main tenance instrument interfaces and troubleshooting 1 3 1 3 1 Conventions Used in the Documentation In the individual application manuals the specific instrument functions of the applica tion are described in detail For additional information on default settings and parame ters refer to the data sheets Basic information on operating the R amp S FSW is not inclu ded in the application manuals All user manuals are also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www2
326. s GONFigure WCDPower BTS GI ABIe NAME 1er rt ren nr Genre d GONFigure WCDPowerEBTS GTABle SEL6Ct siti tt rt tre epe rnt rr ont eub tere oaa e kr ep eee bare nde GONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle TOFPFSet ettari roit enr terere nn e reno rina CONFigure WCDPower BTS CTABle STATe CONFigure WCDPowell BTS IMCARMER STATe ucnisi naa rin tain tinto rna od eek aane tna te nh pneu tuae Rosa pad GONFigure WCDPower BTS MEASuremernlt 5 rro tent rne raaa TEENE GONFigure WCDbPower BTS STB ttr tnnt nre rg reet m rere Eae eta i DIAGnostic SERVICe NSOUFCS Letti Te DR n Us ouk nid a dert nc UR Ado esce ema unt Fd sae su e Na NA siidryaBep it DISPlay MTABle rre mt rene ces hn dc er REEL KG e E EO e RT epa DISPlay WINDowsnP SIZE tactu nee oet pec nodes arc ee pectet cd docs doc dtr od iesu a A DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe AUTO ONCE ssssssesseeeeeeeenneneee nennen nere tnrennnnit 188 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe MAXimum essere nnne nnnm nnne trennen DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe MlNimum eeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeee nennen nennen DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision DISPlayEWINDow n TRAGe Y SCGALe RLIEVAl 2 ttr rtr eene DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet esssssssssseseeeeeeeenreeneennnnnee 190 DISPlayEWINDowsn TRAGe st
327. s each trace point in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves each trace point in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one Average The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Average Count determines the number of averaging pro cedures View The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed Blank Removes the selected trace from the display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 267 6 5 6 5 1 Markers Markers Markers help you analyze your measurement results by determining particular values in the diagram Thus you can extract numeric values from a graphical display Markers are configured in the Marker dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker tab e Press the MKR key then select the Marker Config softkey Markers in Code Domain Analysis measurements In Code Domain Analysis measurements the markers are set to individual symbols codes slots or channels depending on the result display Thus you can use the mark ers to identify individual codes for example individual Marker Settings rcr iret epar eR Erat rk eere EE 124 e General Marker Settings
328. s only available for Code Domain Power or Channel Table evaluations see chapter 3 1 2 Evaluation Methods for Code Domain Analysis on page 18 Return values lt CodeClass gt 2 9 Code class of the channel lt ChannelNo gt 0 511 Code number of the channel lt AbsLevel gt dBm Absolute level of the code channel at the selected channel slot lt RelLevel gt Relative level of the code channel at the selected channel slot referenced to CPICH or total power lt TimingOffset gt 0 38400 chips Timing offset of the code channel to the CPICH frame start The value is measured in chips The step width is 256 chips in the case of code class 2 to 8 and 512 chips in the case of code class 9 Retrieving Results lt PilotLength gt The length of the pilot symbols According to the 3GPP stand ard the pilot length range depends on the code class Range 0 2 4 8 16 Default unit symbols lt ActiveFlag gt 0 1 Flag to indicate whether a channel is active 1 or not 0 Example TRAC DATA CTABle Returns a list of channel information including the pilot length and channel state Usage Query only Manual operation See Channel Table on page 19 See Code Domain Power on page 21 TRACe lt n gt DATA CWCDp This command returns additional results to the values returned for TRACE lt t gt The result is a comma separated list with 10 values for each channel the channels are output in ascending order sort
329. s used to define the signal capture in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode see SENSe CDPower 1QLength on page 202 Be sure to select the correct mea surement channel before executing this command In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the application data for the 3GPP FDD BTS measurement The analysis interval used by the individual result displays cannot be edited but is determined automatically However you can query the currently used analysis interval for a specific window The analysis line is displayed by default but can be hidden or re positioned Remote commands exclusive to MSRA applications The following commands are only available for MSRA application channels GAEGulate MSRASALINe SHOW 22 3 mde oo rura a eoe naa Pe Ee Sag ea EN Po PRAE FA PGGRNE 278 GALGulate MSRAcALINS amp VALue iiin tnnc to nr n ton nte quon nnn ERR gane RR RERO EEEE 278 CAL Culate MSRA WINDOWS lt N gt IVAL ccccceccceceececeseececeaceceseaeeeeaseeecaaeeseseseesseeeeeeaneeeaes 279 INUTIate REFRES h ai e exe rne eae eet en ro ed et reet itv px OE RR 279 SENSe MSRA CAP T re OFF Sel 2 Grece see eta doti o seo ed eve deo ade duds 279 CALCulate MSRA ALINe SHOW This command defines whether or not the analysis line is displayed in all time based windows in all MSRA applications and the MSRA Master Note even if the analysis line display is off
330. scrambling code 4 Select the Input Frontend button and then the Frequency tab to define the input signal s center frequency 5 Optionally select the Trigger button and define a trigger for data acquisition for example an external trigger to start capturing data only when a useful signal is transmitted 6 Select the Signal Capture button and define the acquisition parameters for the input signal In MSRA mode define the application data instead see To select the application data for MSRA measurements on page 136 7T f necessary select the Synchronization button and change the channel synchro nization settings 8 Select the Channel Detection button and define how the individual channels are detected within the input signal If necessary define a channel table as described in To define or edit a channel table on page 134 9 Select the Display Config button and select the evaluation methods that are of interest to you Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences 10 Exit the SmartGrid mode and select the Overview softkey to display the Over view again 11 Select the Analysis button in the Overview to configure how the data is evalu ated in the individual result displays e Select the channel slot or frame to be evaluated e Configure specific settings for the selected evaluation method s e Optionally configure the trace to display the average over a series of sweeps If necessar
331. select the INPUT OUTPUT key and then Input Source Config Input Source Power Sensor Probes Probe I Name RT ZS30 Serial Number 1410 4309 02 3 2 Not Present Part Number 101241 Type Single Ended Microbutton Action For each possible probe connector Baseband Input Baseband Input Q the detec ted type of probe if any is displayed The following information is provided for each connected probe e Probe name e Serial number e R amp S part number e Type of probe Differential Single Ended For more information on using probes with an R amp S FSW see the R amp S FSW User Manual For general information on the R amp S9RTO probes see the device manuals Mictobutton ACH OR i uci erri ette c ote eec eti Saee eta de esee ed vote deed 74 Microbutton Action Active R amp S probes except for RT ZS10E have a configurable microbutton on the probe head By pressing this button you can perform an action on the instrument directly from the probe Select the action that you want to start from the probe Run single Starts one data acquisition No action Prevents unwanted actions due to unintended usage of the microbut ton Remote command SENSe PROBe p SETup MODE on page 184 User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 74 Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements 5 2 4 2 Output Settings The R amp S FSW can provide output to special connectors for other devices For details o
332. selected evaluation also affects the results of the trace data query see chap ter 11 9 2 Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt on page 247 Bilst e alm eeccecaea tete Re MUERE SH XRNRSURDANSERKRNCRASExKPe E A RE RARE NN ERE 18 parisien 19 L Table COGAN OO ss ensi Hecivitr rect dei LEO GI ED REDE FE Mio ERR ERE Io ud 20 Code Domain POWT pete ern eH ORE BRCSRR BKEE RR S aaa a A RAS QURE UA UR FEE TERN 21 Code Domain Error Power sssssssssesssess ener enne nnns nnne retentis sensns 22 Composite GConstellatiOlk 2 tte tt eter e nt dh unde Leto te etes 22 Composite pz 23 EVM e 24 Prequency Eror VS SOU ont bert c rtr tet c e c eto eeepc 25 Mag Error vs Chip ced secco ceci ota Ee aa 25 uc Table cnans caawatasuendeeysasucaaan yacdsen gaa ansbeneaavaskauaaennesaetaaeeaesadaas 26 Peak Gode Domain EMOT canina eraann aaa aeaa aiaa LA ERR SORA ERR RR Ya ci deca n 27 Phase Discontinutly velot conderet cr Dent eU ee det ai an ened us 27 xaci ysge mui 28 xol ERE 29 FONS VS SVImBOL rri bead be e tetee cx nein tun b pl ae e ode onde edis 30 Result Summary detener coudre EE Eae ie rens a inet ERR RA EE ES NE E ED RR Edda 30 SVMS Constellation Recreo Ud 31 SV IMDONE WM PEE 31 Symbol Magnitude ENO 2 deceret e ced ere ree teg Re c reet lie eee er Red 32 Symbol Phase EO E 32 Bitstream
333. selects the type of 3GPP FDD BTS base station tests Parameters Type ACLR ESPectrum WCDPower POWer OBANdwith CCDF RFCombi TAERror ACLR Adjacent channel power measurement standard 3GPP WCDMA Forward with predefined settings ESPectrum Measurement of spectrum emission mask WCDPower Code domain power measurement This selection has the same effect as command INSTrument SELect BWCD POWer Channel power measurement standard 3GPP WCDMA For ward with predefined settings OBANdwith OBWidth Measurement of occupied power bandwidth CCDF Measurement of complementary cumulative distribution function RFCombi Combined Adjacent Channel Power Ch Power ACLR measure ment with Occupied Bandwidth and Spectrum Emission Mask TAERror Time Alignment Error measurement RST OFF Example CONF WCDP MEAS POW Selecting a Measurement Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Result List on page 34 See Ch Power ACLR on page 36 See Occupied Bandwidth on page 36 See Power on page 36 See RF Combi on page 37 See Spectrum Emission Mask on page 38 See CCDF on page 39 See Creating a New Channel Table from the Measured Signal Measure Table on page 101 CONFigure WCDPower MS MEASurement Type This command selects the 3GPP FDD UE user equipment tests Parameters Type ACLR ESPectrum WCDPower POWer OBANdwith OBWidth CCDF ACLR Adjacent channel power measureme
334. several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one VIEW The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and dis played BLANk Hides the selected trace RST Trace 1 WRITe Trace 2 6 BLANk Example INIT CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode SWE COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16 DISP TRAC3 MODE WRIT Selects clear write mode for trace 3 INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the measure ment Manual operation See Trace Mode on page 123 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe State This command turns a trace on and off The measurement continues in the background Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 for TRACe1 0 for TRACe 2 to 6 Example DISP TRAC3 ON Usage SCPI confirmed Analysis 11 10 2 Markers 11 10 2 1 Markers help you analyze your measurement results by determining particular values in the diagram In 3GPP FDD applications only 4 markers per window can be config ured for Code Domain Analysis e Individual Marker Setllitjs c e om E or e e roe cenar coena end te data cid 269 e General Marker Settings roe cete reck Deinen sd ete retek ilte pe kDa agen ai 272 e Marker Search and Positioning Settings eene 272 Individual Marker Settings CALCulate n MARKer m STATe
335. size to the span Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example FREQ CENT STEP AUTO ON Activates the coupling of the step size to the span 11 5 3 2 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements SENSe FREQuency OFFSet Offset This command defines a frequency offset If this value is not 0 Hz the application assumes that the input signal was frequency shifted outside the application All results of type frequency will be corrected for this shift numerically by the application See also Frequency Offset on page 87 Note In MSRA mode the setting command is only available for the MSRA Master For MSRA applications only the query command is available Parameters Offset Range 100 GHz to 100 GHz RST 0 Hz Example FREQ OFFS 1GHZ Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Frequency Offset on page 87 Amplitude Settings The following commands are required to configure the amplitude settings in a remote environment Useful commands for amplitude settings described elsewhere INPut COUPling on page 168 INPut IMPedance on page 169 SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 222 Remote commands exclusive to amplitude settings DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe AUTO ONCE cececeeececeeeeeeeecaeaeaeaeeeeeeneeenenenes 188 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe MAXimum seeeseseeerennnn nennen 189 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe
336. st be contained in every channel table HSDPCCH The High Speed Dedicated Physical Control Channel for HS DCH is used to carry control information CQI ACK NACK for downlink high speed data chan nels HS DCH It is used in HSDPA signal setup The symbol rate is fixed to 15ksps The code allocation depends on the number of active DPCH The HS DPCCH can be switched on or off after the duration of 1 5 frame or 3 slots or 2ms Power control is applicable too EDPCCH The Enhanced Dedicated Physical Control Channel is used to carry control information for uplink high speed data channels EDPDCH It is used in HSUPA signal setup The symbol rate is fixed to 15ksps Other channels are optional and contain the user data to be transmitted A data chan nel is any channel that does not have a predefined channel number and symbol rate The following channel types can be detected by the 3GPP FDD UE application Table 4 7 Common 3GPP FDD UE data channels and their usage Channel type Description DPDCH The Dedicated Physical Data Channel is used to carry UPLINK data from the UE to the BS The code allocation depends on the total required symbol rate EDPDCH The Enhanced Dedicated Physical Data Channel is used to carry UPLINK data for high speed channels EDPDCH It is used in HSUPA signal setup The symbol rate and code allocation depends on the number of DPDCH and HS DPCCH 3GPP FDD BTS Test Models As specifi
337. stems The advantage of tar files is that the archived files inside the tar file are not changed not com pressed and thus it is possible to read the I Q data directly within the archive without the need to unpack untar the tar file first Contained files An ig tar file must contain the following files e Q parameter XML file e g xyz xm1 Contains meta information about the I Q data e g sample rate The filename can be defined freely but there must be only one single I Q parameter XML file inside an iq tar file e Q data binary file e g xyz complex f10oat32 Contains the binary I Q data of all channels There must be only one single I Q data binary file inside an iq tar file Optionally an iq tar file can contain the following file e Q preview XSLT file e g open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt Contains a stylesheet to display the I Q parameter XML file and a preview of the l Q data in a web browser A sample stylesheet is available at http www rohde schwarz com file open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt I Q Parameter XML File Specification The content of the I Q parameter XML file must comply with the XML schema RsIqTar xsd available at http www rohde schwarz com file RslqTar xsd In particular the order of the XML elements must be respected i e iq tar uses an ordered XML schema For your own implementation of the ig tar file format make sure to validate your XML file against the given
338. stores the entire instrument to its default values and thus closes all measurement channels on the R amp S FSW except for the default Spectrum application channel See chapter 5 2 1 Default Settings for Code Domain Analysis on page 60 for details Remote command SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute on page 159 Select Measurement Selects a different measurement to be performed See chapter 3 Measurements and Result Display on page 15 Specifics for The measurement channel may contain several windows for different results Thus the settings indicated in the Overview and configured in the dialog boxes vary depending on the selected window Select an active window from the Specifics for selection list that is displayed in the Overview and in all window specific configuration dialog boxes The Overview and dialog boxes are updated to indicate the settings for the selected window Signal Description The signal description provides information on the expected input signal Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements e BIS Si9gnalDescnbtol idus tee cene tarum reta eaaet abre pua erra E LEX RR ck ERR ev ode pe rae 63 e BIS5sScramblng Odg uun nen petri acer Meenas xt a dida 64 e UE Signal Description UE Measurements sss 66 5 2 3 1 BTS Signal Description The settings available to describe the input signal in BTS measurements are described here Signal Descr
339. t eeeeeeee eene nennen nnne nnn 274 CALCulate n MARKer m MlNimum PEAK cecinere nnne 274 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion CPICh eese nennen nn 274 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PCCPcCh eee nnns 274 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum LEFT eese nnns 275 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum NEXT eese enne nnns 275 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK eese 275 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum RIGHt eese eren 275 CAL Culatesm DELTamarkersmesMINIm m ibEF T 3 2 2 5 2 0 2 00 011r aiana 275 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum NEXT eese ener nnn nnns 276 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK cesses 276 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum RIGHt eese nnns 276 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CPICh This command sets the marker to channel 0 This command is only available in Code Domain Power and Code Domain Error Power evaluations Analysis Example CALC MARK FUNC CPIC Manual operation See Marker To CPICH on page 129 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion PCCPch This command sets the marker to the position of the PCCPCH This command is only available in code domain power and code domain error power evaluations Example CALC MARK FUNC PCCP Manual operati
340. t Parameters lt Separator gt COMMa Uses a comma as decimal separator e g 4 05 POINt Uses a point as decimal separator e g 4 05 RST RST has no effect on the decimal separator Default is POINt Example FORM DEXP DSEP POIN Sets the decimal point as separator Retrieving RF Results The following commands are required to retrieve the results of the 3GPP FDD RF measurements See also MMEMory STORe FINal on page 262 CALGUlatetIMIESKSSEAIES isivesececesas vezes dass vue ev evave was v cese sut aa dudo we ce eva s e xvca csv ev eee siga nests 263 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESUIt ccccccccccesceceseseeteseceecscesseeseesaaeees 264 CAL Culate lt n gt MARKEr lt m gt Y ccccccesceccsescceesececeascceseeseceeeececeaeceseaeeseaeececeaeceeseeeeseeees 266 CAL Gulate S TATIStics 4 ESulst 5 ee oreet aea radai aande ai a 266 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt FAIL This command queries the result of a limit check Note that for SEM measurements the limit line suffix lt k gt is irrelevant as only one spe cific SEM limit line is checked for the currently relevant power class To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INITiate CONTinuous on page 239 Return values lt Result gt 0 PASS 1 FAIL Example INIT WAI St
341. t x phase calculation of a complex value 1 Phase Error vs Chip Chip 2559 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PECHip see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 230 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE 1 4 Power vs Slot The Power vs Slot evaluation displays the power of the selected channel for each slot The power is displayed either absolute or relative to the total power of the signal or to the CPICH channel Note In UE measurements this evaluation is only available if the analysis mode Frame is selected see Capture Mode on page 94 If the measurement interval Halfslot is selected for evaluation 30 slots are displayed instead of the usual 15 see Measurement Interval on page 122 1 Power vs Slot LStot Fig 3 13 Power vs Slot Display for 3GPP FDD BTS measurements rum EP NNNM ACQUA NN I NUUS User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 29 R amp S FSW K72 K73 Measurements and Result Display ee pu UI MM M 9s If a timing offset of the selected channel in relation to the CPICH channel occurrs the power is calculated and displayed per channel slot as opposed to the Code Domain Power evaluation However for reference purposes the grid in the Power vs Slot dia gram indicates the CPICH slots The first CPICH slot is always slot 0 the grid and labels of the grid lines do not change Thus the channel slots may be shifted in the diagram grid The channel slot numbers are indicated within
342. t Maximum or currently used sample rate of the connected device in Hz depends on the used connection protocol version indica ted by lt SampleRateType gt parameter lt MaxTransferRate gt Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz lt ConnProtState gt State of the connection protocol which is used to identify the connected device Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt PRBSTestState gt State of the PRBS test Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt SampleRateType gt 0 Maximum sample rate is displayed 1 Current sample rate is displayed lt FullScaleLevel gt The level in dBm that should correspond to an I Q sample with the magnitude 1 if transferred from connected device If not available 9 97637 is returned Example INP DIQ CDEV Result 1 SMU200A 103634 Out A 70000000 100000000 Passed Not Started 0 0 Manual operation See Connected Instrument on page 71 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer AUTO State If enabled the digital input full scale level is automatically set to the value provided by the connected device if available This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband interface option R amp S FSW B17 is installed Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 71 INPut DIQ RANGe COUPIing State
343. t STATe State This command turns the mutliple zoom on and off Suffix zoom 1 4 Selects the zoom window If you turn off one of the zoom windows all subsequent zoom windows move up one position Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 110 See Restore Original Display on page 110 See Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 110 Starting a Measurement The measurement is started immediately when a 3GPP FDD application is activated however you can stop and start a new measurement any time ABORU MET A N GSS ANA UNNE 238 INiTateCONMEAS ia a aa A AN a 239 Nimate CONTIBIOBB cas eiue naaa aa ecu s aaaea aiii 239 INITiateE IMMegOIBIB crnan rnea Fe da seb AA ALEGE etta 240 INITiate SEQ WencerABORt cioe oso erit et ein esee de tired e end eodd 240 INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate eessssesssssssssesee esee nene nnn nennen sns nn isis en sonis dan 240 INITiate SEQuerneer MODE emet eei beth Rey a cita eR a aaa i aaaea aiaa 241 INI Tiate SEQuencerREFResh ALL coto rere eet ec eae coa ene ice 242 SYSTem SEQUOEFGGf raodo aa rede a RAN n DU R RED EAA EEA 242 ABORt This command aborts a current measurement and resets the trigger system To prevent overlapping execution of the subsequent command before the measure ment has been aborted successfully use the OPC or WAI command after ABOR and before the next command For
344. t Select User Equipment gt UE 1 ON o oo uoo A DIGITAL STD gt WCDMA 3GPP gt STATE ON Settings on the R amp S FSW 1 PRESET 2 MODE gt 3GPP FDD UE 3 AMPT gt Reference level 10 dBm 4 FREQ gt Center frequency 2 1175 GHz 5 Meas Config gt Signal Description gt Scrambling Code 0000 6 TRIG gt External Trigger 1 7 AMPT gt Scale Config gt Auto Scale Once Results The following is displayed e Window 1 Code domain power of signal channel configuration with 3 data chan nels on Q branch e Window 2 Result summery including the Trigger to Frame i e offset between trig ger event and start of 3GPP FDD UE frame MultiView Spectrum 3G FDD UE Ref Level 10 00dBm Freq 2 1175 GHz Channel 0 256 Q Power Relative Att TRG EXT1 1 Code Domain Power 20 dB Slot O Capture Frame cho 2 Result Summary General Results Frame 0 Slot 0 Fig 10 6 Measurement Example 4 Triggered Measurement of Relative Code Domain Power User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 145 0 10 5 Measurement 5 Measuring the Composite EVM The repetition rate of the measurement increases considerably compared to the repeti tion rate of a measurement without an external trigger Trigger Offset A delay of the trigger event referenced to the start of the 3GPP FDD UE frame can be compensated by modifying the trigger offset gt Setting on the R amp S FSW TRIG gt Trigger Offset 100 us The Trigger t
345. t Error Measurements ext reference signal EXT REF Frame Trigger Antenna 1 TX signal Combiner Antenna 2 TX signal Fig 3 20 Time Alignment Error Measurement setup Synchronization check There is a synchronization check for both antennas which must have the result Sync OK to ensure a proper TAE result With the messages No antenna 1 sync No antenna 2 sync and No sync synchronization problems are indicated separately for each antenna which can also be read remotely via bits 1 and 2 of the Sync status reg ister see chapter 11 13 Querying the Status Registers on page 280 Evaluation Methods For Time Alignment Error measurements the following evaluation methods are availa ble Result List Indicates the time delay in chips of the signal at antenna 2 relative to the signal at antenna 1 R amp S9FSW K72 K73 Measurements and Result Display MultiView Spectrum 3G FDD BTS Ref Level 0 00 dBm Freq 1 0 GHz Att 10 dB Time Alignment Error 108 9716 Chips Time delay of antenna 2 signal relative to antenna 1 signal Fig 3 21 Time Alignment Error display for 3GPP FDD BTS measurements Remote command CONF WCDP MEAS TAE see CONFigure WCDPower BTS MEASurement on page 160 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion TAERror RESult on page 243 3 3 RF Measurements In addition to the Code Domain Analysis measurements the 3GPP FDD applications also provide some RF measu
346. tanding the Display Information 2 Select the 3GPP FDD BTS or 3GPP FDD UE item The R amp S FSW opens a new measurement channel for the 3GPP FDD application A Code Domain Analysis measurement is started immediately with the default settings It can be configured in the 3GPP FDD Overview dialog box which is displayed when you select the Overview softkey from any menu see chapter 5 2 2 Configuration Overview on page 61 Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function When you activate an application a new measurement channel is created which deter mines the measurement settings for that application The same application can be acti vated with different measurement settings by creating several channels for the same application Only one measurement can be performed at any time namely the one in the currently active channel However in order to perform the configured measurements consecu tively a Sequencer function is provided If activated the measurements configured in the currently active channels are per formed one after the other in the order of the tabs The currently active measurement is indicated by a amp 9 symbol in the tab label The result displays of the individual channels are updated in the tabs including the MultiView as the measurements are per formed Sequential operation itself is independant of the currently displayed tab For details on the Sequencer function see the R amp S FSW User M
347. te patur aniani naaa porci r lob nda adus 192 INPUT 4e 192 INPUT EAT T AUTO T 192 IPP EEA T STA TB 52 11 2o dere rra ecc a anscadudsdedianads a a a aa a aa a naa a aeaa aE 193 INPut ATTenuation lt Attenuation gt This command defines the total attenuation for RF input If an electronic attenuator is available and active the command defines a mechanical attenuation see INPut EATT STATe on page 193 If you set the attenuation manually it is no longer coupled to the reference level but the reference level is coupled to the attenuation Thus if the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level This function is not available if the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is active Parameters lt Attenuation gt Range see data sheet Increment 5 dB RST 10 dB AUTO is set to ON Example INP ATT 30dB Defines a 30 dB attenuation and decouples the attenuation from the reference level Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 81 INPut ATTenuation AUTO State This command couples or decouples the attenuation to the reference level Thus when the reference level is changed the R amp S FSW determines the signal level for optimal internal d
348. that defines the marker position on the x axis Range The value range and unit depend on the measure ment and scale of the x axis Example CALC DELT X Outputs the absolute x value of delta marker 1 Manual operation See X value on page 125 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker or the fixed reference Example CALC DELT3 X REL Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or relative to the reference position Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INI Tiate CONTinuous on page 239 The unit depends on the application of the command Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker or the fixed reference Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end CALC DELT2 ON Switches on delta marker 2 CALC
349. the measurement and calculates the average after the average count has been reached Parameters lt AverageCount gt If you set a average count of 0 or 1 the application performs one single sweep in single sweep mode In continuous sweep mode if the average count is set to 0 a moving average over 10 sweeps is performed Range 0 to 200000 RST 0 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Sweep Average Count on page 107 SENSe SWEep COUNt lt SweepCount gt This command defines the number of sweeps that the application uses to average traces In case of continuous sweeps the application calculates the moving average over the average count In case of single sweep measurements the application stops the measurement and calculates the average after the average count has been reached Parameters lt SweepCount gt If you set a sweep count of 0 or 1 the R amp S FSW performs one single sweep in single sweep mode In continuous sweep mode if the sweep count is set to 0 a moving average over 10 sweeps is performed Range 0 to 200000 RST 0 Example SWE COUN 64 Sets the number of sweeps to 64 INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end 11 5 9 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Sweep Average Count on page 107 Automatic Settings QD MSRA operating mode In MSR
350. the power bars The selected slot is highlighted in the diagram Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PSLot see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 230 TRACe lt n gt DATA TPVSlot Power vs Symbol The Power vs Symbol evaluation shows the power over the symbol number for the selected channel and the selected slot The power is not averaged here The trace is drawn using a histogram line algorithm i e only vertical and horizontal lines no diago nal linear Interpolation polygon interpolation Surfaces are NOT filled 3 Power vs Symbol Symb 0 1 Symb Symb 9 Fig 3 14 Power vs Symbol display for 3GPP FDD BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PSYMbol see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 230 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE 1 4 Result Summary The Result Summary evaluation displays a list of measurement results on the screen For details see chapter 3 1 1 Code Domain Parameters on page 16 2 Result Summary Gi sults Frame 0 CPICH Slot 2 1 dBr Fig 3 15 Result Summary display for 3GPP FDD BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH RSUMmary See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 230 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE 1 4 CALCulate n MARKer cm FUNCtion WCDPower BTS RESult on page 243 um PEN ee User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 30 R amp S FSW K72 K73 Measurements and Result Display Symbol Constellation The Symbol Constellation evaluation shows all modulated signals of the select
351. the screen See figure 11 1 The direction in which the splitter is moved depends on the screen layout If the windows are positioned horizontally the splitter also moves horizontally If the windows are positioned vertically the splitter also moves vertically Range 0 to 100 Example LAY SPL 1 3 50 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Table to the center 50 of the screen i e in the fig ure above to the left Example LAY SPL 1 4 70 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Peak List towards the top 70 of the screen The following commands have the exact same effect as any combination of windows above and below the splitter moves the splitter vertically AY SPL 3 2 70 AY SPL 4 1 70 AY SPL 2 1 70 User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 234 Configuring the Result Display LAYout WINDow n ADD lt Direction gt lt WindowType gt This command adds a measurement window to the display Note that with this com mand the suffix n determines the existing window next to which the new window is added as opposed to LAYout ADD WINDow for which the existing window is defined by a parameter To replace an existing window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt REPLace command This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result Parameters Direction LEFT RIGHt ABOV
352. the selected slot is transferred The number of the symbols depends on the spreading factor of the selected channel NOFSymbols 10 2 9 CodeClass 11 9 3 Retrieving Trace Results The following commands describe how to retrieve the trace data from the CDA and Time Alignment Error measurements Note that for these measurements only 1 trace per window can be configured FORMat DATA TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 254 e TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE1 e TRACe lt n gt DATA ABITstream e TRACe lt n gt DATA ATRace1 e TRACe lt n gt DATA CTABle Retrieving Results e TRACe lt n gt DATA CWCDp e TRACe lt n gt DATA FINal1 e TRACe lt n gt DATA LIST e TRACe lt n gt DATA PWCDp e TRACe lt n gt DATA TPVSlot FORMat DATA lt Format gt This command selects the data format that is used for transmission of trace data from the R amp S FSW to the controlling computer Note that the command has no effect for data that you send to the R amp S FSW The R amp S FSW automatically recognizes the data it receives regardless of the format Parameters lt Format gt ASCii ASCii format separated by commas This format is almost always suitable regardless of the actual data format However the data is not as compact as other for mats may be REAL 32 32 bit IEEE 754 floating point numbers in the definite length block format In the Spectrum application the format setting REAL is used for the binary
353. they occur Status bar information Global instrument settings the instrument status and any irregularities are indicated in the status bar beneath the diagram Furthermore the progress of the current operation is displayed in the status bar Code Domain Analysis 3 Measurements and Result Display 3 1 The 3GPP FDD applications provide several different measurements for signals according to the 3GPP FDD standard The main and default measurement is Code Domain Analysis Furthermore a Time Alignment Error measurement is provided In addition to the code domain power measurements specified by the 3GPP standard the 3GPP FDD options offer measurements with predefined settings in the frequency domain e g RF power measurements Evaluation methods The captured and processed data for each measurement can be evaluated with vari ous different methods All evaluation methods available for the selected 3GPP FDD measurement are displayed in the evaluation bar in SmartGrid mode Evaluation range You can restrict evaluation to a specific channel frame or slot depending on the evalu ation method See chapter 6 1 Evaluation Range on page 116 e Code Domain Analysis rerit eee aeter eset ne redd Redes 15 e Time Alignment Error Measurements sssseeesseeee nennen 33 RF uut c Em 35 Code Domain Analysis The Code Domain Analysis measurement provides various evaluation methods and result diagrams The code do
354. thin the evaluated signal e Use special marker functions to calculate noise or a peak list e Configure a limit check to detect excessive deviations 7 Optionally export the trace data of the graphical evaluation results to a file a In the Traces tab of the Analysis dialog box switch to the Trace Export tab b Select Export Trace to ASCII File c Define a file name and storage location and select OK To select the application data for MSRA measurements In multi standard radio analysis you can analyze the data captured by the MSRA Mas ter in the 3GPP FDD BTS application Assuming you have detected a suspect area of the captured data in another application you would now like to analyze the same data in the 3GPP FDD BTS application 1 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for Code Domain Analysis 2 Select the Signal Capture button 3 Define the application data range as the Capture Length Frames You must determine the number of frames according to the following formula No of frames measurement time in seconds 10 ms time per frame Add an additional frame as the first frame may start before the suspect measure ment range 4 Define the starting point of the application data as the Capture offset The offset is calculated according to the following formula capture offset starting point for application starting point in capture buf fer 5 The analysis inter
355. tics that you need to know when working with SCPI commands are described here For a more complete description refer to the User Manual of the R amp S FSW Remote command examples Note that some remote command examples mentioned in this general introduction may not be supported by this particular application 11 1 1 Conventions used in Descriptions Note the following conventions used in the remote command descriptions e Command usage If not specified otherwise commands can be used both for setting and for querying parameters If a command can be used for setting or querying only or if it initiates an event the usage is stated explicitely e Parameter usage If not specified otherwise a parameter can be used to set a value and it is the result of a query Parameters required only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values e Conformity Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con firmed All commands used by the R amp S FSW follow the SCPI syntax rules e Asynchronous commands A command which does not automatically finish executing before the next com mand starts executing overlapping command is indicated as an Asynchronous command e Reset values RST Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrume
356. time 0 Remote command SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet on page 279 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors where Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Trigger 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Trigger 3 TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FSW No further trigger parameters are available for the connector Output The R amp S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 200 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection on page 199 Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FSW triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FSW is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote comm
357. tion only Thus a special QPSK based synchronization can be performed and the measurement therefore runs with optimized speed Do not enable this mode for signals that do not use QPSK modulation Remote command SENSe CDPower QPSK on page 166 Data Input and Output Settings The R amp S FSW can analyze signals from different input sources and provide various types of output such as noise or trigger signals aput oollrce SODtlije conce dtt n ec ec e ttt tedio ce eed dc reu F re Re 67 Output Settings sere rimi Erie edad et diate needs 75 e Digital GO Output Settil s iate t et E teen xa sce TT Input Source Settings The input source determines which data the R amp S FSW will analyze Input settings can be configured in the Input dialog box Some settings are also available in the Amplitude tab of the Amplitude dialog box Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Since the Digital I Q input and the Analog Baseband input use the same digital signal path both cannot be used simultaneously When one is activated established connec tions for the other are disconnected When the second input is deactivated connec tions to the first are re established This may cause a short delay in data transfer after Switching the input source e Radio Frequency Input reeeteeereee trennen nerit pente hne brune 68 e Digtal V O input Set NGS ize i tente terea tend decente tlt bodie cde 70
358. transmission of trace data For I Q data 8 bytes per sample are returned for this format set ting RST ASCII Example FORM REAL 32 Usage SCPI confirmed TRACe lt n gt DATA lt MeasMode gt This command queries the trace data from the measurement Depending on the selected measurement mode the results vary For a detailed description of the results see the individual commands Query parameters lt MeasMode gt ATRACE 1 ABITstream1 CTABLe CEVM CWCDp FINAL1 LIST PWCDp TPVSlot TRACE1 The data type defines which type of trace data is read Example TRAC DATA ATRACE Usage Query only Retrieving Results TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE1 This command returns the trace data Depending on the evaluation the trace data for mat varies The channels are output in a comma separated list in ascending order sorted by code number i e in the same sequence they are displayed on screen For details see chapter 11 9 2 Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt on page 247 Return values lt CodeClass gt 2 9 Code class of the channel lt ChannelNo gt 0 511 Code number of the channel lt AbsLevel gt dBm Absolute level of the code channel at the selected channel slot lt RelLevel gt Relative level of the code channel at the selected channel slot referenced to CPICH or total power lt TimingOffset gt 0 38400 chips Timing offset of the code channel t
359. ts Reference level sssssssssssseeeneeeenee 79 83 Updating FRESUIE display ia cocer oreet ne Tn einen ert Ee grt Ebo 107 Result display remote sssssess 279 Upper Level Hysteresis SSOftKBY creta ena e E ETNE en ERE TaS E 109 Use TFCI Chanrnel table orte or texere inta dep ear IRAren 103 BETIS 8 Ww W2ECD MA P Ei Window title bar information Windows Adding remote eo cete rear 230 Closing Femiole dtes 232 235 jerry uinea 62 Layout remote 283 Maximizing remote 229 Querying remote 232 Replacing remote 233 Splitting remote 229 Aypes remole eter tee eds 230 X X value Market srr 125 Y Y maximum Y minimum Scaling aeaiee annan e eE E EA 85 YIG preselector Activating Deactivating sse 69 Activating Deactivating remote 169 Z Zooming Activating remote sse Area Multiple mode remote P Area remote iere enrenar DDeactlValilig acros a oriniai oris ETENE Dee deese p Multiple mode Multiple mode remote sssssse soi M sarsensances Se E EEA LENER Restoring original display Single mode Single mode remote
360. tudes per dimen sion 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 in the case of 16 QAM x 16 QAM The symbol decisions of these constellations can be retrieved via the bitstream output The mapping between bits and constellation points is given by the following table Table 4 4 Mapping between bits and constellation points for MIMO QPSK Constellation point normalized Bit sequence 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 For MIMO 16QAM the bit sequence is the same in both and Q Only one dimension is given here Table 4 5 Mapping between bits and constellation points for MIMO 16QAM Constellation point normalized Bit sequence 5 1 1 1 2 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 49 UE Channel Types Constellation point normalized Bit sequence 4 3 UE Channel Types The following channel types can be detected in 3GPP FDD uplink signals by the 3GPP FDD UE application Control channels The 3GPP FDD UE application expects the following control channels for the Code Domain Power measurements Table 4 6 Common 3GPP FDD UE control channels and their usage Channel type Description DPCCH The Dedicated Physical Control Channel is used to synchronize the signal It carries pilot symbols and is expected in the Q branch at code class 8 with code number 0 This channel mu
361. u do using the SmartGrid in manual operation Since the available evaluation types depend on the selected application some parameters for the following commands also depend on the selected measure ment channel Note that the suffix n always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channel see INSTrument SELect on page 159 Ex dou D BV BIo 7 Z niic cecascveceretengnsecaeeagectevesAhaeacosssteanssiescueeavevecangeacenessp nesesccnee 230 EA Y oUEGATalog WINDBONW ID crei oda ce gave arte Rr e tcr e ea ovens 232 E dote IDENtify AWIN DOW E H 232 LAYouEREMoveDWINDGW eci errato eterno acto dai rent xx E ERI eere itta EEEa 232 LAVOUDPREPLace WINDOW TE 233 E dolium TA 233 LAY out WINDOW AA ADD oiri rettet e Ex a n ner XE Ree LEER Dea RR END UN E Ea raa 235 Configuring the Result Display LAYoutWINDowen IDDENI uec cucine dante uet nore paaa aa a ai an LER as 235 LAY oWUEWINBOWsm REMON O sn ede m eG E eo ta ee e eb e aaa 235 EAVOURVVINDOW Sine REPOS c kei oce A Tos P eI cres PRI Ic KPVID SR REQUE 236 LAYout ADD WINDow lt WindowName gt lt Direction gt lt WindowT ype gt This command adds a window to the display This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result To replace an existing window use the LAYout REPLace WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing th
362. ult for a remote query the following abbreviations and assignments to a numeric value are used Table 11 3 BTS channel types and their assignment to a numeric parameter value Param Channel type Description 0 DPCH Dedicated Physical Channel of a standard frame 1 PICH Paging Indication Channel 2 CPICH Common Pilot Channel 3 PSCH Primary Synchronization Channel 4 SSCH Secondary Synchronization Channel 5 PCCPCH Primary Common Control Physical Channel 6 SCCPCH Secondary Common Control Physical Channel 7 HS SCCH HSDPA High Speed Shared Control Channel 8 HS PDSCH HSDPA High Speed Physical Downlink Shared Channel 9 CHAN Channel without any pilot symbols QPSK modulated 10 CPRSD Dedicated Physical Channel in compressed mode 11 CPR TPC Dedicated Physical Channel in compressed mode TPC symbols are sent in the first slot of the gap Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Param Channel type Description 12 CPR SF 2 Dedicated Physical Channel in compressed mode using half spreading factor SF 2 13 CPR SF 2 Dedicated Physical Channel in compressed mode using TPC half spreading factor SF 2 TPC symbols are sent in the first slot of the gap 14 EHICH HSUPA Enhanced HARQ Hybrid Acknowledgement Indicator Channel ERGCH HSUPA Enhanced Relative Grant Channel 15 EAGCH E AGCH Enhanced Absolute Grant Channel 16 SCPICH Secondary Comm
363. unctions menus are not available in 3GPP FDD applications Code Domain Analysis can be configured easily in the Overview dialog box which is displayed when you select the Overview softkey from any menu Time Alignment Error measurement Time Alignment Error measurements are only available in the 3GPP FDD BTS applica tion To perform a Time Alignment Error measurement you must change the measurement type Do one of the following e Select the Overview softkey In the Overview select the Select Measurement button Select the Time Alignment Error measurement e Press the MEAS key on the front panel In the Select Measurement dialog box select the Time Alignment Error measurement 5 2 1 5 2 2 5 2 3 5 2 3 1 5 2 3 2 5 2 3 3 5 2 4 5 2 4 1 5 2 4 2 5 2 4 3 5 2 5 5 2 5 1 5 2 5 2 5 2 5 3 5 2 5 4 5 2 6 5 2 7 5 2 8 5 2 9 5 2 10 5 2 10 1 5 2 10 2 5 2 10 3 5 2 10 4 5 2 10 5 Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Importing and Exporting I Q Data The I Q data to be evaluated for 3GPP FDD can not only be measured by the 3GPP FDD applications themselves it can also be imported to the applications provided it has the correct format Furthermore the evaluated I Q data from the 3GPP FDD appli cations can be exported for further analysis in external applications The import and export functions are available in the Save Recall menu which is dis played when you select the EJ Save o
364. urrently measured signal Or a Select the Add Channel button to insert a row for a new channel below the currently selected row in the channel table b Define the channel specifications required for detection Symbol rate Channel number Whether TFCI is used Timing offset if applicable Number of pilot bits for DPCCH only The channel s code domain power relative to the total signal power Select the Save Table button to store the channel table The table is stored and the dialog box is closed The new channel table is included in the Predefined Tables list in the Channel Detection dialog box To activate the use of the new channel table a Select the table in the Predefined Tables list b Select the Select button A checkmark is displayed next to the selected table c Toggle the Use Predefined Channel Table setting to Predefined d Toggle the Compare Meas Signal with Predefined Table setting to On e Start a new measurement To determine the Time Alignment Error 1 Press the MODE key on the front panel and select the 3GPP FDD BTS applica tions for base station tests or SGPP FDD UE for user equipment tests Code Domain Analysis of the input signal is performed by default Press the Synch softkey to display the Synchronization dialog box Configure the location of the S CPICH for antenna 2 and select the Antenna Pattern Select the Time Alignment Error measurement a Press
365. utput The R amp S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 200 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection on page 199 Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FSW triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FSW is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 200 Level Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 200 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger cport PULSe LENGth on page 201 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by
366. val is automatically determined according to the selected chan nel slot or frame to analyze defined for the evaluation range depending on the result display Note that the frame slot channel is analyzed within the application data If the analysis interval does not yet show the required area of the capture buf fer move through the frames slots channels in the evaluation range or correct the application data range 6 If the Sequencer is off select the Refresh softkey in the Sweep menu to update the result displays for the changed application data Measurement 1 Measuring the Signal Channel Power 10 Measurement Examples Some practical examples for basic 3GPP FDD user equipment tests are provided here They describe how operating and measurement errors can be avoided using cor rect presettings The measurements are performed with an R amp S FSW equipped with option R amp S FSW K73 The measurements can be performed for base station tests in a similar way with option R amp S FSW K72 Key settings are shown as examples to avoid measurement errors Following the cor rect setting the effect of an incorrect setting is shown The measurements are performed using the following devices and accessories e The R amp S FSW with Application Firmware R amp S FSW K73 3GPP FDD UE user equipment test e The Vector Signal Generator R amp S SMU with option R amp S SMU B45 digital stand ard 3GPP options R amp S SMU B20 and R amp S SMU B11 r
367. vates the elimination of the Q offset Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Manual operation See Compensate IQ Offset on page 120 SENSe CDPower PDISplay Mode This command switches between showing the absolute or relative power This parameter only affects the Code Domain Power evaluation Parameters Mode ABS REL ABSolute Absolute power levels RELative Power levels relative to total signal power or BTS application only CPICH channel power see SENSe CDPower PREFerence on page 225 RST ABS Example SENS CDP PDIS ABS Manual operation See Code Power Display on page 120 See Code Power Display on page 122 SENSe CDPower PDIFf State This command defines which slot power difference is displayed in the Power vs Slot evaluation Parameters State ON OFF ON The slot power difference to the previous slot is displayed OFF The current slot power of each slot is displayed RST OFF Example SENS CDP PDIF ON Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Show Difference to Previous Slot on page 120 SENSe CDPower PREFerence Mode This command defines the reference for the relative CDP measurement values 11 5 12 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Parameters Mode TOTal CPICh TOTal Total signal power CPICh CPICH channel power RST TOTal Example SENS CDP PR
368. vel Automatically Auto Level on page 80 Evaluation Range The evaluation range defines which data is evaluated in the result display SENSe CDPowetr CODE 2021222 3 1 piloto eee YLL E X RRVRLE MG S EXRZEL DID MR AN ex SYN PATRES 222 SENSe CDPower FRAMe VALue sisse nennen eh etse en nnne en nnns nsns 222 ISENSeTCDPOWeR SEO 7rd te eere areata neal adhe abate eas eesti readies 223 SENS CDOPoWwermMAP PING m 223 CALCulate lt n gt CDPower Mapping cscccstececeseeeeeeeeeeeeenseeeeeceteseeeeeceneneaenenenaaeaaaeanaes 223 SENSe CDPower CODE lt CodeNumber gt This command sets the code number The code number refers to code class 9 spreading factor 512 Parameters lt CodeNumber gt lt numeric value gt RST 0 Example SENS CDP CODE 30 Manual operation See Channel on page 117 SENSe CDPower FRAMe VALue lt Frame gt This command defines the frame to be analyzed within the captured data Parameters lt Frame gt lt numeric value gt Range 0 CAPTURE LENGTH 1 RST 1 Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Example CDP FRAM VAL 1 Manual operation See Frame To Analyze on page 94 SENSe CDPower SLOT lt SlotNumber gt This command selects the CPICH slot number to be evaluated Parameters lt SlotNumber gt lt numeric value gt RST 0 Example SENS CDP
369. wer mary ults Frame 0 Slot 0 sults Ch 0 256 Fig 10 5 Measurement Example 3 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power with Incorrect Scrambling Code Measurement 4 Triggered Measurement of Relative Code Domain Power If the code domain power measurement is performed without external triggering a sec tion of approximately 20 ms of the test signal is recorded at an arbitrary moment to detect the start of a 3GPP FDD UE frame in this section Depending on the position of the frame start the required computing time can be quite long Applying an external frame trigger can reduce the computing time Test setup 1 Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMU to the input of the R amp S FSW 2 Connect the reference input REF INPUT on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW to the reference input REF on the rear panel of the R amp S SMU coaxial cable with BNC connectors 3 Connect the external trigger input on the front panel of the R amp S FSW TRIGGER INPUT to the external trigger output on the front panel of the R amp S SMU TRIG OUT1 of PAR DATA Settings on the R amp S SMU 1 PRESET 2 FREQ 2 1175 GHz 3 LEVEL 0 dBm NENCGLNNCKNEN QN NEC CN CNN User Manual 1173 9305 02 12 144 R amp S FSW K72 K73 Measurement Examples DIGITAL STD WCDMA 3GPP DIGITAL STD gt Set Default DIGITAL STD gt LINK DIRECTION gt UP REVERSE DIGITAL STD gt TEST MODELS gt DPCCH_DPDCH960ksps DIGITAL STD g
370. wer BTS MCARrier STATe State Activate this command if multiple carriers are used In this case the adjust reference level procedure ensures that the settings of RF attenuation and reference level are optimally adjusted for measuring a multicarrier signal Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CONF WCDP MCAR STAT ON Mode BTS application only SENSe ADJust ALL This command initiates a measurement to determine and set the ideal settings for the current task automatically only once for the current measurement This includes e Reference level e Scrambling code e Scaling Example ADJ ALL Usage Event Manual operation See Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto All on page 108 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation Duration In order to determine the ideal reference level the R amp S FSW performs a measurement on the current input data This command defines the length of the measurement if SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE is set to MANual Parameters Duration Numeric value in seconds Range 0 001 to 16000 0 RST 0 001 Default unit s Example ADJ CONF DUR MODE MAN Selects manual definition of the measurement length ADJ CONF LEV DUR 5ms Length of the measurement is 5 ms Manual operation See Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 109 SENSe ADJust CO
371. wer Channel Table Power vs Symbol Symbol Const Symbol EVM Bitstream Remote command SENSe CDPower SLOT on page 223 Frame To Analyze Defines the frame to be analyzed and displayed Note if this setting is not available in UE tests Capture Mode is set to Slot i e only one slot is captured Remote command SENSe CDPower FRAMe VALue on page 222 Branch UE measurements only Switches between the evaluation of the and the Q branch in UE measurements Remote command CALCulate lt n gt CDPower Mapping on page 223 Details Branch UE measurements only By default the same branch is used for all evaluations However you can select a dif ferent branch for individual windows These settings are only available in the detailed dialog box which is displayed when you select the Details button in the Evaluation Range dialog box 6 2 Code Domain Analysis Settings BTS Measurements Analysis Channel CH SF Range Slot Code Domain Settings Frame Branch Trace 5 Marker A Select Branch for Window Use Common Branch Branch Specifics for To hide the detailed dialog box for individual windows select the Hide button Selecting a Different Branch for a Window Branch UE measurements only By default the same common branch is used by all windows namely the one speci fied by the Branch UE measurements only setting In order to evaluate a different branch for an
372. wer MS CTABle NAME on page 213 Setting parameters lt CodeClass gt Code class of channel Range 2 to 9 lt NoActChan gt Number of active channels Range 0 to4 Return values lt CodeClass gt Code class of channel Range 2 to 9 lt NoActChan gt Number of active channels Range 0 to4 lt ECDP1 gt Measured relative code domain power values of channel 1 lt ECDP2 gt Measured relative code domain power values of channel 2 lt ECDP3 gt Measured relative code domain power values of channel 3 lt ECDP4 gt Measured relative code domain power values of channel 4 Example CONF WCDP MS CTAB EDAT 8 3 Mode UE application only CONFigure WCDPower MS CTABle EDATa EDPCc lt State gt This command activates or deactivates the E DPCCH entry in a predefined channel table Parameters lt State gt RST OFF Example CONF WCDP MS CTAB EDAT EDPC ON Mode UE application only Configuring Code Domain Analysis and Time Alignment Error Measurements 11 5 8 Sweep Settings SENSE AV BRAGS COU ING donee tte ehe rit oe eps eo eat rax ERR ERR Ea 218 SENSe SWEep COUNL cette tette tenentes tet tet tette ttes es 218 SENSe AVERage COUNt lt AverageCount gt This command defines the number of sweeps that the application uses to average traces In case of continuous sweeps the application calculates the moving average over the average count In case of single sweep measurements the application stops
373. xample TRAC DATA PWCDp Returns a list of channel information including the pilot length Usage Query only Mode BTS application only Manual operation See Channel Table on page 19 See Code Domain Power on page 21 TRACe lt n gt DATA TPVSlot This command returns a comma separated list of absolute Power vs Slot results for all 16 slots In contrast to the TRACE lt t gt parameter result absolute values are returned Return values lt SlotNumber gt 0 15 CPICH slot number lt Level gt dBm Slot level value Example CALC2 FEED XTIM CDP PVSLot ABSolute Sets the evaluation for window 2 to POWER VS SLOT TRAC2 DATA TPVSlot Returns a list of absolute frequency errors for all slots in window 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Power vs Slot on page 29 11 9 4 Exporting Trace Results RF measurement trace results can be exported to a file Retrieving Results For more commands concerning data and results storage see the R amp S FSW User Manual MMEMor S TORSPINal caret orte ph ooa arn aen AER DRE EAT E cU n exei idque 262 MMEWMory STORexn TRACe essen nennen nenhn rere d naidaan kaata 262 FORMatDEXPOoRDSEPaEelOE atre ttt tu eode eed yer s etra dr Rd 263 MMEMory STORe FINal lt FileName gt This command exports the marker peak list to a file The file format is dat Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Return values
374. xamples R amp S FSW K73 SENSe CDPower UCPich PATTern Pattern This command defines which pattern is used for signal analysis for the user defined CPICH see SENSe CDPower UCPich STATe on page 285 This command only applies to antenna 1 Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use SENSe CDPower UCPich ANT antenna STATe on page 204 for new remote control programs Parameters Pattern 1 fixed usage of Pattern 1 according to standard 2 fixed usage of Pattern 2 according to standard RST 2 Example SENS CDP UCP PATT 1 Mode BTS application only SENSe CDPower UCPich STATe State Defines whether the common pilot channel CPICH is defined by a user defined posi tion instead of its default position If enabled the user defined position must be defined using SENSe CDPower UCPich CODE on page 284 This command only applies to antenna 1 Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use SENSe CDPower UCPich ANT lt antenna gt CODE on page 203 for new remote control pro grams Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example SENS CDP UCP ON Mode BTS application only Programming Examples R amp S FSW K73 The following programming examples are based on the measurement examples described in chapter 10 Measurement Examples on page 137 for manual operation The measurements are performed with an R amp S FSW equ
375. y increase the Sweep Average Count in the Sweep Config dia log box e Configure markers and delta markers to determine deviations and offsets within the results e g when comparing errors or peaks 12 Start a new sweep with the defined settings In MSRA mode you may want to stop the continuous measurement mode by the Sequencer and perform a single data acquisition a Select the Sequencer icon ESI from the toolbar b Set the Sequencer state to OFF c Press the RUN SINGLE key To define or edit a channel table Channel tables contain a list of channels to be detected and their specific parameters You can create user defined and edit pre defined channel tables 1 Select the Channel Detection softkey from the main Code Domain Analyzer menu to open the Channel Detection dialog box To define a new channel table select the New button next to the Predefined Tables list To edit an existing channel table a Select the existing channel table in the Predefined Tables list b Select the Edit button next to the Predefined Tables list In the Channel Table dialog box define a name and optionally a comment that describes the channel table The comment is displayed when you set the focus on the table in the Predefined Tables list Define the channels to be detected using one of the following methods Select the Measure Table button to create a table that consists of the channels detected in the c

R&S FSW-K72/-K73 3GPP FDD User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S FSW-K72/-K73 3GPP FDD User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S FSW-K72/-K73 3GPP FDD User Manual